JP2021118989A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine causing a player to reliably view a performance to be viewed by the player.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes: sub control means capable of executing control on the basis of information from main control means; and performance display means controlled by the sub control means. The sub control means includes performance display specification means capable of specifying a prescribed performance display in the performance display means as a specific performance display. The display in the performance display means includes a non-permission display in which overlap with the specific performance display is inhibited. In a specific inclusion display in which the specific performance display is derived at any timing, overlap discrimination processing is executed, the overlap discrimination processing to be executed when the specific performance display is started and discriminating whether at least parts of the specific performance display and the non-permission display are overlapped or not, and, when it is discriminated to be overlapped, the game machine changes derivation timing of one of the specific performance display and the non-permission display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a winning / failing lottery is held to determine whether or not a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, it is configured so that various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state, and there are many players who go to the game hall looking forward to seeing a specific effect.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-271480

By the way, in general, the types of productions are increased and the combination of productions is changed to diversify the productions. If the production that is the centerpiece of the gaming machine is hindered by other productions, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely allowing a player to visually recognize an effect to be visually recognized. ..

The gaming machine of the present invention
Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display.
As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited.
Whether or not at least a part of the specific effect display and the disallowed display overlaps when the specific effect display is started in the specific content display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing. Duplicate discrimination processing is performed,
When it is determined by the duplication determination process that the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is changed. There is.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a rotary game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to ensure that the player can visually recognize the effect to be visually recognized.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning apparatus control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determining a decorative pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the count process in continuous chan. It is a front view which shows the visual appearance mode of a decorative pattern display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (in a normal game state) in a decorative symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (in the jackpot state) in a decorative symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal / time reduction mode pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change mode pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the scene update process. It is a time chart of the variation display (in the normal mode / time reduction mode) in the decorative pattern display device. It is a time chart of the variation display (in the probability variation mode) in the decorative symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence relation (combination determination table) of a moving image pattern and a value of a combination determination counter. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) combination storage area and (b) round schedule storage area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the NG number flag. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot moving image setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot moving image individual start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot moving image individual start processing. It is a time chart of a jackpot state (at 15RS) in a decorative symbol display device. It is a time chart of a jackpot state (at 8RS) in a decorative symbol display device. It is sectional drawing of the production handle. It is sectional drawing of the production handle.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame constituting the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 11 as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14 as the front frame, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame component 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame 14 may be configured to be directly openly supported by the outer frame 11 instead of being supported via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game ball discharged from the lower payment outlet 16 is the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launch handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided as an operating means (launching operating means) protruding toward the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a rotation operating body 18a as an operation unit provided so as to be rotatable, and a touch as a touch detecting means capable of detecting that a human touches the handle 18 at a position (not shown). A sensor and a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18 are provided. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b as a stop operation means that can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the stop lever 18b is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

As shown in FIG. 2, an upper plate 19 capable of storing game balls paid out from the upper payment outlet 17 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate continuous passage 71 and the lower payment outlet 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display unit 124 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. In a game hall or the like, when the lending switch 121 is operated with a game card having a balance inserted (inserted) into the CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, the lending switch 121 is operated in response to the operation. The rental ball is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. In addition, the balance display unit 124 displays how much the balance of the card inserted in the CR unit is.

Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be able to appear and disappear from the upper surface of the upper plate 19, and is always urged to the side protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 by an urging means (not shown). By pressing the ball removal button 123, the space between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is opened, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 19 is guided to the lower plate 15. .. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, an effect button 125 as an effect operation means, a cross button 126, and a specific effect button 127 as a specific operation means are provided. An LED is built in the effect button 125 and the specific effect button 127, and by pressing the effect button 125, the cross button 126, and the specific effect button 127, the decorative symbol display device 42 and the like described later may be used. Corresponding production is performed or the content of the production is changed.

Further, on the left side of the lower plate 15, an effect handle 401 as a tactile transmission means protruding toward the front side is provided. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the effect handle 401 is slidable in the front-rear direction adjacent to the first slide member 402 provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction and to the right of the first slide member 402. A drive that makes the provided second slide member 403, the support plate 404 provided adjacent to the right side of the second slide member 403, the first slide member 402, and the second slide member 403 displaceable, respectively. A mechanism 405, a first slide member 402, a second slide member 403, and a bag-shaped cover member 406 made of a soft resin (olefin-based elastomer or the like) that collectively covers the support plate 404 are provided.

The first slide member 402 is configured to be displaceable between a reference position in which the front end portion is substantially the same as the front end portion of the support plate 404 and a retracted position displaced rearward from the reference position in the front-rear direction. There is. The second slide member 403 is configured to be displaceable between a reference position in which the front end portion is substantially the same as the front end portion of the support plate 404 and a protruding position displaced forward from the reference position in the front-rear direction. There is.

Further, the second slide member 403 includes a base piece 407 supported by the drive mechanism 405 and a tip piece 408 rotatably connected to the front end portion of the base piece 407 with the vertical direction as the axial direction. ing. When the first slide member 402 and the second slide member are in the reference position, the tip piece 408 is supported by the first slide member 402 and the support plate 404 and extends on the extension line of the base piece 407. On the other hand, when the second slide member 403 is displaced to the protruding position and the first slide member 402 is displaced to the retracted position, the tip piece 408 is guided by the cover member 406 and extends in a slightly inclined posture to the left. It has come to exist.

Further, although not shown, the first slide member 402, the second slide member 403, and the support plate 404 have an axis extending in the left-right direction behind the front surface of the front frame 14 and an axis extending in the vertical direction. It is configured to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The drive mechanism 405 of the effect handle 401 is electrically connected to the sub control device 262, which will be described later, and is driven and controlled according to the effect and the like.

In addition, the effect handle 401 of the present embodiment is configured to be covered with the cover member 406 so that a bag-shaped special part 411 made of rubber (sponge rubber or the like) can be attached. There are multiple variations of the dedicated parts 411, such as materials, paints (colors and patterns), surface shapes, etc. It may be attached to the 401, or it may be rentable at the game hall.

A holding frame 412 for holding the opening shape is embedded in the opening edge of the dedicated part 411. Further, an engaging portion 413 is provided for a part of the opening edge of the dedicated part 411 (a portion arranged on the right side in the state of being attached to the effect handle 401).

Further, the effect handle 401 has an engaged portion 414 that can be engaged with the engaging portion 413 and an engaging portion that is engaged with the engaged portion 414 adjacent to the right side of the cover member 406. An attachment detection means (infrared sensor, optical sensor, switch, etc.) that can detect the 413 and an engagement detection means (infrared sensor, optical sensor, switch, etc.) that are provided above the engaged portion 414 and the engaged portion 413 and the engaged portion 414 are engaged with each other. A release button 416 (see FIG. 1) that can be released with one touch and a mounting lamp 417 (see FIG. 1) that is built in the release button 416 and emits light when the engaging portion 413 is detected by the attachment detecting means are provided. Has been done. The detection signal of the mounting detection means is input to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 controls the lighting of the mounting lamp 417 according to the detection signal of the mounting detecting means.

It is possible to enjoy the effect of the effect handle 401, which will be described later, without attaching the special part 411 to the effect handle 401. Further, the cover member 406 is formed with a groove portion extending in the front-rear direction, and when the special part 411 is attached, the air between the special part 411 and the cover member 406 is configured to escape to the outside through the groove portion. You may be there. Further, when the return switch 122 is operated while the detection by the mounting detection means is being performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to derive a display indicating that the dedicated part 411 is mounted. It is also good (it is possible to set it without deriving it). In the present embodiment, the effect handle 401 constitutes the parts mounting portion.

Further, on the front surface of the front frame 14, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the front frame 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the gaming state or the like. For example, an annular illumination portion 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached to each other in a front and rear pair, but is attached after being assembled into a round shape as a whole.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39 in a state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39. There is. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning device 31, a first variable winning device 32a (first variable winning means) as a variable winning means, a second variable winning device 32b (second variable winning means), and starting. A first start winning device 33a (first starting ball entering means), a second starting winning device 33b (second starting ball entering means), a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, etc. are arranged as ball entering means. Has been done. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning devices such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 19 or the lower. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

In the present embodiment, three balls are entered in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, ten balls are entered in the general winning device 31, and three balls are entered in the variable winning device 32. If there is, 15 game balls are paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (which is not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30) through which the game ball passes in the game area, the game ball is not paid out. In addition, the first starting winning device 33a, the general winning device 31, and the through gate 34 are configured so that a game ball moving in the game area can always enter or pass through. The two starting winning devices 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are configured to change their states between an open state in which the game ball can be entered and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be entered.

As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b include a condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball and a first starting winning switch 224a as a starting winning ball detecting means. , A second start winning switch 224b is provided. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state as a special gaming state in which the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are opened. In addition to the winning / failing lottery, the special display devices 43a and 43b, which will be described later, and the decorative symbol display device 42 perform variable display. Then, if the winner is won by the winning or losing lottery, the jackpot state will be given.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning devices such as the general winning device 31 can use the out port 36. It is discharged to the outside of the game area through it. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged. ing.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42, which will be described later. A pair of left and right entry ports 151 are provided on the upper part of the center frame 47, and the game balls that enter the inside of the center frame 47 through the entry openings 151 are left and right side portions of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on the stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via the warp flow path 152 extending vertically along the above. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed on the inner back side of the center of the stage 153. .. In addition, the pocket 154 communicates with the guide passage 155 leading to the game area directly above the first start winning device 33a, and the game ball entering the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability of being described later. The ball is inserted into the first start winning device 33a.

A first start winning device 33a is arranged at a lower position of the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) through which the game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. The first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with a configuration (opening / closing member or the like) that changes the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

A first variable winning device 32a is provided at a lower right position of the first starting winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a includes a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, a large winning opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a game in which the ball enters the large winning opening. A count switch 223a for detecting a ball is provided, a large winning opening solenoid is driven and controlled, and the shutter is opened and closed to switch the first variable winning device 32a (large winning opening) between a closed state and an open state.

The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in a big hit state. In the large winning shutter of the first variable winning device 32a of the present embodiment, the lower edge portion of the large winning shutter is rotatably supported along the lower edge portion of the large winning opening, and the first variable winning shutter is rotatably supported. In the closed state of the device 32a, the big prize shutter extends up and down to close the big prize opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the big prize shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first variable winning device 32a, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly inclined downward toward the rear) and flows down in front of the big winning opening. The game ball is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the large prize shutter and guided to the large prize opening.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is to be entered into the first start winning device 32a by arranging a game nail or the like provided in the game area, the game ball is placed in a variable display device unit in the game area. It is necessary to pass (left-handed) through the area (left-handed area) located on the left side of 35, and even if it is passed through (right-handed) the area (right-handed area) located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35. Even so), it is not possible to enter the ball into the first start winning device 32a. On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 32a, it is necessary to pass the game ball through the right side region, and even if the game ball is passed through the left side region, the first variable winning device 32a It is almost impossible to enter the ball.

In the lower part of the right side region, a second start winning device 33b is provided at a position on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 32a. The second start winning device 33b includes a pair of blade members 37 provided so as to be rotatable and displaceable adjacent to the left and right sides of a winning opening (starting winning opening) into which a game ball can enter. In the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tip portions of the pair of blade members 37 and the game nail, and the second start The winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible to insert a game ball. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 changes to an open position that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b secures a gap through which the game ball passes between the blade member 37 and the game nail, and the game ball enters the ball. Is allowed, and the blade member 37 guides the game ball moving sideways of the second start winning device 33b to the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b (the game ball becomes easier to enter). It becomes an open state.

In the upper part of the right side region, a through gate 34 is provided above the second start winning device 33c so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass through one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 is not provided in the right side region.

Further, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In order to teach the result of the ball entry support lottery, a variable display is performed. Then, when the ball is won in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in a winning / failing lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won with a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning / failing lottery. Further, a "high ball entry state" as a second ball entry state in which the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33c. There is a "low ball entry state" as a first ball entry state in which the time zone in which the blade member 37 is opened is reduced as compared with the high ball entry state. Hereinafter, the state of low probability state and low ball entry state is referred to as "normal mode", and the state of low probability state and high ball entry state is referred to as "time reduction mode (or time reduction mode)", and is referred to as high probability state. And the state of high ball entry is called "probability change mode".

The high ball entry state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, and (2) a single opening time of the second start winning device 33b (2). (Specified time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state. (4) The number of times the second start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is larger than that in the low ball entry state, and (5) The winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is higher than in the low ball entry state. For example, it should be in a high state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment adopts the configurations of (1), (2), (4), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .. As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, the number of times the winning / failing lottery is executed increases, and the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode is continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode and the probability variation mode are variable displays on the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the jackpot state does not occur. Is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), the process ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

A second variable winning device 32b is provided at a position above the second starting winning device 33b and below the through gate 34 in the lower right portion of the center frame 47. The second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment includes a specific area 141 in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an opening / closing member 143 that opens and closes a ball entry opening 142 that serves as an entrance to the specific area 141. A solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing member 143 is provided, and the solenoid is driven and controlled to open / close the opening / closing member 143 to switch the second variable winning device 32b between a closed state and an open state. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which a game ball can enter in a jackpot state.

The opening / closing member 143 of the present embodiment is rotatably supported around a shaft portion (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the ball entry opening 142, and the second variable winning device 32b is closed. In the state, the opening / closing member 143 extends vertically to close the ball entry opening 142. On the other hand, in the open state of the second variable winning device 32b, the opening / closing member 143 opens to the right (the upper surface is slightly inclined upward toward the right) and flows down to the right of the second variable winning device 32b. The game ball is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the opening / closing member 143 and guided to the ball entry opening 142.

Further, the second variable winning device 32b has a ball entry count switch 226 capable of detecting all the game balls that have entered the specific area 141, and a game that has entered the specific area 141 and is detected by the ball entry count switch 226. A specific entry section 145 and a non-specific entry section 146 in which a ball can enter, a specific entry detection switch 223b for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific entry section 145, and a non-specific entry section 146. A non-specific entry detection switch 223c that detects a game ball that has entered the ball, and a distribution device that guides the game ball detected by the entry count switch 226 to either the specific entry section 145 or the non-specific entry section 146. It has 149 and.

The sorting device 149 has a slide bar 149a that is displaced to a closed position that regulates entry into the specific entry section 145 and an open position that allows entry into the specific entry section 145, and a slide bar at predetermined intervals. It is equipped with a solenoid (not shown) that displaces 149a to the open position. If the slide bar 149a is in the open position when the game ball that has entered the specific area 141 reaches the distribution device 149, the game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 145 and the slide bar 149a is in the closed position. For example, the game ball enters the non-specific entry unit 146.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball that has entered the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b enters the specific ball entry unit 145, the probability variation mode is provided.

The jackpot types of the present embodiment include a 15-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15RS"), an 8-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RS"), and an 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "8RN"). ). Regarding "15RS", the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b has eight pieces. One round is the entry of a game ball, which is repeated 15 times, and then the jackpot state ends. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32a is opened in the first to seventh rounds and the ninth to fifteenth rounds, and the second variable winning device 32b is opened in the eighth round. It has become. That is, with respect to "15RS", in the eighth round, by inserting the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball enters the specific entry portion 145, and the "15RS" After the jackpot state ends, the "probability change mode" is given.

Regarding "8RS", the first to seventh rounds are one round in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds or eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a. Then, the eighth round is performed as one round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 30 seconds or eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b. That is, also for "8RS", the game ball can be entered into the specific ball entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b in the eighth round, and the "probability variation mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. It has become.

Regarding "8RN", in the first to seventh rounds, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or eight game balls enter the first variable winning device 32a in one round. Then, the eighth round is performed as one round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.1 seconds or eight game balls enter the second variable winning device 32b. That is, regarding the "eighth round" of the "8RN", it is a jackpot round in which the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b cannot be expected and the increase of the game ball cannot be expected. Therefore, in the jackpot state of "8RN", the game ball cannot be entered into the specific ball entry unit 145, and the "time reduction mode" is provided after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, except for the 8th round of "15RS" and "8RS", even if the game ball enters the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b, the slide bar 149a of the sorting device 149 is in the closed position. Therefore, the ball does not enter the specific ball entry unit 145 (the timing at which the game ball entered when the opening / closing member 143 is opened reaches the distribution device 149 does not match the timing at which the slide bar 149a is set to the open position). It may be configured as such.

In addition, a special display is provided adjacent to the upper right portion of the substantially elliptical game area, in which a variable display is performed to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a. The first special display device 43a as a means and the second special display means as a special display means for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b. When a game ball is entered into the start winning winning devices 33a and 33b during the variation display on the special display devices 43b and the special display devices 43a and 43b, the variation display corresponding to the entry is stored on hold. The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b as the hold display means to be shown, and the variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 are lined up. When a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 as the normal display means and the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display corresponding to the passage is reserved and stored. A normal hold display device 44 indicating the above is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 will be described later. The display is directly controlled by the main control device 261 as the main control means.

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special figure lamp). Then, upon the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, the first special display device 43a is configured to perform the switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp.

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special figure lamp). Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, the second special display device 43b switches the second special figure lamp (variable display).

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the winning / failing lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the variation display is stopped (combination of the special drawing lamps that are lit) is associated with various results of the winning / failing lottery, and the winning / failing lottery depends on the lighting mode when the variation display is stopped. The result of, that is, "big hit" or "missing" is definitely displayed.

Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, any of "15RS", "8RS", and "8RN" You will also be taught if there is one. In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that teach various jackpot types and that they are out of order, and one of them is selected to display the stop. Will be done.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a, "15RS", "8RS", and "8RN" are won. There is a possibility of winning "15RS" and "8RS" in the winning / failing lottery that is held when the game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b, and winning "8RN". There is no possibility of doing so.

Further, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and the next fluctuation display can be started after the specified time has elapsed (after the fluctuation interval). Has been done. Further, if the next fluctuation display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second. The special display device 43b is configured to switch from a lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which variable display is not performed. It should be noted that the lighting mode indicating the result of the winning / failing lottery may be maintained as it is.

The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b are each composed of two LEDs (first hold lamp and second hold lamp). In the present embodiment, the variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variation display") based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a can be held and stored up to four times. Further, the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b (hereinafter, referred to as “second variation display”) is also configured to be hold-stored for up to four times.

Further, for example, when the first fluctuation display is held for one time, the first hold lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when the first fluctuation display is held for two times, the first fluctuation display is held for two times. , When the left and right 1st hold lamps are lit and the 1st fluctuation display is held 3 times, the 1st hold lamp on the left side blinks and the 1st hold lamp on the right side lights up, and the 1st change When the display is held for 4 times, the left and right first hold lamps blink. If a game ball newly wins a prize in the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

In the present embodiment, the reserved variable display is basically digested in the reserved order, but when both the first variable display and the second variable display are reserved, the second variable display is used. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting winning device 33b is not completely digested, the first variation display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, when one of the first hold lamps is lit, a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one of the second hold lamps is lit, the first variation display is postponed. The second variation display will be performed first.

The ordinary symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). Then, the normal symbol display device 41 has a configuration in which, for example, the normal map lamp on the right side (outer peripheral side of the game area) blinks (variably displays) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. There is. Further, after the variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the ball entry support lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the fluctuation display is stopped (combination of the lighting normal lamps) is associated with various results of the ball entry support lottery, and the lighting mode when the fluctuation display is stopped depends on the lighting mode. The result of the ball entry support lottery is definitely displayed. For example, lighting both the left and right Fuzu lamps indicates "winning", and lighting only the left Fuzu lamp indicates "off".

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, which is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34, can be held and stored up to four times. For example, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal hold lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when the normal symbol display device 41 is held for two times, the left and right normals are normal. The hold lamp lights up, and when three times are held, the left side normal hold lamp blinks, and the right side normal hold lamp lights up, and when four times are held, the left and right normal hold lamps. Flashes. If the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect display means capable of displaying a decorative symbol, which is composed of a liquid crystal display device. The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to variably display the decorative symbol as an effect in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 is also referred to as “effect variable display”. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub control device 262 is based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. Auxiliary display contents are determined, and based on the determination, display is performed by the display control device 45.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, lower symbol display area) of upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorations are provided in each symbol display area. Symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of the areas). For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed by the main control device 261, the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b display the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the jackpot. (For example, in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed so as to line up on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is displayed. It will be started.

When the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area as a preliminary step. The Rukoto. In this way, the reach state is a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area. Of course, just because a reach state occurs does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit, and it may come off.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol (reach symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If doublet is displayed (when doublet is stopped), a jackpot state is given. Further, in the normal mode, when the number pattern of the decorative pattern has an odd number of doublets, "15RS" or "8RS" is generated, and when the number pattern has an even number of doublets, "15RS", " When either "8RS" or "8RN" occurs and the number is "7", "15RS" is generated. Further, in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, when the number pattern of the decorative pattern becomes an odd number of doublets, "15RS" or "8RS" is generated (there is a high possibility that it becomes "15RS"). ), If the number is even, "15RS" or "8RS" is generated (there is a high possibility that it is "8RS"), and if it is "7", it is "15RS". "Is generated.

In the present embodiment, as an effect of teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying, a plurality of effect stages (with different backgrounds and the like) are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, the "probability change stage" that confirms that you are staying in the probability change mode, the "normal stage" that confirms that you are staying in the normal mode, and the "pull back" that you are staying in the time reduction mode. There is a "stage". That is, when "15RS" and "8RS" are won, the stage shifts to the "probability change stage" after the jackpot state ends. If the player wins the "8RN", the player shifts to the "pullback stage" after the jackpot state ends. Further, when the variation display is performed 100 times in the probability change stage and the pullback stage, the stage shifts to the "normal stage".

Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is the decorative symbol. It is also taught in the display device 42. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 42, a hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed at the lower part (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42. There is.

At the bottom of the left side region, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge of the game region. The general winning device 31 projects forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening at which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

Further, the game board 30 is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surfaces of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the rail 50 may flow backward until the game ball launched by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. Be taken.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the lower payout outlet 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19. Further, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 has the gap. A rail ball passage 72 is formed to guide the more dropped game ball to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball returns to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. It is discharged.

Further, a launch ball passage 74 is provided which communicates between the upper plate 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides the game ball stored in the upper plate 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) communicating with the lower plate communication passage 71 is formed in the launch ball passage 74 (a downstream portion of the upper plate 19 is also possible), and a first shutter (not shown) for opening and closing the communication hole (not shown). (Not shown) is provided. The first shutter is always urged to the closed position side that closes the communication hole by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is interlocked with the ball pulling button 123, and is configured to be displaced to an opening position for opening the communication hole when the ball pulling button 123 is pressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is formed with a discharge port 15a capable of discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the discharge port 15a is provided. A second shutter 15b for opening and closing is provided. The second shutter 15b is always urged to the closed position side that closes the discharge port 15a by an urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to be interlocked with the ball pulling lever 25 (for example, connected or integrally formed), and when the ball pulling lever 25 is pressed (to the left). Is configured to be displaced to an open position that opens the discharge port 15a.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate continuous passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to almost close the outlet of the payout passage 67. There is. Further, in the state where the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end portion on the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71. It should be noted that the entrances (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance in the closed state of the front frame 14. The game ball can pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate connecting passage 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower plate connecting passage 71), and the lower plate connecting passage 71 overflows. It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected by the fullness detection switch for a predetermined time, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display and voice of the decorative symbol display device 42 is notified. Is controlled. When the stagnation of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. The payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. The 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is attached to.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is housed in the back surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning devices (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member has a structure that cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the various winning devices, corresponding to various winning devices such as the general winning device 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, a count switch 223a is provided in the first variable winning device 32a, and a second variable winning device is provided. The device 32b is provided with a ball entry count switch 226, a specific ball entry detection switch 223b, and a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223a, a ball entry count switch 226, a specific entry detection switch 223b, a non-specific entry detection switch 223c, and a through gate switch. A first board surface relay board that is electrically connected to the 225 via a cable connector is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second starting winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, on the back surface of the game board 30, a solenoid for a large winning opening that opens the large winning openings of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b and a blade member 37 of the second starting winning device 33b are opened and closed. A solenoid or the like is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal plate 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no code is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current game state (start of variable display, start of jackpot state, start of probabilistic mode, continuation of probabilistic mode, etc.), open detection switch described later. Outputs information on various error states such as terminals for outputting information on opening of the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 detected by 91 and 92, ball entry error, lower plate full tank error, tank ball no error, and payout error. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 and the like are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail 357 is connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Has been done. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball recovery mechanism described above flow in, and the game balls are placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls that have won each prize device such as the general prize device 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning devices is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the power supply / emission control device 310, the payout control device 311 and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The power supply / launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, is housed in a board box 313a, and is fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / emission control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that an opened trace of the board box 311a remains. There is.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply / emission control device 310). The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout motor occurs, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14, and an inner frame is formed by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotating it in one direction. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the extension wall portion 83 has a configuration. The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided on the lower right front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. 5 shows. As shown, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right lower part of the inner frame 12 on the back side (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14 to turn off the front frame opening detection switch 91, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state and is turned on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 as the main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the payout control device 311 and the sub control device 262, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, the ordinary symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the above-mentioned special display devices 43a and 43b and the ordinary symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 has a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223a, a specific ball entry detection switch 223b, a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c, and a start winning switch 224a. , 224b, through gate switch 225, ball entry count switch 226, and other various detection switches, hold display devices 46a, 46b, ordinary hold display device 44, and other information display devices, power supply / launch control device 310, and payout control device 311. , Various substrates such as the sub control device 262, solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and various electric components such as a motor for opening and closing the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) are connected. There is. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which are memories for temporarily storing various data, etc., are provided, and other various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission / reception circuits (not shown) are provided. It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, a specific effect button 127, an effect handle 401, an annular illumination unit 102, an error display lamp 104, and the like are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is taught that the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 have won the jackpot, and the sub control device 262 is used. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by the above, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply circuit 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

In the backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set as the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to recover power. These are the three payout return commands that are sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261, the power supply / launch control device 310 (launch control circuit 312), the payout device 358, the CR unit connection board 314, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The CR unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (rental switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The rental unit) and the payout control device 311 are electrically connected to each other. Then, information on the ball lending operation unit by the player or the ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the balance of the game value is stored in the card which is the recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted, and the payout request signal of the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. The recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type or a stick type.

Further, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310. It is configured to output every (for example, every 2 msec).

The launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60. A handle 18, a payout control device 311 and a main control device 261 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 312. Further, in the launch control circuit 312, the dial position signal from the variable resistor indicating the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotation operation body 18a) and the player touch the handle 18 from the handle 18. It is configured to be able to input a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is present and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected from the payout control device 311.

Then, the launch control circuit 312 outputs a launch state signal to the main control device 261 on condition that the touch signal, the launch switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input, and the main control device 261 launches. On condition that the status signal is input, the launch permission signal and the ball feed signal are output to the launch control circuit 312. The main control device 261 is configured to output a firing permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the firing status signal is being input.

Further, the launch control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feed device 63 and send the game ball to the launch position when the ball feed signal is input. In the state where the preparatory ball detection sensor provided in the ball feed device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not the game ball exists at the launch position detects that the game ball already exists at the launch position, the ball feed device 63 Is not driven (even if the ball feed signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position).

Further, the launch control circuit 312 drives the launch device 60 (launch solenoid) on condition that a touch signal, a launch switch signal, a CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and a launch permission signal are input. It is configured to let you. As a result, the game ball set at the launch position is launched by the launch device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

Further, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like with the necessary operating power to each of them through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. It should be noted that operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the control system drive voltage of 5 volt for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. NS.

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 259, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Generation of internal command for VDP526) is executed. As a result, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP526 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information at the time of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning / failing random number counter C1 as a winning / failing random number generation means used for a winning / failing lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used for determining a jackpot type (type lottery). The determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate the reach state in the decorative symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit / fail random number counter C1, and the first The first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42), and the second start winning device 33b are open. It is decided to use the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball entry support lottery. The fluctuation selection counter C3 is also used for drawing a reach pattern when the decorative symbol display device 42 is disengaged and fluctuates. Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the fluctuation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42.

The counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage means for storing the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3, and a normal symbol random number counter C4 for storing the values. There is a variable hold area. The ordinary variable hold area includes four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times.

Further, the special fluctuation holding area includes a first special fluctuation holding area having four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), a second special fluctuation holding area, and one execution area. There is. In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored in series. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored in series. By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation display (first fluctuation display and second fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b can be held up to four times, respectively.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 631, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 631), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit / miss random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 631), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit / miss random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 stored in the winning / failing random number counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is "7,307", which is a high probability. The number of values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the state (probability variation mode) is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two winning / failing determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot. There is a first hit / fail judgment table in which "7, 307" is stored as a jackpot value, and a second hit / fail judgment table in which "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are stored as jackpot values.

The type determination counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 19, for example, to reach the upper limit value (that is, 19) and then return to the lower limit value of 0. Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and There is only one type determination table because the distribution of the jackpot types is the same regardless of which jackpot corresponds to the entry into either of the second start winning devices 33b). Then, when a jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (the type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is given. The Rukoto.

The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

The fluctuation selection counter C3 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 238, the upper limit value (that is, 238) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, after the reach state is generated for the decorative symbol by the variable selection counter C3, the reach state is also generated as the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. After that, a lottery will be drawn for "reach other than front-back deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and "complete deviation" in which the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has one reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 and the reach pattern. For example, the game ball to the first start winning device 33a The first reach determination table referred to when determining the reach pattern (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 acquired when the ball is entered, and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b. It is also possible to provide a second reach determination table that is referred to when determining a reach pattern (when there is no big hit) based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 acquired with the entry of the ball.

The variation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. ..

Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one of the fluctuation type counters CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 255, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 255), it is the lower limit value. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, for example, is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 31, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 31), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. It has become. In addition, the variation time of the variation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is associated with the rough variation pattern (reach pattern of normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) of the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42. If the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also determined (the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol display device 42 that fits exactly within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b). Is to be selected). For example, the fluctuation time is determined based on the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS2 (for example, in the case of corresponding to a jackpot of 15RS, 15RS It may be configured to determine one of the stop display modes corresponding to the jackpot).

The counter or the like used to determine the fluctuation time or fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, the reach pattern of the decorative symbol can be determined only by the first variable type counter CS1, or the reach pattern of the decorative symbol can be determined by combining the first variable type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

Further, the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol.

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the fluctuation selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 232, the upper limit value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The normal symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of winning random numbers in the low ball entry state is 31, and the range is "1 to 31". On the other hand, the number of winning random numbers in the high-entry state is 232, and the range is "1-232". That is, in the present embodiment, for the ROM 502, the low entry support determination table referred to in the entry support lottery in the low entry state and the high entry reference in the entry support lottery in the high entry state. A ball support judgment table is prepared. Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs the variable display for a predetermined time, and then (the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately). After that, the stop display is displayed in the mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to the winning, and the second start winning device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of, and for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

If there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. Further, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, the prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and the prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (the game ball is paid out). NS). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S303, the random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the ordinary symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. do. In the following step S306, a firing permission command setting process for performing processing such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply / firing control device 310 is performed. After that, in step S307, the remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring the game ball in the second variable winning device 32b is performed, and then the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 includes a first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds for the first variation display triggered by a prize in the first start winning device 33a, and a second hold counter Na triggered by a prize in the second start winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds for variable display is provided. A total number of pending counters may be provided to count the total number of pending variable displays (the total number of pending first variable displays and the number of pending second variable displays).

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a winning / failing random number storage area for storing the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3 A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

Further, in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, is it the first variation display based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a, or the second variation display based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b? A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating the above is stored. Hereinafter, "information indicating that the first variable display is stored in the variable storage area" is also referred to as "the first variable flag is set on", and "the second variable display is stored in the variable storage area". "The information indicating the above is stored" is also referred to as "the second fluctuation flag is set on".

First, in step S501, it is determined from the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S511. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both off, the left second hold lamp is turned on, the left second hold lamp is on, and the right second hold lamp is off. If this is the case, both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right second hold lamps are lit, the right second hold lamp remains lit and the left second hold lamp is lit. Is blinking, and when the second hold lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the second hold lamp on the right side is in the lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right second hold lamps is performed.

After step S504, in step S505, each value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process of step S303 (the hit / fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and Each value stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (win / fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) among the vacant hold areas of the second special fluctuation hold area. do. After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs type determination processing to determine the type of. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S508, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit / fail random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is used as a deviation. Performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "7" and "307" stored in the first hit / miss determination table. To determine. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified and described, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is "307", and if it is determined affirmatively by either of these determinations, it is determined affirmatively in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in, the negative determination is made in step S5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second hit / miss determination table "8 to 16". , 308 to 316 ”. By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" are values that are big hits only in the high probability state (probability variation mode). Even in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second pass / fail flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is "off" even in a high probability state, the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first or second pass / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5301 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5301 (a jackpot state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration in step S5302. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0 to 11" corresponding to "15RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5303, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5304, and then this process ends.

Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first pass / fail flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (a big hit state always occurs), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a jackpot state does not occur (may be out of order) at least in a low probability state, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5402, and a new hit state is created. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "front-back deviation reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear out-of-reach is turned on, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5404, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front-rear deviation". It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, this process ends after turning on the flags other than before and after in step S5405.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, when the variation display ends without going through the reach state, the present process ends as it is.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the second fluctuation time of the second variation display is performed. That is, the fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 by referring to the fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, there is a high possibility that it is the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode). Further, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding holding area in the second special fluctuation holding area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the holding area is not erased).

In step S510 following step S509, the starting command setting process is performed. The starting command includes variation information (information used to determine the content of the variation display) indicating the results of the hit / fail determination process, the type determination process, the reach determination process, and the variation time determination process, and the first command. Information indicating whether the fluctuation information is triggered by entering the starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is included, and the sub control device 262 is subjected to the next external output process (see step S201). It is output.

After the processing of step S510, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S511, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S511, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when affirmative determination is made, in step S512, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S512, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513, and one inkment of the first hold counter Na is performed.

In the following step S514, the addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first hold lamps are both off, the left first hold lamp is turned on, the left first hold lamp is on, and the right first hold lamp is off. If this is the case, both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right first hold lamps are lit, the right first hold lamp remains lit and the left first hold lamp is lit. Is blinked, and when the first hold lamp on the left side is in the blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in the lit state, a process for blinking both the left and right first hold lamps is performed.

After step S514, in step S515, each value of the winning / failing random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is stored in an empty holding area (winning / failing random number storage area, winning type random number storage) in the first special fluctuation holding area. Store in area (reach random number storage area). After step S515, the process proceeds to step S516.

In step S516, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the pass / fail determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S517, when it is determined in step S514 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Performs the first type determination process for determining the type.

Here, the first type determination process in step S517 will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second pass / fail flag is set to ON in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a jackpot state may occur), the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is referred to in step S5202. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value "0 to 9" corresponding to "8RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value "10" corresponding to "15RS" in consideration of the type determination table in step S5204. , 11 ”is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, when the big hit state is won with the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a, the ball can be expected to enter the specific winning section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b, and by extension, the probability is high. The ratio of the jackpot state (15RS or 8RS) to which the state is given is 60%, whereas when the jackpot state is won with the ball entering the second start winning device 33b, the jackpot state is won. The jackpot state (15RS or 8RS) to which the high probability state is given is given at 100%.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, when it is determined in step S516 that the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 does not correspond to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area Based on the value of the selection counter C3, the reach determination process for determining the reach type is performed. The details of the reach determination process (see FIG. 16) have already been described above.

In step S519 following step S518, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the first fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display is performed. That is, the first fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 by referring to the fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the game mode (here, there is a high possibility that the mode is the normal mode). Further, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding holding area in the first special fluctuation holding area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the holding area is not erased).

After step S519, in step S520, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the winning / failing determination process is performed. , Type determination processing, and reach determination processing are executed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a temporary storage area for temporarily storing the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1 and the like is provided, and the hit / fail judgment process, the type judgment process, and the type judgment process for the information stored in the temporary storage area are provided. After executing the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the data is stored in the hold area of the corresponding special change hold area.

The process of extracting the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S515 is also stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, a function of extracting and storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 constitutes an information acquisition means. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S516 (step S5101, step S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first hit / miss determination process, and the determination result is obtained. The processing of step S5102 and step S5104 to store (set the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

Next, the through-gate passage processing (step S305) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold counter is reached. Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, the addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both off, the left normal hold lamp is turned on, the left normal hold lamp is on, and the right normal hold lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp blinks while the right normal hold lamp is lit, and the left normal hold lamp is lit. When the lamp is blinking and the normal hold lamp on the right side is lit, the process for blinking both the left and right normal hold lamps is performed.

After step S604, in step S605, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is completed.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process (step S307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball monitoring flag indicating that the game ball is being monitored in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, in step S1302, based on the detection information of the ball entry count switch 226, whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is determined. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, in step S1303, the value of the ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls existing in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is added by 1.

After step S1303 or when a negative determination is made in step S1302, whether or not the game ball has entered the specific entry unit 145 based on the detection information of the specific entry detection switch 223b in step S1304. To determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the specific entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the specific entry section 145 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the specific entry flag is set to ON in step S1306. Further, in step S1307, a specific ball entry command for transmitting the ball entry to the specific ball entry unit 145 to the sub control device 262 is set.

After step S1307, or when affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1308.

Further, after step S1308 or when a negative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1309, a game ball enters the non-specific entry unit 146 based on the detection information of the non-specific entry detection switch 223c. Determine if it has been done. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1310.

After step S1310 or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the value of the monitoring timer is "0". In the monitoring timer, when the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started, the ball enters the second variable winning device 32b in the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. A value corresponding to a predetermined time is set with a margin for the time required for the game ball to be ejected from the second variable winning device 32b. If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1312, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, the remaining ball monitoring flag is turned off in step S1314, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1313, error processing is performed in step S1314, and then this processing ends. The error handling is appropriately set for each model. For example, a signal notifying the ball clogging of the second variable winning device 32b may be externally output via the external terminal plate 240, or at the end of the jackpot, In order to prevent the normal game state from starting, an error occurrence state for notifying the occurrence of an error may be set. It should be noted that the ball entry counter may be configured to acquire a negative value as well, and if the value is negative, error processing corresponding to fraudulent activity may be performed.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and in step S401, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt process is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply / emission control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (erased). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the following step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power interruption. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S112 in this case as well.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 or the like). Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the following step S114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, control signals based on the settings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning device 33 updated in the previous normal processing are transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to each control device.

For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is used to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to display (effect display) according to the display (variation display of the special symbol) performed by the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. This is a command output to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 in which the variation pattern command or the like is input is based on the command, and based on the command, the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display of the decorative symbol that teaches or suggests the result of the winning / failing lottery, and decoration The effect display, etc. performed together with the variation display of the symbol) is determined, and the display control device 45 is instructed to display (variation display) the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative pattern such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation type of the decorative symbol is stored in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern of the variation display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, the voice, and the like.

Here, the variation type of the decorative pattern will be described. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effect is displayed except for changes in the decorative pattern. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the fluctuation display time (variation time) from which the normal reach is derived is "12 seconds" or "15 seconds" in the normal mode, and "9 seconds" or "12 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. ". Even in the normal mode, the first variation display that starts from the state in which four first variation displays are held is also temporarily shortened, and the variation time of the first variation display is normal reach. For example, it is set to "9 seconds" or "12 seconds".

"Super Reach" is a reach in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. It is a pattern. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display from which the super reach is derived is "25 seconds" or "30 seconds" in the normal mode, "22 seconds" or "27 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. It is "seconds". The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when super reach occurs may be set to "25 seconds" or "30 seconds" in any game mode.

"Premium reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character having a pattern different from that of the super reach, etc. Is displayed, which is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. The fluctuation display from which the premium reach of the present embodiment is derived has a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation display from which the super reach is derived, and has the same length in both the high-entry state and the low-entry state ( For example, 60 seconds).

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display, which is "completely off" without reaching any reach state, is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and "6 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

Further, the sub control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) of the variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern command and the information of the variation time. , Stop display after the fluctuation time elapses. That is, when "15RS" is won, the variation display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols consisting of any of 1 to 9 (combination of jackpot symbols), and when "8RS" is won, the variation display is stopped. , 1-6, 8 or 9 is a combination of decorative symbols (combination of jackpot symbols), and the variable display is stopped and displayed, and if a normal jackpot ("8RN") is won, 2, The variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols (combination of jackpot symbols) consisting of even-numbered doublets of any of 4, 6 and 8.

The combination of the front-rear off symbol corresponds to the "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of symbols other than the front and rear disengagement corresponds to the "reach other than the front and rear disengagement" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of completely off symbols corresponds to "complete off" in which even reach does not occur. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the sub-control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the sub-control device 262 determines the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as the stop symbol. In the main control device 261, any one of a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols with rush, a combination of jackpot symbols with time reduction, a combination of front and rear off symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear out, and a combination of completely off symbols. Is determined, a symbol command for designating the command is set, and the pattern command is output to the sub-control device 262 together with the variation pattern command.

After step S201, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when those counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. do. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, the special display control process is executed. In this process, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b are controlled, and the jackpot determination and the setting of the variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the normal display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S208, the start winning device control process is executed. In this process, the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is controlled. The details of this start winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S210, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (4 msec in this example). ) Has passed or not. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counters CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (step S211 and step S212).

That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (631 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be randomly updated and fluctuates in the same manner. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processes after step S213 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Be struck. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the stack pointer value is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S215. Remember in.

After that, in step S216, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S217 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S209 is the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S208, or the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power is cut off can be reliably stored. ..

Next, the special display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval set after the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the fluctuation interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and "249 (" 250 "in the configuration where step S802 is performed before step S801)" is set in the fluctuation interval timer. In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not a fluctuation interval, in step S803, the hit situation storage area described later is referred to in detail, and whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. To determine.

During the jackpot state, the opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. There is a round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period after the final round until the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b can be started.

In the hit status storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in a state other than the jackpot state, and in the jackpot state, either "1, 4, 5" is stored during the opening period and the interval period. "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S803, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is, while if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the special figure described in detail in step S804 will be described later. By observing the setting status of the display flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) are performing variable display. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which corresponds to the state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b The variable display is turned off when the stop display is displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if neither the jackpot state nor the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S805, and the second fluctuation display is suspended when the ball enters the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb for counting the number is larger than "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if even one second variation display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S806. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is reserved and stored by the determination process in step S805, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. That is, even if the first variation display is held and stored earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is prioritized and digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

In the following step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

After step S807, in step S808, the second fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to be turned on. In the following step S809, the subtraction display process of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right second hold lamps are both blinking, the second hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the second hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the second hold lamp on the left side is blinking. When the second hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right second hold lamps are on, the second hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the second hold lamp on the right side while keeping the light on, and turn off both the left and right second hold lamps when the second hold lamp on the left side is on and the second hold lamp on the right side is off. Perform the process to make it.

After step S809, in step S810, the variable display setting process described in detail later is performed, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no second variation display is held and stored, the first variation triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a in step S811. It is determined whether or not the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings displayed is greater than 0.

If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812, and the fluctuation standby state in which the fluctuation display is not performed on both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. A standby display setting for deriving the corresponding display mode (for example, the first and second first special figure lamps in the lower row or the mode in which only the second special figure lamp is lit) is set. That is, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment are maintained in a stop mode during the fluctuation interval (in a mode showing the result of the winning / failing lottery) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, when the fluctuation interval ends (furthermore, the passage of a predetermined time may be a condition), the display mode is switched to the display mode indicating that the fluctuation standby state is in effect. After step S812, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S813. In the following step S814, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st special variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order from the hold 1st area to the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area.

After step S814, in step S815, the first fluctuation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to be turned on. In the following step S816, the subtraction display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp) corresponding to the decrease of the number of hold of the first variable display by one is performed. That is, when the pair of left and right first hold lamps are both blinking, the first hold lamp on the right side is turned on while the first hold lamp on the left side is blinking, and the first hold lamp on the left side is blinking. When the first hold lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first hold lamps are turned on, and when both the left and right first hold lamps are on, the first hold lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the first hold lamp on the right side while keeping the light on, and turn off both the left and right first hold lamps when the first hold lamp on the left side is on and the first hold lamp on the right side is off. Perform the process to make it.

After step S816, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is one, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing the fluctuation display based on the data. In addition, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Here, the details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability state (probability variation mode) by referring to the mode storage area described later in detail. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, any value of "11", "12", and "21" is stored in the mode storage area, "11" corresponds to the normal mode, and "12" is the time. Corresponding to the shortened mode, "21" corresponds to the probabilistic mode. That is, in the step S901, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state by determining whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

In the case of affirmative determination in step S901, that is, in the high probability state (probability variation mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the pass / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, in a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the hit / miss random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first hit / miss flag is on. Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big hit has been won in the winning / losing lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is turned on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the jackpot state in the winning / failing random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

In the following step S905, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag (see the type determination process in FIG. 15) is turned on by referring to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if it is "15RS", the 15RS pattern setting process is performed in step S906. The 15RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variation display for teaching the occurrence of "15RS", and is special based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Fluctuation patterns of display devices 43a and 43b and decorative symbol display device 42 (variation display time, variation display stop mode of special display devices 43a and 43b and decorative symbol display device 42, effect pattern of variation display of decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ) Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern command is set based on the determination and various flags.

The relationship between the numerical values of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. That is, in the 15RS pattern setting process, the reach pattern is determined from the normal reach, the super reach, and the premium reach, and the determined reach pattern and the time reduction state (probability variation mode, time reduction mode, or first variation display) are displayed. The fluctuation time in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined based on the determination result of whether or not there are four holds). Then, the information including the 15RS, the determined reach pattern, and the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation pattern command, and the information capable of grasping the fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding storage area. Further, which of the stop modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b corresponding to 15RS is to be stopped is determined and stored in the corresponding storage area. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S907, that is, if it is "8RS", the process proceeds to step S915 after performing the 8RS pattern setting process in step S908.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S907, the process proceeds to step S915 after performing the 8RN pattern setting process in step S909.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, or when a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the low probability state. Refers to the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area in step S910, and determines whether or not the front / rear flag (see the reach determination process of FIG. 16) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if the reach is "out of front / rear reach", the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S911, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flags other than the front and back are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is "reach other than front / rear deviation", the reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the result is "complete deviation", the deviation fluctuation pattern setting process is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

In step S915, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is turned on. As a result, it is shown that the conditions for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43a and 43b are satisfied. In the following step S916, the setting process of the special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

The fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting of the special figure display timer. , The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43a and 43b. Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command starts the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the special display devices 43a and 43b. At the same time as the stop display of, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed. After the end of step S916, the variation display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S515 and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the pass / fail determination process of steps S506 and 516, and the variation display setting. In the processing, the winning / failing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903 for determining the winning / failing based on the winning / failing flag and the situation at that time. Further, the second pass / fail determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S906, step S908, step S909, step S911, step S913, and step S914.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S817 to perform the subtraction process of the special figure display timer. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 12 seconds (12000 msec), "3000" is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S818, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S818 is positively determined when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S818, in step S823, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the special display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized every 4 ms. After step S823, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S818, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S819, and the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S820. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type, deviation, etc. set in the variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

Further, after step S820, in step S821, a stop command for causing the sub control device 262 to display the stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set. As a result, the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 by the fluctuation pattern command output at the start of the variation display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is added again. No need. Further, again, the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b is the main display, and the display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for directing).

Subsequently, in step S822, the discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the hit state and the switching setting of the game mode is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, the discrimination information setting process in step S822 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot confirmation flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the jackpot confirmation flag is turned off in step S1002, and the jackpot middle flag indicating that the jackpot state is in progress is turned on in step S1003. Further, in step S1004, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON.

When affirmative determination is made in step S1004, that is, when the jackpot is "15RS", the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) is determined in step S1005. Set the number of rounds counter to "15".

In the following step S1006, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1007, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for control during the hit state (open / close control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1008, "8" indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to "8" for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32. .. The value of the winning counter is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing, and the variable winning device. When it is determined that the ball has entered 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type, and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1009, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, the appearance of promotion of the jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of doublets is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, "8RS" or "15RS" is displayed in the jackpot state immediately after. Or teach that you have won "15RS" in the jackpot state immediately after when an odd number of doublets other than "7 symbols" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. You may do).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, "8" is set in the round number counter in step S1010. After step S1010, the process proceeds to step S1006 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, a value corresponding to the fluctuation interval (for example, 1 second) is set for the fluctuation interval timer in step S1011. In the decorative symbol display device 42, basically, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of the stop display of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the symbols displayed as stopped by the special display devices 43a and 43b. Is displayed as it is Until the end of the fluctuation interval (until the next fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is started), the stopped-displayed decorative symbol continues to be displayed. Then, when the fluctuation interval ends and the fluctuation display is reserved and stored, the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the fluctuation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 are started at the same time. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display is not stored on hold even after the fluctuation interval ends, the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 continues to be derived for a while, and then the display switches to the display waiting for the game (demo screen display). .. Further, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, the combination of the decorative symbols may be converted into an odd number of doublets during the variable interval period (derivation). In some cases, a re-lottery effect such as (a configuration in which conversion is always possible) may be performed.

After step S1011, in step S1012, whether or not either "12" or "22" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is either the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode. To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S1012, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, in step S1013, the duration of the time reduction mode given after the end of the normal jackpot jackpot state and the duration of the probability variation mode given after the end of the probability variation jackpot state. The value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1 in order to measure. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state, the number of fluctuation displays (for example, 100 times) corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is set in the fluctuation count counter, and the special display devices 43a and 43b Every time the variation display of the (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1013.

In the following step S1014, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1014, that is, after the jackpot state of "8RN" ends, the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is displayed. If it has not been performed yet, or after the jackpot state of "15RS" and "8RS" ends, the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the probability variation mode If the variation display has not been performed yet, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1014, "11" indicating that the mode is in the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1015. That is, when the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times on the special display devices 43a and 43b, the time reduction mode or the probability variation mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1015, in step S1016, the support end command for notifying the end of the time reduction mode or the probability change mode is set for the sub control device 262, and then this process ends.

Next, the variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is not in the hit state, the present process is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the hit state, "1" is set in the hit status storage area in the above-mentioned discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when a hit state is in progress (when any of "1" to "5" is set in the hit status storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , The value of the special variable timer is subtracted by 1. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000", which is a value corresponding to the opening effect time, is set for the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the hit status storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "2" is set for the hit status storage area in step S1205. In the following step S1206, the value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1206, in step S1207, a process for opening the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1208, a round command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round is set. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not "4" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot states of "15RS" and "8RS", the winning situation when the interval period immediately before the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started. "4" will be set for the storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1210 whether or not "5" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot state of "8RN", when the interval period immediately before the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is started, the hit status storage area is "5" will be set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started, "3" is set for the hit status storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1212.

In the following step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "1".

When a negative judgment is made in step S1214, that is, when it is immediately before (interval) the start of the 8th round of "8RS" and "8RN" and the jackpot round other than the 14th round of "15RS". , In step S1215, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "8".

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, that is, immediately before (interval) the start of a jackpot round other than the eighth round of "15RS", "1" is set for the hit status storage area in step S1216. Set. After that, in step S1217, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1217, in step S1218, "8" is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1219, processing is performed to close the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b that are in the open state, and in step S1220, information that the interval is started for the sub control device 262. Set an interval command to convey. After that, this process ends.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, that is, immediately before (interval) the start of the jackpot round of the eighth round of "15RS", "4" is set for the hit situation storage area in step S1222. To set. After that, the process proceeds to step S1217 described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to in step S1223, and it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set to ON. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1223, in step S1224, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, that is, when the interval period immediately before the start of the eighth round of "8RS" is reached, "4" is set for the hit situation storage area in step S1225. After that, the process proceeds to step S1217 described above.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, it is the 14th round of "15RS", and in this example, in order to open the first variable winning device 32a, the process proceeds to step S1216 described above.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1223, that is, when the interval period immediately before the start of the eighth round of "8RN" is reached, "5" is set for the hit situation storage area in step S1226. Subsequently, in step S1227, a value "25" corresponding to the interval time (0.1 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1218 described above.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there is time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the process proceeds to step S1228. , It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of winnings per round at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, every time one game ball enters the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step S1228, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1228, that is, if the end of the round comes without waiting for the elapse of the set period of the round, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, if eight game balls are entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during one round, the round ends promptly at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not passed. It will be.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, when the eighth round of "15RS" or "8RS" is started, in step S1229, the variable winning device 32 is used for the special variable timer. A value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state is set. In the following step S1230, a V winning round command is set to convey information to the sub control device 262 to start a jackpot round in which the game ball should be entered into the second variable winning device 32b in order to acquire the probability variation mode. do.

After step S1230, in step S1231, "2" is set for the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1232, a second opening process for opening the second variable winning device 32b is performed.

In the following step S1233, the remaining ball monitoring flag for executing the monitoring of the game ball (remaining ball monitoring process; see FIG. 18) in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is turned on. In step S1234, a monitoring timer indicating a period for performing the remaining ball monitoring process is set. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1210, that is, when the eighth round of "8RN" is started, the time for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 with respect to the special variable timer in step S1235. Set the value "25" corresponding to (0.1 seconds). In the following step S1236, a short round command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start a jackpot round for opening the second variable winning device 32b for a short time is set. After step S1236, the process proceeds to step S1231 described above.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1213, that is, when all rounds in the jackpot state have been digested, the process proceeds to step S1237, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1237, in step S1238, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1238, in step S1239, "7" is set for the winning counter. When the process of setting the ending after step S1237 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1228, the value of the winning counter is "0". If the value of the winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1221 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, by inputting a temporary numerical value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the winning counter in step S1239, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1239, in step S1240, a process of closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b that are in the open state is performed, and in the following step S1241, information that the ending is started for the sub control device 262 is provided. Set the ending command to convey. After that, this process ends.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1242 and the end setting process is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area is set and the fluctuation count counter is set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific ball entry flag (see step S1305 and step S1306 of the remaining ball monitoring process in FIG. 18) is set to ON.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the value "21" corresponding to the probabilistic mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends.

In the following step S1403, "100" is set for the fluctuation number counter. The number of fluctuation counters is for grasping that the upper limit of the number of fluctuations has been reached in the probability variation mode in which the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set and the time reduction mode. After step S1403, in step S1404, a probability change start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 to start the probability change mode (shift to the probability change stage) is set. After that, in step S1405, the jackpot middle flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set for the mode storage area in step S1406. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state ends. After step S1406, in step S1407, "100" is set for the fluctuation count counter. After that, in step S1408, a time saving start command for notifying the sub control device 262 to start the time saving mode (shift to the pullback stage) is set. After that, in step S1405, the jackpot middle flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1242, in step S1243, “0” indicating that the hit situation storage area is not in the big hit state is set. After that, in step S1244, a hit end command for transmitting information to the effect that the jackpot state is terminated is set to the sub control device 262, and then this process is terminated. The hit end command includes information on the number of times of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

Next, the normal display control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, whether or not the value of the normal figure interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal figure interval) set after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is "0". To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is a normal figure interval, the value of the normal figure interval timer is subtracted in step S2116, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the normal map interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and "249 (" 250 "in the configuration in which step S2116 is performed before step S2101)" is set in the normal map interval timer. In the process, the value of the normal figure interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when it is not the normal figure interval period, the support period flag indicating that the opening / closing control of the second start winning device 33b is in progress is turned on in step S2102. Determine if it is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is on. When the normal symbol display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the variable display.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, the present process is terminated as it is. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 sets the standby display for deriving the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation standby state in which the fluctuation display is not performed. May be. That is, after the fluctuation is stopped, the normal symbol display device 41 is maintained in the stopped mode during the normal map interval period (in a mode showing the result of the ball entry support lottery), but the normal symbol interval period ends. Then, it may be configured so that it can be switched to the display mode indicating that it is in the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In the following step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order to the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area.

After that, in step S2107, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set and the normal symbol fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

Here, the normal map fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S2301, the flag displaying the normal symbol indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display device 41 is turned on. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the state is other than the jackpot state at present. If the affirmative judgment is made in step S2302, that is, if the jackpot state is not obtained, whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303, that is, high. It is determined whether or not the ball is in the ball entry state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is set with respect to the normal symbol display timer that measures the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41. Set "100" to set it to 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is “0”. In the high-entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 232".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is won, the ball entry support lottery is won in step S2306. Turn on the ball entry support flag to indicate that. After step S2306, this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in a jackpot state or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is displayed with respect to the normal symbol display timer. Set to "2000" to set the timer to 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1 to 31". In the low ball entry state, the player wins when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4, which takes a value in the range of "0 to 232", is "1 to 31". In addition, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be determined by lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S2308, that is, if the ball entry support lottery is won, the ball entry support flag indicating that the ball entry support lottery has been won is turned on in step S2306, and then the present End the process. The variable display time of the normal symbol, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, etc. can be set appropriately for each pachinko machine model. For example, the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the high ball entry state can be set. , It may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display process of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp) corresponding to the reduction of the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 by one. I do. That is, when the pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both blinking, the right normal hold lamp is turned on while the left normal hold lamp is blinking, and the left normal hold lamp is blinking and the right side is blinking. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and when both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is lit and the right normal hold lamp is lit. When the hold lamp is turned off and the left normal hold lamp is on and the right normal hold lamp is off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal hold lamps. After step S2108, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2109 to subtract the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal map display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal map display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal map display flag is turned off in step S2111, and the normal figure stop display setting for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when the ball entry support lottery is won (when the ball entry support flag is set to ON), both the left and right pair of normal symbol lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are turned on, and when it is off, both are turned on. Turn on only the left side lamp.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2113, and the normal map discrimination information setting process is performed. Here, the general map discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 1 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "450" to 8 seconds.

Further, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period. Further, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in the open state, and then this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, when the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". Subsequently, in step S2407, "1" is set for the opening number counter to open the second start winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be open. This process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to the normal figure interval period (for example, 1 second) is set for the normal figure interval timer, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display in which a pair of left and right normal symbol lamps are alternately turned on). I do. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, the timing of the normal display control process, that is, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms. After step S2115, this process ends.

Next, the start winning device control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the normally variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2202.

In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is a period for maintaining the open / closed state of the second start winning device 33b, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normally variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing for closing the second start winning device 33b has arrived, the normally variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In the following step S2206, the value of the open count counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S2207, the second start winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag is turned off during the support period in step S2209, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning ball support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based on the winning ball support lottery. If there is a remaining number of times, a value corresponding to the interval time (for example, “250”) is set for the normally variable timer in step S2210, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period between the second start winning device 33b being opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the timing for ending the interval period. Is arrived, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2211, and the value corresponding to the opening time (in this example, in the high ball entry state; “450”) is set for the normal variable timer in step S2212. , Step S2213 sets the second start winning device 33b to be in the open state. After that, this process ends.

When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state and a specified number (for example, one) of game balls is entered into the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b May be configured to be immediately closed (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b has been detected, and a positive determination is made. In some cases, it may be configured to move to step S2205).

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 temporarily waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed.

When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, it is shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command has been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the initialization process of RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power restoration (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is enabled in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutoff occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination processing described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in the middle. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 31.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 28).

If the command reception flag is determined to be off in step S3301, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main control unit is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 30 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is received from the CR unit connection board 314. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, in step S3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312 of the power supply / launch control device 310.

After step S3203 or when a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and when it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is clogged with balls, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball jam is cleared (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3206, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, the lower plate is full, the lower plate is full, and the lower plate is not full. Execute the setting of the dish full tank release state. Further, in step S3207, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, and the setting of the state without a tank ball and the state without a tank ball is executed. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process of the prize ball and the rental ball is executed. Specifically, the payout number setting process is performed in step S3209, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3210, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3211.

In step S3212, the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3213, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, the hold information storage process for storing the information of the starting command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. As described above, the starting command includes information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball, and the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating the existence, information indicating the jackpot type, information indicating the type of reach, etc. are included.

The hold information storage area of the sub control device 262 is a first hold information storage area having four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and a first hold information storage area, respectively, like the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. It has a second reserved information storage area and one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a jackpot is made, a jackpot type, a reach pattern, according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). In addition, information (variation information) related to fluctuation display such as fluctuation time is stored in chronological order. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in time series according to the reception history of the starting command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation information regarding the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to hold and store four fluctuation information about each. As a result, not only the execution areas of the first and second special fluctuation holding areas of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262. ..

Here, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. 35. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, is the starting command corresponding to the entry into the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) in step S4102? Determine if not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to the entry of the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special fluctuation holding area), in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd, which counts the number of hold of variable information held and stored in the first hold information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step S4104, the information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, the information on the jackpot type, the information on the reach pattern, the fluctuation time information, and the like are first among the vacant hold areas in the first hold information storage area. Memorize in the area of.

Further, in the following step S4105, the advance notice information storage process is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect displays related to each other are intentionally derived (so-called "continuous notice" is performed) in a plurality of continuous variable displays. Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information storage. Of the areas, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous advance notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 49, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 49), and then returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The continuous advance notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, reaches the upper limit value (that is, 9), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, in the advance notice information storage process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is to be derived.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give a continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of the continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice pass / fail judgment tables and notice tables are provided, and the advance notice pass / fail judgment table and the notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold area for which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. Therefore, when the existence of the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, when only the fluctuation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the first reservation area. , The lottery for continuous notice is to be held. On the other hand, when the existence of the holding area for which the continuous notice flag is set is confirmed, the lottery for continuous notice is not performed.

In the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Refer to the notice winning / failing judgment table corresponding to each jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to the loss), and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. .. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach pattern, and the game mode is based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reserved information storage area. Refer to and decide whether or not to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag of all the holding areas in which the fluctuation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area is turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the variable display is held and stored in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), a hold icon 461 imitating a "floating ring" is displayed in the hold display area 462 provided at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 42. The hold display area 462 of the present embodiment is an execution support area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area and a hold support area corresponding to the hold areas of the hold information storage areas (first and second hold information storage areas). It is equipped with 462b and can display up to nine hold icons 461. In the present embodiment, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the first variable display and the hold icon 461 corresponding to the second variable display are in a common mode, and the first is simply to visually recognize the hold icon 461. It is not possible to identify whether the hold icon 461 corresponds to the variable display or the second variable display. In addition, among the hold support areas 462b, each hold support area 462b that displays the four hold icons 461 that are digested first is from each hold support area 462b that displays the hold icons 461 that are digested after the fifth. Is also large and smaller than the execution support area 462a.

In addition, the hold icon 461 may be derived in a manner suggesting a jackpot expectation of the corresponding variable display. Hereinafter, the hold icon 461 in such an embodiment is also referred to as a “look-ahead hold icon 463”. The look-ahead hold icon 463 of this embodiment is derived in a manner in which the character uses a "buoy". Further, a plurality of types of characters of the look-ahead hold icon 463 are prepared, and the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is associated with the winning expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) for the occurrence of the jackpot state. As a result, the look-ahead hold icon 463 is ranked according to the mode of the jackpot expectation, and by deriving the look-ahead hold icon 463, the jackpot expectation is suggested (pre-reading hold notice effect is performed). It is configured.

Further, when the look-ahead hold icon 463 is derived, the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 changes until the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon 463 is digested (the hold change effect is derived). There are cases.

That is, in the hold icon setting process of step S4107, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to derive the look-ahead hold icon 463, and in the case of no winning, the pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined to be the default (floating ring only). Will be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the hold change effect, and in the case of winning, the hold change flag of the corresponding hold area is set on and the look-ahead hold icon 463 is used as a pattern. The upper limit pattern that may be finally displayed and the tentative pattern that is a mode (lower rank) with a lower jackpot expectation than the upper limit pattern and is displayed first are determined. In the temporary pattern, there may be an option to display the default hold icon 461 at first. On the other hand, in the case of no winning, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463.

Then, basically, a process of displaying the hold icon 461 of the determined pattern by arranging the hold icons 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 on the right side of the rightmost one is performed. It is said. In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, when the second variation display is newly suspended while the first variation display is suspended. In the hold support area 462b, the hold icon 461 corresponding to the newly held second change display is displayed at the position on the left side of the leftmost hold icon 461 among the hold icons 461 corresponding to the first change display. It has become so.

Further, in the present embodiment, in step S4107, when the look-ahead hold icon 463 is derived to the hold display area 462, the look-ahead hold effect in progress flag is set to ON. After step S4107, this process ends.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special fluctuation holding area). , Step S4108, the second fluctuation hold counter Ne, which counts the number of holdings of the fluctuation information held and stored in the second holding information storage area, is incremented by 1.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the starting command is a jackpot, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach pattern, information on the fluctuation time, and the like are stored in the first vacant hold area of the second hold information storage area. Store in the area. In the following step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in the step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice is performed. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4111, it is confirmed whether or not there is a hold area for which the continuous notice flag is already set to ON. When the existence is confirmed there, the lottery for continuous notice is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is turned on is the first hold area. When it is determined that the area is the first hold area, the continuous notice flag of the first hold area is turned off, and the display mode of the final continuous notice is derived to the second hold area where the new fluctuation information is held and stored. Set the flag to make it. That is, if the second variable display is suspended while the continuous notice is being given for the first variable display, the continuous notice effect of the first variable display will be interrupted by the second variable display. , In the second variable display, a display mode for ending the continuous advance notice effect is derived.

On the other hand, when the existence of the hold area for which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and further, only the fluctuation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation where the reach state does not occur) is stored in the second reservation area. If there is, a lottery for continuous notice will be held. The continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4111 only makes the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106 correspond to the entry of the ball into the second start winning device 33b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step S4111, in step S4112, the hold icon setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3904 following step S3903, a continuous-changing counting process for counting the number of game balls (total number of payouts) to be paid out in a series of consecutive jackpot states with a high entry state intervening is performed. conduct.

Here, the continuous-changing count processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. First, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the continuous chan flag that is set on during the period from the start of the jackpot state to the transition to the low entry state (during continuous chan) is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S4901, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4902, in step S4903, 15 is added to the continuous chan counter as the period payout total number counting means for counting the total number of payouts in the continuous chan.

In the following step S4904, the value of the teaching trigger counter for determining that the total number of payouts in the continuous chan has reached a predetermined predetermined number is subtracted by 15. In the present embodiment, every time the total number of payouts in the consecutive chan increases by 2500, the display of reaching 2500 balls and the display of reaching 5000 balls as a specific payout number display that teaches that the total number of payouts has reached a predetermined predetermined number, The 7500 ball arrival display and the like are led out to the decorative symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 44 (h), the specific payout number display is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 42. As will be described in detail later, the decorative pattern display device 42 includes a plurality of layers, and the layer in which the specific payout number is displayed has a transparent area other than the display of characters and numbers, and the lower side of the transparent area. The display mode of the (back side) layer is visible.

After step S4904 or when a negative determination is made in step S4902, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the value of the teaching trigger counter is "0" or less. If a negative determination is made in step S4905, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4905, in step S4906, a specific payout number display process for deriving the specific payout number display is performed. In this example, the number of hundreds or more out of the total number of payouts counted by the counter during consecutive chans is displayed. It should be noted that a counter for counting the number of times the specific payout number display is executed may be provided, and the corresponding specific payout number display may be performed based on the number of such counters. Further, the function of grasping that 2500 game balls have been paid out by using the teaching trigger counter corresponds to the specific payout number display timing calculation means.

In step S4907 following step S4906, "2500" is set again for the teaching trigger counter. After step S4907, this process ends. In the present embodiment, only the number of game balls paid out based on the winning balls to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the continuous chan is counted in the continuous chan counter, but the starting winning device 33b and the general The game balls paid out based on the balls entered into the winning device 31 or the like may also be counted. Further, for example, although the number of rounds is small for the purpose of resetting the remaining number of fluctuations in the probability variation mode, a jackpot state (for example, all 2 rounds) in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, or a small similar to this. A hit state (even if a small hit state occurs, the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry unit 145, and the remaining number of times in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode is not reset) can be generated (normal jackpot state). It may be configured so that such an effect is not performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, if a negative determination is made after step S3904 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3905, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3906, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3914.

In step S3906, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (big hit symbol) at the time when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, it is used as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. Is prepared with 9 (0 to 8) counter values. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is received from the main control device 261, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" based on a table (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) that is not shown. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as (doublet) and 1 if it is "2" (doublet). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3906, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern command, as will be described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. You may do so.

Further, when a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a normal jackpot is received, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is "2" (doublet), and if it is 2-4, it is "4" (doublet). The combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as "6" (doublet) for 5 and 6, and "8" (doublet) for 7 and 8.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of each stop symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning / failing lottery is missed, and each column. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stop symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the front-rear reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front-rear, and the complete detachment. It is stored in one of the symbol buffers.

Here, the update processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the lower symbol counter CR is updated in the previous update process, a positive judgment is made in step S4001. Further, when the upper symbol counter CL is updated in the previous update process, an affirmative judgment is made in step S4002. Then, if the update time of the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the middle symbol counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, CR update process, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). , In the case of a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is determined whether or not the combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). .. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is terminated as it is without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-back and out-of-bounds symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front-rear and front-rear symbols (front-rear and front-rear reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is the front-rear and front-reach reach of the RAM 553. Store in the symbol buffer and end this process. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than the front and rear disengagement (reach other than the front and rear disengagement) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is used as the RAM 553. Stores in the reach symbol buffer except for the front and back deviations of, and ends this process.

Further, when the combination is other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the off symbols (completely off symbols). The combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the completely off symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the hold process is performed in step S3907. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored on hold, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation hold counter Nd is subtracted by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is reserved and stored, the first variation display is digested. There is nothing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is reserved and stored in the second reserved information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than "0", the fluctuation pattern command displays the first fluctuation and the second fluctuation. Which of the fluctuation information is possessed is determined. Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information on which of the fluctuation information of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display is supported, and the fluctuation pattern command is based on the fluctuation pattern command and the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is possessed.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 1st hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the hold 1st area. → Execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on, the data in each area is shifted. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when even one fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is reserved and stored, the value of the second fluctuation holding counter Ne is subtracted by 1 in step S4205.

In the following step S4206, a process of shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → the execution area and the hold 2nd. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. In the present embodiment, the hold information storage area has only one execution area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. When it is done, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4106) of the execution area of the hold information storage area is on, and if negative, the continuous notice is determined. Is not performed, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative judgment is made, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what kind is it if it is a big hit, what is the reach pattern if it is not a big hit, and so on. , Refer to the corresponding table to determine the type of continuous notice. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing at the time of the corresponding fluctuation display.

After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. A hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon 461 is provided in each hold area and the execution area of the hold information storage area, and the above-mentioned hold information storage is also provided for the information related to the hold icon 461. It is designed to be shifted by the area data shift processing.

The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon 461 in response to such a data shift, and in the decorative symbol display device 42, the most variable display is digested (executed) each time. The hold icon 461 located on the left is deleted, and the hold icon 461 placed on the right side is shifted to the left (display location moves). After step S4208, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set to be turned on prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon 461 in step S4208, the hold change effect of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is performed. A lottery is performed to decide whether or not to perform the operation, and when the icon is won, the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463 is changed to a higher rank one (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that the hold area for which the hold change flag is set does not exist, the look-ahead hold effect in progress flag is turned off. Further, by changing the pattern of the look-ahead hold icon 463, when the look-ahead hold icon 463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the look-ahead hold effect in progress flag is turned off and the hold change flag is turned off. ing.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, the display setting process is performed in step S3908. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 determines the game state (game mode), the fluctuation type (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the reach pattern in the case of a miss), the fluctuation time, and the like. Based on this, the corresponding table is referred to, and the symbol configuration of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the effect pattern of the effect display performed together with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the like are determined. Then, control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command is performed.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is designed in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when starting the fluctuation display, when the continuous notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106) is on, each situation is based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, the type of continuous advance notice to be derived to the variable display is determined, the derivation of the advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice is determined, and the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or something. Further, in the display setting process of step S3908, a process of performing effect control during a big hit (hit display process) is also performed.

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received. The various fluctuation information included in the fluctuation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area, or may be configured to be stored in a separate storage area. Further, for example, the flag corresponding to the reception of the variation pattern command in the hold process (see FIG. 36) is turned on, and the variation display is set in the display setting process. It may be configured so that the flag is turned off, and by checking the flag, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been received.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not the mode is in the probability variation mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4502, in step S4503, a process (normal / time reduction mode pattern setting process) for setting the effect display (variation display of the decorative pattern) in the normal mode and the time reduction mode is performed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, in step S4504, a process (probability variation mode pattern setting process) for setting the effect display (variation display of the decorative symbol) in the probability variation mode is performed.

By the way, the decorative pattern display device 42 as the effect display means of the present embodiment mainly includes layers 1, layer 2, and layer 3 in which moving images are reproduced, and mainly still images and moving images with little movement (in the short term). It includes a layer 4 and a layer 5 used for the derived image, effect image, etc.). Layer 2 is displayed above layer 1 (front side), layer 3 is displayed above layer 2, layer 4 is displayed above layer 3, and layer 5 is displayed above layer 4. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an effect display in which the characters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H appear. In particular, in the present embodiment, one of them can be identified by the player. That is, as shown in FIG. 43A, the character selection screen is opened from the menu screen in the decorative symbol display device 42 in a state in which the fluctuation display of the normal game state, which is not the jackpot state, is performed (non-big hit state). If you operate the specific effect button 127 during the variable display, the character selection screen may be opened directly), by operating the cross button 126 to move the cursor to the predetermined character icon, and by operating the effect button 125. , The selection information of the corresponding character is stored in the specific character selection storage area.

Then, the effect of deriving the character (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific character") indicated in the specific character selection storage area (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific character display") is derived from other characters (general characters). It is derived with priority over the production. It should be noted that the fact that a specific character is preferentially derived means that it is easier to derive than other characters, or that it is more likely to be displayed. As will be described in detail later, once in the jackpot state, A jackpot movie from which a specific character is derived is derived, or while the specific character is being displayed, it is basically configured so that the visual mode of the specific character display is not obstructed by other displays, or in a normal gaming state. If the display continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 across a plurality of variable displays, a specific character may be selected as a display (stock point display 465 described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, a part of the decorative symbol derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 is composed of an image of a character, the character A corresponds to the decorative symbol of the number pattern "1", and the character B is a number. Character C corresponds to the decorative pattern of the number pattern "3", character D corresponds to the decorative pattern of the number pattern "4", and character E corresponds to the decorative pattern of the number pattern "5". Corresponding to the decorative pattern, the character F corresponds to the decorative pattern of the number pattern "6", the character G corresponds to the decorative pattern of the number pattern "8", and the character H corresponds to the decorative pattern of the number pattern "9". ing. Further, in the present embodiment, the character specified as the specific character by the player corresponds to the decorative symbol of the number pattern "7" (the specific character corresponds to the two decorative symbols). ..

Further, regarding the setting of a specific character, it is not reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on, but is reset by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the RAM erase switch 323. ing. In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, the character C is set as a specific character (the decorative symbols of "3" and "7" become the character C).

The number of characters appearing in the decorative pattern display device 42 is not particularly limited, and the number of characters that can be identified as specific characters among the appearing characters is not particularly limited, and is not particularly limited for each model. It can be set. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that the specific character is reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on, and the specific character set when setting the specific character in the initialization process is not particularly limited. , For example, it may be decided at random (lottery). Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display (specific character display) in which the specific character appears corresponds to the "specific effect display", and any one of the characters A to H is selected as the specific character, and the selection information of the specific character is selected. A function of storing and determining whether or not the specific character is derived in the target effect display constitutes the effect display specifying means.

Here, the normal / time reduction mode pattern setting process in step S4503 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. As shown in FIG. 48, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode and the time reduction mode, basically, the effect display of the moving image (hereinafter, also referred to as “main effect”) is performed in “Layer 1”. It is reproduced, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reproduced in "Layer 3", and the effect display of the still image (hereinafter, also referred to as "sub-effect") is reproduced in "Layer 4". Further, in the present embodiment, the mode of the effect display may be switched based on the operation of the specific effect button 127, and the switched image is reproduced in "Layer 2" and "Layer 5" (back channel display). To do). That is, in "Layer 2", the moving image corresponding to the moving image of Layer 1 is reproduced, and in "Layer 5", the still image corresponding to the still image of Layer 4 is reproduced.

First, in step S6101, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the layer 3 is determined and set based on the variation pattern command. That is, the combination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the first (stop) symbol (in this example, basically the decorative symbol in the upper symbol display area) that is stopped first among the decorative symbols are stopped second. The second (stop) symbol (in this example, basically the decorative symbol in the lower symbol display area) and the third (stop) symbol that is stopped last (in this example, basically, the middle symbol display area). The timing of stopping the decorative symbol (decorative symbol) and the pattern of the movement of the decorative symbol (change in speed, change in traveling direction, change in shape, etc.) are determined.

In the following step S6102, the pattern of the main effect of layer 1 is determined and set. The main effect develops with the passage of time from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this example, the main effect is divided into four scenes, and the result of the winning / failing lottery in the final scene. Is being taught or suggested.

More specifically, "Scene 1" from the start of fluctuation to "Second stop" where the second symbol is stopped and displayed, and the timing of development from "Second stop" to "Super reach effect" (hereinafter, simply "Scene 2" up to "Super Development"), "Scene 3" from "Super Development" to "Final Production", and the end of variable display from the start of "Final Production" (all decorative symbols are stopped) It is divided into "scene 4 (last scene)" up to the displayed third stop).

Furthermore, the "final production" is a continuation of the "result teaching production" of whether or not the main production ends in the form of success, and the animation of the super reach production of scene 3 immediately before the result teaching production, and the result. It is composed of "Kiwa production" that discourages the derivation of teaching production and fuels super reach production. Regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol, during the period when the "Kiwa effect" is derived, the moving speed of the third symbol (the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area) that is still variablely displayed slows down, and the third symbol is displayed. The third symbol is emphasized, such as the size of the is enlarged (the mode of voice and illumination also changes). Also, instead of emphasizing the third symbol, the animation showing the result of the winning / failing lottery (for example, the final action of the character's predetermined challenge) is emphasized (for example, slow motion or still image, or the character's There is also a pattern (the face and the part where the result of the challenge can be seen are highlighted or deformed).

It should be noted that the kiwa effect of the final effect is configured such that the same moving image is repeatedly derived, the same still image is continuously derived, or a predetermined moving image is derived in slow motion.

Further, the sub control device 262 is provided with a scene information storage area, and is provided with a first scene storage area to a fourth scene storage area associated with each of the scenes 1 to 4. Further, since each time of scenes 1 to 4 is determined when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined, the scene storage area corresponding to the time of each scene is determined in step S6101 (or step S6102). Is remembered in.

Further, in step S6102, various tables and various random number counters are used to determine fluctuation information and an effect pattern that matches the time of each scene, and store them in each scene storage area. Further, when the specific character display from which the specific character is derived is selected, the main specific character flag of the corresponding scene storage area is turned on.

After step S6102, in step S6103, the back channel display of layer 2 is set. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the specific character display can be derived at the timing of the player in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific character display can be displayed in the normal mode and the time reduction mode. When the specific character display is not derived at the timing when it can be derived, the specific character display is derived based on the operation of the specific effect button 127.

Step S6103 is a process for realizing a portion of the configuration corresponding to the moving image, and is a layer when the specific character display is set not to be displayed during the period in which the specific character display can be derived in the layer 1. In 2, the setting is made to reproduce the specific character display during that period. However, the layer 2 is normally hidden, and even if the specific character display is reproduced, it is not visually recognized. On the other hand, when the second layer is (visible) displayed, the first layer displayed below (back side) of the second layer becomes invisible.

In the following step S6104, various tables and various random number counters are used to determine the pattern of the sub-effect of the layer 4. The sub-effect is performed (displayed) in parallel with the main effect at one time of the main effect, and includes, for example, a cut-in effect, a button effect, and the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 43B, there is a case where the character C appears in the scene 3 and the effect of making the long jump is derived. In this case, the scene 3 is set up to the point where the character C jumps as shown in FIG. 43 (c), and immediately after that, the stage shifts to the final production of FIG. 43 (d) and then the landing is performed. At the production, the sub-effect (cut-in effect, button effect) shown in FIG. 43 (f) is derived.

When the derivation of the sub-effect is decided, each sub-effect flag (cut-in flag, button effect flag, etc.) indicating that the sub-effect is executed is set on for the corresponding scene storage area in the scene information storage area. And memorize the pattern of the sub production. Further, when the sub-effect is a specific character display, the sub-specific character flag is turned on.

After step S6104, in step S6105, the back channel display of layer 5 is set. Step S6105 is a process for realizing a portion corresponding to a still image in the configuration for deriving the specific character display based on the operation of the specific effect button 127, and is a pattern for displaying the specific character in layer 4. When a sub-effect that can be selected is derived, and if a pattern that displays a specific character is not selected, the layer 5 is set to reproduce the sub-effect of the pattern that displays the specific character. However, the layer 5 is normally hidden, and even if the specific character display is reproduced, it is not visually recognized. On the other hand, when the fifth layer is (visible) displayed, the fourth layer displayed below (back side) of the fifth layer becomes invisible.

After that, in step S6106, the main specific character flag of each scene storage area in the scene information storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not there is a scene from which the specific character display is derived in the main effect. If a negative determination is made in step S6106, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, the sub-effect flag in the scene storage area in which the specific character flag is set to be turned on is referred to in step S6107, and the sub-effect is displayed in the scene where the specific character is displayed in the main effect. Determine if the display is scheduled to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S6107, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6107, the sub-effect that is determined to be executed in the scene where the specific character is displayed in the main effect by referring to the sub-specific character flag in step S6108 is displayed as the specific character. It is determined whether or not it is. When the affirmative determination is made in step S6108, that is, when the specific character display of the main effect and the specific character display of the sub effect are derived in duplicate, the stock effect flag of the corresponding scene storage area is derived in step S6109. Is turned on.

That is, in the case where the character C is specified as a specific character (stored in the specific character selection storage area), the main effect of FIG. 43 (d) and the sub effect of FIG. 43 (f) overlap. If so, both are displayed as specific characters, but the aspect of FIG. 43 (d) is (almost) invisible. In this case, in this example, stock points are given as a compensation for not being able to show the specific character display (aspect of FIG. 43D) of the main effect.

In the present embodiment, by accumulating 5 stock points, the right to derive the specific character display once (based on the operation of the specific effect button 127) at the player's favorite timing is granted. .. In step S6109, the stock effect flag for executing the stock effect display that stock points have been added because the specific character display is duplicated is turned on. After step S6109, this process ends. The stock points are added when the stock effect display is derived, not at the timing of step S6109.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, a stock point display 465 as a specific effect stock display indicating how much stock points are accumulated is derived from the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 42. When 5 stock points are accumulated, the stock point display 465 changes to the display of a specific character. In addition, stock points can be accumulated up to 7 points, and the 6th and 7th stock point display 465 is displayed small on the right side of the specific character.

By operating the specific effect button 127 with 5 or more stock points accumulated, a specific character display (or a parts effect using the effect handle 401, which will be described in detail later) is derived (a specific character that has been stocked). (The right to derive the display is exercised), the stock points are deducted by 5 points, and the stock point display 465 also changes to the display mode corresponding to the points deducted by 5 points. Further, when the stock points exceed 7 points, the stock right of the specific character display is forcibly exercised even if the player does not operate the specific effect button 127. The stock point display 465 of the present embodiment is hidden when it develops into a super reach effect in the effect variation display, but it may be configured to continue to be displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6108, it is determined in step S6110 whether or not the sub-effect that overlaps with the specific character display of the main effect is a permission display. That is, in the sub-effect, a permission display that is permitted to be derived in duplicate with the specific character display of the main effect and a disapproval display that is disapproved are set in advance, and basically, the permission is permitted. The display is a display that does not hinder the display of the specific character, or conversely enhances the display, and the disapproval display is a display that hinders the visibility of at least a part of the display of the specific character. The derivation period of the disapproval display corresponds to the specific display prohibition period.

For example, when FIG. 43 (d) is a specific effect display of the main effect, FIG. 43 (e) is an effect display (semi-transparent red flame), and by superimposing both of them, a specific character can be displayed. It will be displayed as if the spirit of C is included. On the other hand, FIG. 43 (g) is a disallowed display, which is a cut-in effect in which character B appears, and when this is superimposed on FIG. 43 (d), the specific character in FIG. 43 (d) is displayed. C becomes invisible. The permission display and non-permission display settings (regulations) are appropriately set for each model.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6110, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6110, a process for changing the derivation timing of the sub-effect is executed in step S6111. That is, as in the second variable display in FIG. 48, at the setting stage of the variable display, it was tentatively decided to derive the sub-effect (button effect) in the scene 4 (final effect) of "Layer 3". Since the moving image of the character C as a specific character display is derived in the scenes 3 and 4 of "Layer 1", the sub-directing is performed so that the moving image of the character C can be visually recognized preferentially and the sub-directing can be enjoyed. The derivation timing of is changed to a timing (for example, the end of the scene 1) that does not overlap with the specific character display and is not scheduled to be subjected to other sub-effects. After step S6111, this process ends.

Next, the probability variation mode pattern setting process in step S4504 of FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the probability variation mode, basically, the effect display (main effect) of the moving image is reproduced in "Layer 2", and the decorative symbol is varied in "Layer 3". The display is reproduced, and the effect display of the still image (hereinafter, also referred to as “sub-effect”) is reproduced in “Layer 4”. Further, in the present embodiment, the back channel display is reproduced in "Layer 5".

Further, in "Layer 1", the background moving image that is not related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously reproduced during the probability variation mode. In the present embodiment, the background moving image uniform for 30 seconds is sequentially reproduced in the probability variation mode. As shown in FIG. 50, as the background moving image, there are three individually specialized patterns of characters A to H (24 patterns in total), three patterns in which characters A to D appear, and characters E to E. There are 3 patterns in which H appears, 3 patterns in which characters A, C, E, and G appear, 3 patterns in which characters B, D, F, and H appear, and 4 patterns in which all cast appears. It has become.

As will be described in detail later, when the probability variation mode is started, the combination determination counter used for determining the selection of the background moving image is acquired, and the pattern of the background moving image is determined by referring to the combination determination table. In addition, a background moving image storage area for storing information on the background moving image executed in the probability variation mode is provided. In this example, the background moving image storage area includes four storage areas that can store the background moving image information, and the background moving image information is stored in each of the four storage areas. Then, the background moving image of each storage area is sequentially played back, and new background moving image information is set again in the storage area where the corresponding background moving image has finished playing.

First, in step S6201, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the layer 3 is determined and set based on the variation pattern command. Further, since the time of each scene of the main effect is also determined by determining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, the time of each scene is stored in each scene storage area of the scene information storage area.

In the following step S6202, the pattern of the main effect of layer 2 is determined and stored in each scene storage area. Further, when the specific character display from which the specific character is derived is selected, the main specific character flag of the corresponding scene storage area is turned on. In the probability variation mode of the present embodiment, when the variation display in which the reach state does not occur is performed, the main effect of layer 2 is basically not set. Further, even when a reach state occurs, there are few patterns in which the main effect is set in the scene 1 and the scene 2. In addition, there is a pattern in which the main effect of layer 2 is not set even in the effect display corresponding to the variable display that becomes a big hit. In the present embodiment, the number of scenes is set to four in the probabilistic mode as well as in the normal mode, but it can be set to be smaller than that in the normal mode and the like.

After step S6202, in step S6203, when the pattern of the sub-effect of layer 4 is determined and the derivation of the sub-effect is determined, the sub-effect is executed for the corresponding scene storage area in the scene information storage area. Each sub-effect flag (cut-in flag, button effect flag, etc.) indicating that is turned on, and the pattern of the sub-effect is stored. Further, when the sub-effect is a specific character display, the sub-specific character flag is turned on.

After step S6203, in step S6204, the back channel display of layer 5 is set. Step S6204 is a process for realizing a portion corresponding to a still image in the probability variation mode in the configuration for deriving the specific character display based on the operation of the specific effect button 127, and is a process for realizing the specific character display on the layer 4. In the case where a sub-effect that can also be selected is derived, if the pattern that displays the specific character is not selected, the layer 5 is set to reproduce the sub-effect of the pattern that displays the specific character.

In the probabilistic mode, the back channel corresponding to the moving image is not set.

After that, in step S6205, it is determined whether or not the specific background moving image flag indicating that the specific character display in which the specific character appears in the background moving image of layer 1 is being played is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6205, in step S6206, a setting is made to "hide" the main effect that overlaps with the background moving image (playing) of the specific character display (see FIG. 49). However, among the main effects, the scene from which the specific character display is derived is set to be "displayed", and the stock effect flag of the corresponding scene storage area is set to be turned on.

In the following step S6207, if a sub-effect that overlaps with the background moving image of the specific character display is set, a process of canceling the sub-effect is performed.

In the following step S6208, the variable display of the decorative symbol that overlaps with the background video of the specific character display is displayed as a mini display (for example, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left portion of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the area other than the decorative symbol of layer 3 is displayed. Performs processing to make it a transparent area). After step S6208, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6205, in step S6209, whether or not there is a scene in which the specific character display is derived in the main effect by referring to the main specific character flag of each scene storage area in the scene information storage area. To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S6209, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6209, the sub-effect flag in the scene storage area in which the specific character flag is set to be turned on is referred to in step S6210, and the sub-effect is displayed in the scene where the specific character is displayed in the main effect. Determine if the display is scheduled to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S6210, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6210, the sub-effect that is determined to be executed in the scene where the specific character is displayed in the main effect by referring to the sub-specific character flag in step S6211 is displayed as the specific character. It is determined whether or not it is. When the affirmative determination is made in step S6211, that is, when the specific character display of the main effect and the specific character display of the sub effect are derived in duplicate, the stock effect flag of the corresponding scene storage area is derived in step S6212. Is turned on. After step S6212, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6211, it is determined in step S6213 whether or not the sub-effect that overlaps with the specific character display of the main effect is a permission display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6213, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6213, a process for changing the derivation timing of the sub-effect is executed in step S6214. After step S6214, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 39, after step S4504, in step S4505, “1” indicating that the scene is 1 is set for the scene counter used for grasping the scene of the variable display of the decorative symbol. After step S4505, a value corresponding to the time of scene 1 is set for the scene grasping timer used for grasping the scene in step S4506.

In the following step S4507, it is determined whether or not there is a sub-effect of the scene 1 by referring to the sub-effect flag of the first scene storage area of the scene information storage area. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4507, the sub-effect corresponding to the sub-effect flag is set in step S4508.

After step S4508 or when a negative determination is made in step S4507, in step S4509, the stock effect flag of the first scene storage area of the scene information storage area is referred to, and whether or not there is a stock effect of scene 1. To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S4509, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4509, the stock effect is set in step S4510, stock points are added in step S4511, and then this process ends.

Since the stock effect is derived while the specific character is being displayed, it is small in the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 42 (the part where the stock point display 465 is displayed or its vicinity). Only indications such as "stock point acquisition" are derived. Further, regarding the addition of stock points, one point may be added, one or more points may be added by lottery, or duplicate specific characters (those whose visibility is hindered) may be added. The number of points to be added may be different depending on the type of display. In addition, the player may operate the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 to set so that the stock effect is not derived when the specific character is displayed, and further, when the stock effect is not derived. Instead, it may be configured so that the notification (stock effect) is performed by the dedicated part 411. Further, regarding the timing of addition of stock points, the stock points may be added so as to be performed at the timing when the stock effect is actually derived, not necessarily in step S4511.

Next, a scene update process for updating the scene of the main effect accompanying the variable display of the decorative symbol performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the value of the scene counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S6301, that is, if the fluctuation display is in progress, it is determined in step S6302 whether or not the value of the scene grasp timer is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, it is determined in step S6303 whether or not the value of the scene counter is "1". When the affirmative determination is made in step S6303, that is, when the scene 1 ends, in step S6304, a value corresponding to the time of the scene 2 is set in the scene grasp timer.

In the following step S6305, the value of the scene counter is added by 1. After that, in step S6306, the sub-effect flag of the scene storage area of the scene information storage area corresponding to the scene indicated by the scene counter is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the sub-effect is performed in the scene. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6306, in step S6307, the sub-effect is set based on information such as the type of the sub-effect flag in the same scene storage area.

After step S6307 or when a negative determination is made in step S6306, in step S6308, the stock effect flag of the scene storage area of the scene information storage area corresponding to the scene indicated by the scene counter is referred to, and in the scene. Determine whether or not a stock effect is performed. If the affirmative determination is made in step S6308, the stock effect is set so as to be derived in accordance with the timing at which the specific character display overlaps in step S6309.

In the following step S6310, stock points are added. After step S6310, the process proceeds to step S6316, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S6303, it is determined in step S6311 whether or not the value of the scene counter is "2". When the affirmative determination is made in step S6311, that is, when the scene 2 ends, in step S6312, a value corresponding to the time of the scene 3 is set in the scene grasp timer. After that, the process proceeds to step S6305 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S6311, it is determined in step S6313 whether or not the value of the scene counter is "3". When the affirmative determination is made in step S6313, that is, when the scene 3 ends, in step S6314, a value corresponding to the scene 4 (last scene) is set in the scene grasp timer. After that, the process proceeds to step S6315 described above.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S6313, that is, when the scene 4 ends, the value of the scene counter is set to "0" in step S6315. After that, the process proceeds to step S6316.

In step S6316, it is determined whether or not the mode is in the probability variation mode. If a negative determination is made in step S6316, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S6316, the background moving image timer for measuring the remaining time of the background moving image is subtracted by 1 in step S6317.

After step S6317, in step S6318, it is determined whether or not the value of the background moving image timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S6318, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6318, that is, when the background moving image that has been played ends, in step S6319, the background moving image of which of the four storage areas of the background moving image storage area is being played. Resets the background video information in the storage area indicated by the background video pointer indicating whether or not. That is, the combination determination counter is acquired, the combination determination table is referred to, the pattern of the background moving image is determined, and the information is stored in the corresponding storage area.

After step S6319, in step S6320, the background moving image pointer is updated (the background moving image storage area is set to indicate the next storage area). It should be noted that, as for the background moving image, the generation of the background moving image is not started by updating the background moving image pointer, but the generation is started sequentially from before that.

In the following step S6321, a value "3500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set for the background moving image timer. After step S6321, in step S6322, it is determined whether or not the background moving image indicated by the updated background moving image point is a specific character display in which a specific character appears. In the present embodiment, the background moving image in which the all cast appears is not included in the specific character display.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S6322, the specific background moving image flag is turned on in step S6323. Further, in step S6324, a setting is made to "hide" the main effect that overlaps with the background moving image of the specific character display. However, among the main effects, the scene from which the specific character display is derived is set to be "displayed", and the stock effect flag of the corresponding scene storage area is set to be turned on.

In the following step S6325, the decorative pattern that overlaps with the background moving image of the specific character display is set to be "mini display". Further, in step S6326, after making a setting to cancel the sub-effect that overlaps with the background moving image of the specific character display, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6322, the specific background moving image flag is turned off in step S6327, the main effect is set to be "displayed" in step S6328, and the decorative symbol is displayed as normal in step S6329. This process ends after the setting to be performed (setting to cancel the mini display). If the specific background moving image flag is off when the negative determination is made in step S6322, the present process may be terminated as it is.

Further, when the negative determination is made in step S6302, that is, when the timing for switching the scene has not been reached, the value of the scene grasp timer is subtracted by 1 in step S6330. In addition, the subtraction process of the scene grasping timer may be performed before step S6302 (in that case, the set value for the scene grasping timer is increased by 1).

After step S6330, in step S6331, it is determined whether or not the operation of the specific effect button 127 has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S6331, the process proceeds to step S6316 described above.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6331, it is determined in step S6332 whether or not there is stock (whether or not stock points are accumulated by 5 points or more). If a negative determination is made in step S6332, the present process is terminated as it is. In the scene update process, if a negative determination is made in step S6332, it is determined whether or not the error notification display is derived, and if an affirmative determination is made, whether the specific character display is being reproduced in the main effect. When it is determined whether or not the character is being reproduced and it is determined that the specific character display is being reproduced, the stock effect may be derived and the stock points may be added.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6332, in step S6333, the back channel display (specific character display performed on layer 2 or layer 5 in the normal mode and time reduction mode, and performed on layer 5 in the probability variation mode). ) Is playing.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6333, the layer on which the back channel display is performed is set as a visible display in step S6334, and the back channel display is made visible. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 42 switches from a display mode other than the specific character display to the specific character display. After step S6334, in step S6335, one stock is subtracted (after five stock points are subtracted), and then the process proceeds to step S6316 described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S6333, it is determined in step S6336 whether or not the specific character is being displayed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6336, the process proceeds to step S6316. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6336, it is determined in step S6337 whether or not the parts production using the effect handle 401 is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6337, the process proceeds to step S6316.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6337, in step S6338, if the fluctuation display corresponds to a big hit or a front-back deviation reach, the parts are produced in 1/2, and in other cases, 1 /. Perform the parts production in step 6. Set the parts production. If the parts effect is set in the parts effect setting, the stock point is subtracted by 5. After step S6338, the process proceeds to step S6316.

As a part effect of the present embodiment, the effect handle 401 is usually in a state where the positions of the tip portions of the first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 are aligned as shown in FIG. As the "handshake effect", a display mode of whether or not the handshake with the predetermined character is successful is derived, and if it is successful, the effect handle 401 causes the first slide member 402 to pop out forward as shown in FIG. 59. It transforms into a nice shape (shape that resembles a hand) and is slightly displaced up and down. Further, for example, in a state where options are derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 as a "guidance effect" and a display mode for selecting one of the options is derived by the cross button 126 and the effect button 125. , A specific character appears on the decorative symbol display device 42, and a guidance display for holding the effect handle 401 is derived, and the operation of the effect handle 401 can be used to grasp which of the above options is the correct answer (for example, two options). In this case, the effect handle 401 moves to the correct choice option side, or in the case of three choices, the cross button 126 is operated to tremble when the cursor is placed on the correct answer choice icon).

When switching to the back channel display in step S6334, a plurality of types of switching conditions may be provided. For example, the back channel display is switched to the back channel display by operating the specific effect button 127 five times (for example, the back channel display is displayed only for a moment for each operation up to four operations). May be good. Further, in order not to necessarily switch to the back channel when such an effect is derived, it is possible to set a fake effect that is likely to switch to the back channel display and does not switch when a negative determination is made in step S6337. May be good. Further, as a condition for switching to the back channel display, the higher the jackpot expectation is, the easier the switching may be.

Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the sub-side jackpot middle flag for confirming that the sub-control device 262 is in the jackpot state is set on. After step S4702, in step S4703, for the round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, "15" is set if it is "15RS" based on the information included in the opening command, and "8RS" is set. , If it is "8RN", set "8".

After that, in step S4704, the opening effect for 8 seconds is set (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the setting of the lighting mode of various lamps). In the following step S4705, a value "2000" corresponding to the opening effect time is set for the remaining time measurement timer that measures the remaining time of each scene of the effect display performed on the layer 1 in the jackpot state.

After step S4705, in step S4706, it is determined whether or not the continuous chan flag indicating that the jackpot state is repeated while interposing the high ball entry state is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4706, that is, if the high-entry state is interrupted and the jackpot state is won in the normal mode, that is, the so-called "first hit", the continuous-changing flag is set to ON in step S4707. ..

In the following step S4708, the value of the continuous chan counter that counts the number of game balls (total number of payouts) paid out based on the balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b is set to "0". .. Further, in step S4709, "2500" is set for the teaching trigger counter for grasping the timing when the total number of payouts has increased by 2500 (2500 shots) during the continuous chan.

After step S4709, or when affirmative determination is made in step S4706, in step S4710, a jackpot moving image setting process for setting the jackpot moving image derived in the decorative symbol display device 42 in the jackpot state is performed.

Here, the jackpot moving image setting process in step S4710 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the present embodiment, during the round period of the jackpot state (from the end of the opening effect to the start of the ending effect), the jackpot moving image of a uniform 15 seconds is sequentially played. Further, as shown in FIG. 56 and the like, the jackpot moving image is reproduced and displayed in layer 1.

As shown in FIG. 50, as the jackpot movie, there are three individually specialized patterns of characters A to H (24 patterns in total), three patterns in which characters A to D appear, and characters E to E to. There are 3 patterns in which H appears, 3 patterns in which characters A, C, E, and G appear, 3 patterns in which characters B, D, F, and H appear, and 4 patterns in which all cast appears. It has become. Further, in the jackpot movie in which a plurality of characters appear, not all of the target characters are always displayed as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (d). Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 (e) and 44 (f), other characters do not appear in the jackpot moving image corresponding to each character individually. In the present embodiment, the number of jackpot videos is the same as the pattern of the background video in the probability variation mode, and the combination determination counter and the combination determination table are also used when determining the jackpot video described later. It has become. However, the content of the moving image actually derived is different from that of the background moving image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), a combination storage area is provided as a combination storage means for storing information (combination of jackpot moving images) of the jackpot moving image executed in the jackpot state. In this example, the combination storage area includes the first storage area to the 16th storage area in which the information of the jackpot moving image can be stored, and the jackpot moving image information is stored in each of them. Then, the jackpot moving images in each storage area are sequentially played.

In the background video storage area used in the probabilistic mode, new background video information is set again for the storage area where the corresponding background video has finished playing, but the combination storage area is a big hit. After being set at the start of the state, it is not reset, and when the jackpot video of all storage areas is played, the jackpot video of the first played storage area is played. .. Further, in the combination storage area, the function of storing the timing (order) of deriving the winning character moving image corresponds to the period specifying means.

First, in step S6501, the storage information in the combination storage area is reset. In the following step S6502, the combination order pointer indicating which storage area of the first to 16th storage areas of the combination storage area is being played is set as the first storage area.

Then, in step 6503, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state of "15RS" is reached. If affirmative determination is made in step S6503, 15RS schedule setting processing is performed in step S6504.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the present embodiment, a round schedule storage area is provided as a period specifying means for grasping the event performed in each jackpot round. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot state of "15RS", after the end of the opening effect, at the start of the round period, in layer 4, the character as shown in FIG. 44 (g) The introductory image is derived. In step S6504, information indicating that the introduction image of the character is derived is stored in the area (first area) corresponding to the first round of the round schedule storage area. In addition, the 15th area is stored with information that it is the final round, and the 8th area is instructed to enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b which is in the open state. Memorize the information of performing "challenge production".

After step S6504, in step S6505, the hit character flag of the second storage area in the combination storage area is turned on (see FIG. 51 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, in the variable display of the decorative symbol performed immediately before the jackpot state of "15RS", the character derived in the scene 4 of the main effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "hit character"). ) Is configured to be the target of the character introduction image. In addition, a hit character storage area for storing information for identifying the hit character is provided, and when setting a variable display for teaching the occurrence of a jackpot state, the character derived in the scene 4 is shown with respect to the hit character storage area. Information is stored.

The character introduction image is reproduced and displayed on the layer 4. Further, when a plurality of main characters appear in the scene 4, the target of the introduction image (from among those characters) is randomly determined. In the present embodiment, the character introduction display corresponds to the special teaching related display (first special teaching related display) and the priority effect display (first priority effect display). Further, the opening effect of the present embodiment is configured so that a pattern corresponding to the number of continuous jackpots (the number of occurrences of jackpot states stacked without sandwiching the normal mode) is selected from a plurality of patterns. However, for example, with respect to the opening effect, a plurality of patterns associated with each character are stored, and when setting the opening effect, the pattern corresponding to the winning character is selected and reproduced. May be good.

Further, regarding the jackpot video, the jackpot video in which the hit character appears is started shortly after the introduction image is completed. As will be described later, the character introduction image has a configuration that is derived corresponding to the first round of the jackpot round (from the start to the end of the first round), and if the game ball is fired normally, 1 The round is designed to end in about 10 seconds.

Therefore, in step S6505, the combination storage is performed so that the second jackpot video among the jackpot videos in which one is 15 seconds is the jackpot video in which the hit character appears (hereinafter, referred to as “hit character video”). The hit character flag of the second storage area of the area is set to (temporarily) on. Of the jackpot videos, the hit character video in which the character appearing in the character introduction display corresponds to the special teaching-related display (second special teaching-related display) and the priority effect display (second priority effect display). Further, the hit character flag of the combination storage area and the hit character storage area constitute the priority effect-related display storage means.

In the following step S6506, a pattern of the winning character moving image is set. That is, since three patterns of jackpot moving images are prepared corresponding to each of the characters A to H, one of them is selected by lottery.

Further, in step S6507, a moving image to be reproduced in layer 2 is set in synchronization with the winning character moving image. That is, each jackpot round is not constant in length because eight game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b or the game ends after 30 seconds have passed. So, for example, if it takes about 20 seconds to digest the first round, the second jackpot movie has already started at the end of the first round. In this case, as described above, the second big hit video is set as the "hit character video", but the first 5 seconds of the hit character video is hidden by the "character introduction image" and is almost invisible. It ends up.

This point will be described in detail later, but in the present embodiment, when the "hit character moving image" overlaps with other displays such as the "character introduction image", the "hit character moving image" performed in layer 1 is compared with the "hit character moving image". A jackpot video (hereinafter referred to as "non-specific character video") in which a hit character and a character other than the specific character (hereinafter referred to as "non-specific character") appear in layer 2 is displayed so as to be covered. , Prevent the "hit character movie" from being visually recognized. Further, the same jackpot video as the "hit character video" that was not visually displayed is displayed in layer 2 in synchronization with the jackpot video of layer 1 at a timing that does not overlap with the "character introduction image" or the like. It has become like.

In step S6507, at the start of the jackpot state, in case the “hit character video” overlaps with the “character introduction image” or the like, the “non-specific character video” is “hit” in layer 2. Make settings so that it can be derived by covering the "character moving image". After step S6507, the process proceeds to step S6511.

If a negative determination is made in step S6503, it is determined in step S6508 whether or not the jackpot state is "8RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S6508, the 8RS schedule setting process is performed in step S6509. That is, the information that the final round is stored is stored in the eighth area of the round schedule storage area, and the game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 32b, which is in the open state, in the eighth area. Memorize the information of performing the "V winning challenge production" to be taught. In addition, if it is not announced that the probability change mode will be granted, information on performing a "probability change promotion challenge production" in which an effect such as the possibility of being promoted to a probability change jackpot is performed for the 7th area. Remember.

If a negative determination is made in step S6508, the 8RN schedule setting process is performed in step S6510. That is, the information that the final round is performed is stored in the eighth area of the round schedule storage area, and the information that the "probability change promotion challenge effect" is performed is stored. The V winning challenge production and the probabilistic promotion challenge production are reproduced and displayed in layer 3.

After step S6507, step S6509, or step S6510, in step S6511, a specific payout number display (2,500 ball arrival display, 5000 ball arrival display, 7500 ball arrival) is performed every time 2500 game balls are paid out in the jackpot state. Performs a specific payout number display timing estimation process for estimating the timing at which display, etc.) is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, 15 game balls are paid out, and further, the upper limit of winning the variable winning devices 32a and 32b in the jackpot round is eight. Therefore, basically 120 game balls are paid out in one round.

In step S6511, the value of the teaching trigger counter in which the remaining number until reaching 2500 payouts is counted is referred to, and the jackpot round in which the value of the teaching trigger counter becomes "0 or less" is estimated and "specified". The information for which the "payout number display" is scheduled to be performed is stored in the corresponding area of the round schedule storage area. Regarding the jackpot state of 8RN, in the 8th round, the opening time of the 2nd variable winning device 32b is very short, and the number of game balls does not increase substantially. Not eligible.

After step S6511, in step S6512, a process of setting a jackpot moving image in which a specific character appears (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific character moving image”) is performed. In the present embodiment, basically, the specific character moving image is derived once in the jackpot state.

First, in step S6512, it is determined whether or not the "specific character" and the "hit character" match, and if it is determined that they match, the setting process of the specific character moving image is skipped. (The specific character flag described later is not set to on). The number of times the specific character moving image is derived during the jackpot state is not limited to one, and the specific character moving image may be derived a plurality of times (for example, the number of times is determined by lottery). Further, even if the "specific character" is derived from the "hit character video", the "hit character video" may be configured not to be discriminated as the "specific character video" (in this case, the jackpot in which the specific character appears). The video is derived twice).

If it is determined that the "specific character" and the "hit character" do not match, a lottery will be drawn from the three patterns of jackpot videos prepared corresponding to the characters A to H specified as the specific character. Select one by.

Further, in step S6512, the order of deriving the specific character moving image is determined. In this embodiment, the "specific character video" is set so as not to overlap with the "character introduction image", "winning character video", "V winning challenge production", "probability change promotion challenge", "specific payout number display", etc. Will be done.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 56, assuming that one round of the jackpot round is 10 seconds, the first jackpot video overlaps with the character introduction image, and the second jackpot video “hits”. There is a plan to perform "character video", and there is a high possibility that the 5th and 6th jackpot videos will overlap with the "V prize challenge production". In addition, the eleventh jackpot video may be interrupted with the end of the jackpot round in the middle, and the jackpot videos in the subsequent order may not be played because the jackpot state has been completed by then.

In addition, it is desirable to open a schedule for the 7th jackpot video, considering the possibility that the "V prize challenge production" will be delayed later. Furthermore, it is desirable to open a schedule for the 10th jackpot movie in consideration of the possibility that the jackpot state will end early.

Therefore, if a specific character moving image is to be derived, it is selected from the third, fourth, eighth, and ninth jackpot moving images. Furthermore, in order to make it possible to suddenly shift the specific character video to the back order (show the same video as the specific character video in the next order), select the 3rd or 8th, which is the first order of the serial numbers. Will be done. That is, in step S6512, in the case of the jackpot state of "15RS", it is determined whether to set the "specific character moving image" in the third or the eighth.

In the present embodiment, since the round from which the "specific payout number display" is derived is estimated by the specific payout number display timing estimation process in step S6511, for example, the "specific payout number display" is performed in the fourth round. If it is considered highly likely, it is avoided to set a specific character moving image for the third jackpot moving image that overlaps in the fourth round. Therefore, in this case, it is decided to set the specific character moving image for the eighth jackpot moving image.

In the following step S6513, among the storage areas of the combination storage area, the specific character moving image is relative to the storage area (for example, the eighth storage area) corresponding to the order of the jackpot moving images determined to perform the specific character moving image in step S6512. Turn on the specific character flag that indicates that In addition, in the case of the jackpot state of "15RS" where there is no possibility that the specific payout number is displayed, a lottery will be conducted to determine the order of deriving the specific character video to either the third or the eighth. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of the jackpot state, the specific character video is referred to as "character introduction image", "win character video", "V winning challenge production", "probability change promotion challenge", and "specification". In accordance with the prohibition setting that does not overlap with the "payout number display" etc., these effect display is not performed or the jackpot rounds that are unlikely to be performed are specified, and if there are multiple jackpot rounds, the jackpot rounds are not displayed. Among them, the one with particularly good conditions is specified, and if there are multiple jackpot rounds, one is selected by lottery from among them, and the specific character video is set to be performed in the jackpot round. .. By the setting (prohibition processing), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character moving image is duplicated with other effect displays and the visibility of the specific character moving image is hindered.

In addition, in the case of the big hit state of "8RS" and "8RN", since the character introduction image and the hit character moving image are not set, the "specific payout number display" can be avoided from the first to fourth. Select the order. Further, in the present embodiment, a jackpot round with a high possibility of performing "character introduction image", "winning character video", "V winning challenge production", "probability change promotion challenge", and "specific payout number display" is performed. It is configured to avoid and determine the timing to derive a specific character display, but the priority of whether to display or not (correspondence of which to display when duplicated) or the display timing The priority at the time of setting (correspondence of which one is shifted when one timing is shifted and both are displayed even if they are duplicated) can be appropriately set for each model.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to estimate the timing (big hit round) at which the specific payout number display is likely to be derived at the start of the jackpot state. For example, at the start of each jackpot round, the said It may be determined whether or not there is a high possibility that a specific payout number display will be derived in the jackpot round. In this case, at the start of the jackpot state, the timing of other effect display is determined without considering the timing of deriving the specific payout number display. That is, regarding the setting of the derivation timing of the specific character video, it is configured to be derived at a predetermined timing in the same manner as the "character introduction image", "V winning challenge production", and "probability change promotion challenge". (For example, set it as the third jackpot video). Then, at the start of each jackpot round, it is determined that there is a high possibility that a specific payout number display will be derived for the jackpot round, and a specific character video will be derived during the jackpot round. In some cases, the timing of deriving the specific character video is changed (shifted to a later timing until it does not overlap with the jackpot round, or the display that does not overlap from the subsequent jackpot rounds is not set. You may find a jackpot round and change to it).

In the present embodiment, the fact that the specific character display should not be duplicated with various disallowed displays corresponds to the "specific display prohibition condition", and the period during which the disallowed display is derived corresponds to the "specific display prohibition period". However, a function to grasp the derivation timing of the disapproval display (for the combination storage area and the round schedule storage area, the derivation timing of the display effect corresponding to various disallowed displays is set, and the combination storage area and the round schedule storage are stored. The function of referring to the area and grasping the overlap with the disapproval display) corresponds to the "prohibition period identification means". In addition, a production display (from the start to the end of the production fluctuation display, from the start to the end of the jackpot state, from the start to the final), which is composed of a plurality of jackpot videos and a plurality of scene effects, such as a jackpot state and a production fluctuation display. (Until the end of the round, etc.) corresponds to "composite production". In particular, the effect display in which the specific character display is derived at any timing (the effect variation display in which the specific character display is derived, the effect display in the jackpot state in which at least one of the specific character moving image and the specific character display is derived) is Corresponds to "specific content indication". Further, the effect (including the opening effect and the ending effect) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 from the start to the end of the jackpot state corresponds to the "special game state effect display".

After step S6513, in step S6514, the moving image to be reproduced in layer 2 in synchronization with the specific character moving image is set. That is, in the jackpot state, when the digestion speed of the jackpot round is longer or shorter (compared to the standard 10 seconds in this example) and the timing of the "specific payout number display" is shifted, or other notification displays (error display, etc.) ) Occurs, it may overlap with a specific character movie. In FIG. 57 showing the flow of the jackpot state of “8RS”, a specific character video is used as the second jackpot video among the jackpot videos performed every 15 seconds (in FIG. 57, the jackpot video in which character C appears is used as the specific character video. Is set). However, the digestion of the first round is delayed (more than 5 seconds from the standard 10 seconds in this example), and the timing of the end of the first round is after the start of the second jackpot movie. In the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, the specific character moving image is configured to be visually recognized in a manner that does not overlap with other displays as much as possible.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the "specific character moving image" overlaps with other displays, the "specific character moving image" performed in layer 1 is compared with the "non-specific character moving image" in layer 2. Dare to cover it and display it so that the "specific character movie" is not visible. Furthermore, the same jackpot video as the "specific character video" that was not visibly displayed is displayed in layer 2 in synchronization with the jackpot video of layer 1 at a timing that does not overlap with other displays. There is.

In step S6514, at the start of the jackpot state, the “non-specific character video” is changed to the “specific character video” in layer 2 in case the “specific character video” overlaps with other displays. Make settings so that it can be covered and derived. That is, when both the layer 1 video and the layer 2 video are played back and both are visible, only the upper layer 2 video is visible and the layer 1 video is invisible. Will be done. On the other hand, even if both the layer 1 moving image and the layer 2 moving image are reproduced, if the layer 2 is hidden, the layer 1 moving image is visually recognized.

In the present embodiment, when the predetermined moving image is hidden, the predetermined moving image is hidden by displaying the moving image in a layer above the layer on which the predetermined moving image is displayed. Although it is configured to be hidden, for example, a predetermined video to be hidden is replaced with a video to be displayed (the playback data of the predetermined video is deleted, and the playback data of the video to be replaced is newly generated. It may be configured so that the predetermined moving image is not set at the timing when the display of the predetermined moving image may be canceled. Further, for example, instead of playing back a moving image or the like on a plurality of layers at the same time, it may be configured to generate and play back only a moving image that is visually displayed, such as a 3DCG animation that renders in real time. Further, for example, although a plurality of playback data that may be displayed are generated in parallel, the playback data to be displayed is selected and derived instead of providing a plurality of layers (select when switching the moving image). It may be configured to change the reproduced data).

Even in the jackpot state of "8RS" or "8RN", the display corresponding to the "hit character" (in this example, the introduction image of the character) is derived at the start of the jackpot round (first round). You may. Further, when the introduction image of the character corresponding to the "hit character" is omitted, the "hit character moving image" may be set as the first big hit moving image. In addition, with respect to the opening effect, a pattern corresponding to each character may be prepared, and a pattern corresponding to the character appearing in the effect variation display in which the jackpot state is taught may be selected. Further, the configuration in which the character introduction image or the pattern corresponding to the hit character is selected as the jackpot moving image that is visually displayed from the beginning after the character introduction image is completed may be omitted.

After step S6514, in step S6515, the NG number flag used for the setting to avoid the same jackpot moving image being continuous is set. As shown in FIG. 52, 40 patterns are prepared in this embodiment. An NG number flag group is provided as a specific effect display specifying means consisting of 40 NG number flags individually associated with each jackpot moving image.

For example, assuming that the NG number flag and the value of the combination determination counter (see FIG. 50) correspond to each other, in step S6515, all of the individual jackpot videos of the characters used as the hit character videos (three in this example). ) And the NG number flags corresponding to all of the individual jackpot videos (three in this example) of the character used as the specific character video are turned on. The total number of NG number flags set to ON is basically six, but if the winning character and the specific character match, the total number is three.

Subsequently, in step S6516, the jackpot moving image is set for the remaining storage area in which the winning character moving image or the specific character moving image is not set in the combined storage area. A combination determination counter that takes a value of "1 to 40" is used, and a pattern of the jackpot moving image is selected with reference to the combination determination table. Further, referring to the NG number flag group, when the target NG number flag is off, the NG number flag is turned on and the pattern of the jackpot moving image is stored in the target storage area of the combination storage area.

If the NG number flag corresponding to the selected jackpot video pattern is on, the value indicating the jackpot video pattern is added by 1 (1 for 40), and the NG number flag of that value is turned off. It is determined whether or not it is. This is repeated until the affirmative judgment is made, and when the affirmative judgment is made, the corresponding NG number flag is turned on, and the pattern of the jackpot video corresponding to the NG number flag set to be turned on is set in the target storage area of the combination storage area. Remember. This is repeated until the jackpot moving image pattern is stored in all 16 storage areas of the combination storage area, and the process ends.

By setting the jackpot moving image as described above, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character display is processed as an effect display other than the specific character display and overlaps with the unauthorized display. In addition, since the NG number flag is set on according to the pattern of the jackpot video set in the combination storage area, the same jackpot video is used until a series of jackpot videos stored in the combination storage area are completed. Is not derived.

In step S6517, a hold continuous challenge effect is set to suggest and teach that the fluctuation information held at the start of the big hit state includes the big hit. In the present embodiment, when the current jackpot state is the first hit, the hold continuous challenge effect is not performed, and the probability of 3/4 is 3/4 when the pending variable display includes a jackpot. It is executed with a probability of 1/20 when the variable display on hold does not include a big hit. It should be noted that the hold ream challenge production is performed in layer 3. In addition, since "character introduction image", "winning character video", "V winning challenge production", "probability change promotion challenge production", and "specific character video" are prioritized over "holding continuous challenge production", "specific character video" is given priority. "Holding consecutive challenge production" is set so as to be derived at a timing that does not overlap with these displays (if the timing of these displays is shifted so as to overlap with the timing of the holding continuous challenge production, the holding continuous challenge production is performed. (Timing has been changed), especially when there is no time to derive the hold consecutive challenge effect in the jackpot state, it is omitted. In addition, the timing of derivation of "specific payout number display" overlaps with "character introduction image", "winning character video", "V winning challenge production", "probability change promotion challenge production", and "holding consecutive challenge production". In that case, it is derived in duplicate as it is.

It should be noted that the “winning character moving image” and the “holding continuous challenge production” in which the derivation timing can be staggered may be configured to stagger the derivation timing so as to avoid duplication with the specific payout number display. .. Further, in the present embodiment, among the "non-permitted display", the "character introduction image" and the "V winning challenge effect" that adjust the derivation timing of the specific character display when it is determined that the specific character display overlaps with the specific character display. , And "Probability change promotion challenge" correspond to "1st disapproval display", and when it is determined that it overlaps with a specific character display, the derivation timing of the disapproval display is adjusted. Etc. correspond to "second disapproval display".

When deriving the specific payout number display, it is determined whether or not the specific payout number display and the specific character video overlap, and when it is determined that they overlap, the timing at which the specific character video is visually displayed is set to 1. In addition to changing the order after that, it is also possible to set so that another jackpot video (big hit video other than the specific character video) can be visually displayed in the order in which the specific character video was supposed to be displayed visually. good.

Further, in step S6517, when it is decided to perform the hold consecutive challenge effect, the jackpot round for executing the hold consecutive challenge is selected. In this embodiment, it is not a jackpot round in which a character introduction image, a specific payout number display, a V winning challenge production, and a probabilistic promotion challenge production are performed, and a winning character video and a jackpot round that does not overlap with the specific character video ( In the case of FIGS. 51 and 56, the sixth round) is selected.

In the following step S6518, among the round schedule storage areas, the hold ream challenge flag indicating that the hold ream challenge effect is to be performed on the storage area corresponding to the jackpot round selected in step S6517 is turned on. After that, this process ends.

In this embodiment, the jackpot video for 15 seconds uniformly corresponds to the "regular production display", and the jackpot videos are connected and performed from the start (start of the first round) to the end (end of the final round) of the round period. The effect display (background movie) is equivalent to the "first effect display". In addition, "character introduction image", "V winning challenge production", "probability change promotion challenge", etc., which are set corresponding to a predetermined jackpot round and therefore have a variable length from the start to the end, are displayed. Corresponds to "second production display". Further, the "specific character moving image" corresponds to the "regular specific effect display".

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S4710, in step S4711, the jackpot moving image standby flag indicating that the player is waiting for the start of the jackpot round is turned on, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the sub-side jackpot middle flag is set to ON in step S4712. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, the value of the remaining time measurement timer is subtracted by 1 in step S4713. In the following step S4714, it is determined whether or not the remaining time measurement timer is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S4714, that is, when the timing for updating the moving image performed in layer 1 has arrived, it is determined in step S4715 whether or not the jackpot moving image standby flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4715, that is, when the opening effect is finished and the first round is started, the jackpot moving image standby flag is turned off in step S4716, and then the process proceeds to step S4718.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4715, the combination order pointer is updated so that the combination order pointer indicates the next storage area of the combination storage area in step S4717.

In step S4718, the jackpot moving image individual start processing performed at the start of each jackpot moving image is performed.

Here, the jackpot moving image individual start processing in step S4718 will be described with reference to FIG. 54.

First, in step S6601, it is determined whether or not the specific character flag indicating that the specific character moving image is reproduced is set to ON in the storage area of the combination storage area indicated by the combination order pointer. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6601, in step S6602, a disapproval display such as "specific payout number display" or an error display is being derived, and when the specific character video is derived, the winning character video and the disapproval are performed. Determine if the display overlaps. If a negative determination is made in step S6602, that is, if the specific character moving image can be derived and displayed without overlapping with the disallowed display, the layer 2 in which the non-specific character moving image is reproduced in step S6603. Is switched to non-display, and then this process ends. As a result, the specific character moving image is displayed as the big hit moving image in the order set at the beginning of the big hit state, as planned at the beginning of the big hit state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6602, in step S6604, a specific character standby flag indicating that the specific character moving image to be displayed has not yet been displayed is set to be turned on.

In the following step S6605, the layer 2 is switched to the visible display. That is, in layer 2, since the character video other than the specific one is played by overlapping (synchronizing) with the jackpot video in the order that is being performed in layer 1 from now on, by switching the layer 2 to the visible display, the character video is played back in layer 1. -The displayed specific character movie is invisible.

Further, in step S6606, a specific character moving image to be overlapped with the next big hit moving image is set in layer 2. In other words, since the specific character video could not be visually recognized in this jackpot video, if possible, the setting for viewing the specific character video (the same video) in the next jackpot video. (Generation of a specific character moving image of layer 2) is performed. After step S6606, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6601, it is determined in step S6607 whether or not the specific character standby flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6607, in step S6608, the disapproval display is being derived, and if the specific character video is derived, whether or not the specific character video and the disapproval display overlap. Determine.

If a negative determination is made in step S6608, it is determined in step S6609 whether or not there is a possibility that the final round of the jackpot round will end during the current jackpot video and the ending effect will be entered. If a negative determination is made in step S6609, layer 2 is switched to visible display in step S6610. That is, in layer 2, it overlaps (synchronizes) with the jackpot video performed in layer 1, and (although it is played as a jackpot video that has just finished in layer 1, it overlaps with the jackpot video that is applied in layer 2 and is a character video other than the specific one. Since the specific character video (the same video) that was not visible to the player is played because it was displayed visually, it is played and displayed on layer 1 by switching layer 2 to visible display. Character moving images other than specific ones are invisible. As a result, the timing of derivation is changed so that the specific character moving image does not overlap with the unauthorized display.

After step S6610, in step S6611, the specific character standby flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6608, in step S6612, a layer 2 specific character moving image to be overlapped with the next jackpot moving image (non-specific character moving image) performed in layer 1 is set. After that, in step S6613, layer 2 is switched to non-display, and then this process ends.

Even at the start of the disapproval display such as the sub-effect or the notification effect, it is determined whether or not the disapproval display and the specific character moving image overlap, and if it is determined that they overlap, the disapproval is not permitted. It is determined whether the display or the specific character display has priority, and the derivation timing of the non-priority is set so as to avoid duplication. For example, as shown in the <special case> of FIG. 56, the second jackpot moving image (the moving image of the character C which is the specific character moving image) performed in layer 1 is given priority over the specific character moving image (predetermined). When the error notification display (error notification display) of (Other than the character moving image is set), the same specific character moving image (reproduction display) as the specific character moving image whose visible display is canceled is set to be played back in layer 2.

As a result, in the second jackpot moving image, the character moving image other than the specific layer 2 is visually recognized, and in the third jackpot moving image, the specific character moving image of the layer 2 is visually recognized. However, in the <special case> of FIG. 56, the error notification display is duplicated in the third jackpot moving image. Therefore, at the start of the second jackpot video, the overlap between the specific character video of layer 2 and the error notification display is grasped, layer 2 (reproduction display) is hidden, and the character display other than the specific character of layer 1 is displayed. It is set so that the specific character video (re-directed display) is played back (the visible display of the specific character video is further postponed) by making it visible and overlapping with the fourth jackpot video of layer 1. conduct. After that, at the start of the fourth jackpot video, if there is no overlap between the disapproval display (error notification display) that has priority over the specific character video and the specific character video, layer 2 in the fourth jackpot video. The specific character moving image of is displayed visually.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6609, the specific character standby flag is turned off in step S6614. After that, in step S6613 described above, layer 2 is switched to non-display, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6607, it is determined in step S6615 whether or not the hit character flag is set to ON in the storage area of the combination storage area indicated by the combination order pointer (basically, "" When it becomes "15RS", the hit character flag is set to ON in the second storage area).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6615, whether or not the first round of the jackpot round has ended in step S6616, and by extension, whether or not the character introduction screen that is performed in synchronization with the first round has ended. To determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6616, in step S6617, a disapproval display such as "specific payout number display" or an error display is being derived, and when the winning character video is derived, the winning character video and the disallowed display are being derived. Determine if the display overlaps. If a negative determination is made in step S6617, the present process is terminated as it is. As a result, the hit character video is displayed as the second jackpot video as planned at the beginning of "15RS" (layer 2 in which the non-specific character video is played is maintained as "hidden").

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6616 or an affirmative determination is made in step S6617, a winning character waiting flag indicating that the winning character moving image to be displayed has not yet been displayed is set in step S6618. Set on.

In the following step S6619, the layer 2 is switched to the visible display. That is, in layer 2, since the character moving image other than the specific one is played by overlapping (synchronizing) with the second jackpot moving image performed in layer 1, by switching the layer 2 to the visible display, the character moving image is played back in layer 1. The displayed hit character moving image is invisible.

Further, in step S6620, the hit character moving image to be overlapped with the next (third) big hit moving image is set in the layer 2. In other words, in this jackpot video, the hit character video could not be visually recognized, so if possible, the setting for viewing the hit character video (the same video) at the next jackpot video. (Generation of a hit character moving image of layer 2) is performed. After step S6620, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6615, it is determined in step S6621 whether or not the winning character standby flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S6621, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6621, it is determined in step S6622 whether or not the first round has been completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6622, in step S6623, a disapproval display such as "specific payout number display" or an error display is being derived, and when the winning character video is derived, the winning character video and the disallowed display are being derived. Determine if the display overlaps.

If a negative determination is made in step S6623, layer 2 is switched to visible display in step S6624. That is, in layer 2, the character video other than the specific character video is duplicated (synchronized) with the jackpot video performed in layer 1 (although it was reproduced as the second jackpot video in layer 1, it is duplicated in the jackpot video performed in layer 2). Since the character video (the same video as the same video) is played, it is played and displayed on layer 1 by switching layer 2 to visible display. Character moving images other than specific ones are invisible. As a result, the timing of derivation is changed so that the winning character moving image does not overlap with the character introduction image or other unauthorized display. Even if the display is disallowed (affirmative determination in step S6623), if it is determined that the pending continuous challenge effect, which is set to have a lower priority than the winning character video, and the winning character video overlap, it is reserved. It is assumed that the derivation timing of the continuous challenge effect is changed (then, the process proceeds to step S6624). Further, the timing of deriving the hold continuous challenge effect may be changed before or after step S6624, or may be set at the time of starting the hold continuous challenge effect.

After step S6624, in step S6625, the winning character standby flag is turned off, and then this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S6622 or an affirmative determination is made in step S6623, layer 2 is switched to non-display in step S6626. For example, when the non-specific character video of layer 2 overlapped with the second hit character video of layer 1 is displayed visually, the hit character video is reproduced at layer 2 by overlapping with the third non-specific character video of layer 1. However, if the third jackpot video of layer 1 (character video other than the specific character) also overlaps with the character introduction image or other unauthorized display, layer 2 is hidden in step S6626. As a result, the character moving image other than the specific layer 1 can be visually recognized.

Further, in the following step S6627, a layer 2 hit character moving image to be overlapped with the next big hit moving image (non-specific character moving image) performed in layer 1 is set. After step S6627, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S4718, in step S4719, the value "1750" corresponding to 15 seconds of the jackpot moving image is set for the remaining time measurement timer.

After step S4719 or when a negative determination is made in step S4714, it is determined in step S4720 whether or not a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4720, a round display setting for displaying a round indicating the current number of jackpot rounds is performed in step S4721. For example, if the value of the round grasp counter is "15" in "15RS", it is displayed as "first round". In the 8th round of "8RN", the round display is not derived.

In the following step S4722, it is determined whether or not it is the first round of "15RS". If the affirmative determination is made in step S7222, the round schedule storage area (see FIG. 51 (b)) is referred to in step S4723, and the character introduction setting for deriving the character introduction image in layer 4 is performed. After that, the process proceeds to step S4728.

If a negative determination is made in step S4722, in step S4722, the storage area of the round schedule storage area corresponding to the jackpot round indicated by the round grasp counter is confirmed, and whether or not the hold consecutive challenge flag is set to ON. To determine. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4724, the setting for deriving the hold continuous challenge effect is made in step S4725. After that, the process proceeds to step S4728.

If a negative determination is made in step S4724, in step S4726, the storage area of the round schedule storage area corresponding to the jackpot round indicated by the round grasp counter is confirmed, and whether or not the probabilistic promotion challenge flag is set to ON. To determine. If a negative determination is made in step S4726, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4726, the setting for deriving the probabilistic promotion challenge effect is made in step S4727. After that, the process proceeds to step S4728.

In step S4728, in parallel with the derivation of the sub-effects (character introduction image, hold consecutive challenge effect, probabilistic promotion challenge effect, etc.) for which the derivation is set, the sub-effect of the pattern in which the specific character appears is layer 2 or layer. In step 5, the process for reproducing the image in a hidden manner (displaying the back channel) is performed. However, when the sub-effect itself is a specific character display, it is not necessary to set the back channel. The back channel display of the character introduction image (layer 4) is reproduced in layer 5, and the back channel display of the hold continuous challenge effect and the probabilistic promotion challenge effect (layer 3) is reproduced in layer 2.

After step S4728, in step S4729, it is determined whether or not the sub-effect overlaps with the specific character moving image performed in "Layer 1" (whether or not the specific character moving image is being displayed). That is, at the start of the jackpot state, the specific character display and the like are set so as to avoid duplication of the specific character display and the unauthorized display, but the length of the jackpot round is not constant. Even at the start of each sub-effect, the overlap between the specific character display and the disallowed display is confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4729, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4729, it is determined in step S4730 whether or not the sub-effect is a specific character display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4730, the stock effect is set in step S4731. That is, the process of deriving the stock effect is performed, and the process of adding the stock points is performed. After step S4731, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4730, it is determined in step S4732 whether or not the sub-effect is a hold continuous challenge effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4732, a process of changing the derivation timing of the hold continuous challenge effect is performed in step S4733. That is, the hold consecutive challenge flag of the storage area in which the predetermined sub-effect flag is not set to be turned on in the round schedule storage area is turned on (if there is no space, the hold consecutive challenge flag is not set to be turned on). After step S4733, this process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4732, that is, the sub-effects are a probability variation promotion challenge effect and a character introduction (in this example, the character introduction is derived only in the first round, so that the sub-effects are substantially duplicated. In the case of the V-winning challenge effect described later, in step S4734, a process of changing the timing of deriving the specific character moving image is performed instead of the sub-effect. That is, the "layer 2" in which the non-specific character moving image is hidden and played is displayed as a visible display, and the next jackpot moving image is rewritten into the specific character moving image. After step S4734, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4720, it is determined in step S4735 whether or not a V winning round command has been received from the main control device 261. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4735, the setting for deriving the V winning challenge effect is made in step S4736.

After that, the process proceeds to step S4728 described above, and when the V winning challenge effect is not the specific character display in which the specific character appears, the V winning challenge effect of the pattern in which the specific character appears is reproduced in layer 2 (however, non-). After performing the process for display), this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4735, it is determined in step S4737 whether or not a short round command has been received from the main control device 261. If the affirmative determination is made in step S4737, the effect setting for the short round is performed in step S4738. That is, since it is the start of the 8th round of "8RN" in which the 2nd variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.1 seconds, the jackpot video of the 7th round is displayed so that the display during that period is not interrupted. , The setting for deriving the effect (the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is taken over as it is and ended after 0.1 seconds) that connects the ending effect without any discomfort is made. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4737, it is determined in step S4739 whether or not an interval command has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4739, the round grasp counter is subtracted by 1 in step S4740, the round display is erased in step S4741, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4739, it is determined in step S4742 of FIG. 38 whether or not the ending command has been received. If affirmative determination is made in step S4742, the round grasp counter is subtracted by 1 in step S4743, and the ending effect of 10 seconds is set in step S4744. The ending effect of the present embodiment is configured so that a pattern according to the jackpot type is selected from a plurality of patterns. For example, the ending effect is also associated with each character. The pattern may be stored so that the pattern corresponding to the winning character can be selected and reproduced when setting the ending effect. Further, for example, the hit character may be continuously displayed from the beginning to the end of the jackpot state. That is, for example, the jackpot moving image in the jackpot state may be configured to be selected from a hit character moving image, a moving image in which the hit character and other characters appear, or a part of the decorative symbol display device 42 ( For example, in the normal gaming state, the winning character may be continuously displayed in the area where the stock point display 465 is displayed).

After step S4744, in step S4745, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probabilistic mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4745, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4745, the process of setting the background moving image derived in layer 1 is performed in step S4746. As described above, the pattern of the background moving image is determined and stored in the four storage areas of the background moving image storage area, and the background moving image pointer is set to indicate the first storage area of the background moving image storage area.

In the following step S4747, it is determined whether or not the background moving image indicated by the background moving image pointer is a specific character display. If affirmative determination is made in step S4747, the specific background moving image flag is turned on in step S4748. By setting the specific background video flag on in step S4748, the main effect that overlaps with the background video that is the specific character display is "hidden" when setting the variable display of the decorative pattern (the effect display that accompanies it). (Except when the main effect is also a specific character display), the decorative design that overlaps with the background video of the specific character display is set as "mini display", and the sub effect that overlaps with the background video of the specific character display is canceled. become.

After step S4748 or when a negative determination is made in step S4747, in step S4749, a value corresponding to 15 seconds is set for the background moving image timer, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4742, it is determined in step S4750 whether or not the specific payout number display flag indicating that the specific payout number is to be displayed is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4750, in step S4751, a process for deriving the specific payout number display is performed in layer 4, and in step S4752, the specific character is displayed in layer 5 in synchronization with the specific payout number display. The specific payout number display of the pattern in which the specific character (character C in FIG. 56) appears is set as the back channel display. The back channel display (layer 5) is basically hidden, and the back channel display is visible when the specific effect button 127 is operated while the specific character display has the right to be derived (there is stock). It is displayed.

Subsequently, in step S4753, the specific payout number display flag is turned off. After step S4753 or when a negative determination is made in step S4750, in step S4754, whether or not the specific effect button 127 is pressed is determined based on the corresponding detection information. If a negative determination is made in step S4754, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4754, it is determined in step S4755 whether or not there is a right to derive a specific character display (there is stock, there are 5 or more stock points). If a negative determination is made in step S4755, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4755, it is determined in step S4756 whether or not the back channel display (hidden in layer 2 or layer 5) is being reproduced. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4756, a process of switching the back channel display to the visible display is performed in step S4757. In the following step S4758, the stock is subtracted by 1 (stock points are subtracted by 5), and then the present process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S4756, it is determined in step S4759 whether or not the timing overlaps with the specific character display (specific character moving image) when a predetermined effect is derived. If a negative determination is made in step S4759, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4759, the present process ends after the setting for deriving the back effect is made in step S4760. The back effect is, for example, a dedicated effect, a specific character display from which a specific character is derived, or an effect that is normally difficult to be derived, and can be appropriately set. In the present embodiment, for example, the decorative symbol display device 42 derives the specific character display, and the effect handle 401 derives the part effect that performs a predetermined operation.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in step S3909, the fluctuation stop processing related to the stop of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a stop command (see step S821 of the special display control process) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, in step S4402, a process of stopping and displaying the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

After step S4402, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the end-of-support command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4403, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, in step S4404, the effect stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed from the "probability change stage" or the "pullback stage" to the "normal stage". I do.

In the following step S4405, the continuous chan end flag is turned off, and in step S4406, the continuous chan end count display process for teaching the contents of the continuous chan (total number of payouts, etc.) is performed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3910, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illumination is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3911.

In step S3912, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect is performed. That is, it is configured to shift to the customer gathering mode or the energy saving mode when the player is not playing for a specified time, and the decorative symbol display device 42 does not display the decorative symbol as a customer waiting effect (instead). A series of moving images are displayed, or a still image is displayed), and a demo screen display such as a dark screen is derived.

In step S3913, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the settings of steps S3906 to S3913 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

After the processes of steps S3906 to S3913 performed every 2 msec are executed, or when a negative determination is made in the above step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3914 and whether or not the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power failure occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3915, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that the power cutoff occurrence information is stored, the power cutoff process is executed in step S3916. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, any one of the characters A to H displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is set as a specific character in response to the input by the player's effect button 125 and the cross button 126. It is configured so that the specific character display in which the specific character appears can be preferentially displayed.

More specifically, in the normal mode and the time reduction mode, at the start of the effect variation display, after setting the main effect and the sub effect, it is determined whether or not the specific character display exists in the main effect. When a specific character display exists, it is determined whether or not there is a sub-display (disapproval display such as button effect) that overlaps with the specific character display. Then, the sub-display that overlaps with the specific character is changed to a timing that does not overlap. That is, at the start of the effect variation display, it is determined whether or not the specific character display of the main effect and the disallowed display of the sub effect overlap, and if it is determined that they overlap, the derivation timing of the disallowed display is determined. It is designed to be changed (see step S6111, etc. in FIG. 45). For example, as in the setting of the second effect variation display in FIG. 48, as a moving image of character C as "specific character display" performed in "layer 1" and as "disapproval display" performed in "layer 4". When the button effect of is overlapped, the button effect is changed to a timing that does not overlap with the moving image of the character C.

Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the jackpot state, after the settings of "V winning challenge production", "character introduction image", and "specific payout number display" are made (further, "win character moving image" is set. After that), the setting is made so that the "specific character moving image" is derived at a timing that does not overlap with them. That is, for example, as in the setting of the display of the jackpot state in FIG. 56, at the start of the jackpot state, the moving image of the character C as the specific character display performed in the “layer 1” is performed in the “layer 3”. It is set so as not to overlap with the V prize challenge production as "permission display", the character introduction image as "non-permission display" performed in "layer 4", and the specific payout number display (see FIG. 53 step S6512, etc.). ).

Further, as shown in the <special case> of FIG. 56, after the start of the jackpot state (after setting various effect displays during the jackpot state), in a hurry, "Layer 4" is applied to the moving image of the character C as the specific character display. When the error notification display of the above is duplicated, the timing of the moving image of the character C is changed so that the moving image of the character C is derived after the error notification display is finished. That is, in the present embodiment, at the start of the specific character moving image, it is determined whether or not the specific character moving image and the disallowed display overlap (FIG. 54; step S6601, step S6602). When it is determined that they are duplicated, the specific character videos are changed so that they are visually displayed in the order after one, and in the order (period) in which the specific character videos were supposed to be visually displayed, another big hit. A moving image (a moving image other than a specific character moving image) is derived (displayed visually when the error notification display is deleted).

In addition, as in the setting of the display of the jackpot state in FIG. 57, after the start of the jackpot state, the specific number of payouts of "Layer 4" is suddenly applied to the video of character C as the specific character display (specific character video). When the display is duplicated (the prediction of the specific payout number display is wrong, the specific payout number display is duplicated with the jackpot video one after that, and as a result, the specific payout number display is the character C. (When overlapping with the moving image), the timing of the moving image of the character C is changed so that the moving image of the character C is derived after the display of the specific payout number is completed. That is, when the specific character video is started, when the first area of the round schedule storage area corresponding to the current jackpot round is referred to, the information that the specific payout number display, which is an unauthorized display, is performed is stored. Therefore, the visible display of the specific character moving image is changed to the next order, and instead, the jackpot moving image other than the specific character is set to be visually displayed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot moving image other than the specific character of layer 2 that is visually displayed instead of the specific character moving image corresponds to the alternative effect display, is performed in layer 2 after the alternative effect display, and is made invisible in the layer 1. The same jackpot movie as the specific character movie corresponds to the re-directed display.

Further, in step S4729 of FIG. 37, when deriving the sub-effect in the jackpot state (starting the disapproval display), it is determined that the sub-effect overlaps with the jackpot video (the jackpot video is being played), and the sub-effect is In the case of the hold consecutive challenge production, the timing of the hold consecutive challenge production is changed (step S4733), and in the case of the V winning challenge production, the character introduction display, and the probabilistic promotion challenge production, the timing of the jackpot video is changed (step S4733). Step S4734).

As described above, the "V winning challenge effect", the "character introduction image", the "specific payout number display", and the "error notification display" are non-permitted displays in which duplication with the specific character display is not permitted. On the other hand, there is also a permission display that can be duplicated with the specific character display (for example, the display of FIG. 43 (e) for the specific character display of FIG. 43 (d)). Even if the timings overlap, they are derived in such a way that they are duplicated as they are. In other words, with regard to the "specific character display", in order for the player to fully enjoy the display, the display is such that the visual mode of the specific character display is hindered by being derived in duplicate with the specific character display. It is set as "non-permitted display", and the timing of derivation is adjusted so that the specific character display and the disallowed display do not overlap. On the other hand, a display effect that enhances the specific character display and a display that does not hinder the visual mode of the specific character display are not set as "non-permitted display" (referred to as "permitted display") and are specified. Duplicate with the character display is allowed.

As described above, in the normal mode, the time reduction mode, and the jackpot state, the specific character display and the disapproval display are set so as not to overlap at the start of the effect variation display and the start of the jackpot state ( Prohibition processing is performed) is performed. Furthermore, the specific character display during the jackpot state and the disapproval display at the start of each disapproval display (the effect display performed corresponding to the jackpot round and the display for performing predetermined teaching / notification) and the disapproval. Settings (change of derivation timing) are made so that the display does not overlap. Therefore, due to the overlap between the specific character display and the disallowed display, one of the specific character display and the disallowed display is omitted, or one or both are difficult to recognize. It is possible to avoid situations such as (specific character display and disapproval display are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand). In addition, it can be visually recognized through a specific character display or a disapproval display (a situation in which a situation is interrupted and then restarted from the interrupted place can be avoided). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the derivation of the specific character display that the player is looking forward to is hindered by the derivation of the disapproval display and the player accumulates stress, and the disapproval display can also be visually recognized. can. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the character introduction image corresponding to the first round of the jackpot state, the V winning challenge production corresponding to the eighth round, and the timing when the total number of game balls paid out in the jackpot state exceeds the specified number are performed. The timing of displaying the specific payout number is configured to be performed at the original timing (to manage the derivation timing of the specific character display). In other words, there is no point in deriving the V-winning challenge effect that encourages the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b to other than the eighth round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. , The timing of deriving the V prize challenge production should not be shifted from the 8th round. Also, regarding the specific payout number display, if the timing of derivation is postponed steadily because it overlaps with the specific character display, the specific payout number display and the actual total number of game ball payouts will be different and specified. The value (meaning) of the information on the number of payouts is lost. Further, in the character introduction image, the character appearing in the variable display in which the jackpot is displayed (or the character in the jackpot symbol may be used, or the jackpot symbol may be configured to match the character appearing in the variable display). Is displayed, but when the timing is far from the start of the jackpot state, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence, so it is desirable to perform it at the timing as close as possible.

In this regard, the derivation timing of the "character introduction image", "V winning challenge production", and "specific payout number display" is set before the specific character video, and the specific character video does not overlap with many of them. Because it is set, the timing of "character introduction image", "V winning challenge production", and "specific payout number display" is maintained, so that the derivation timing of these "notification displays" can be determined. Due to the delay, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the information obtained from the notification display becomes old, its value is diminished, its meaning is lost, or it becomes inconsistent. Therefore, the information of the notification display can be surely obtained at the original timing, and the game can proceed with peace of mind based on the information of the notification display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation mode, when the specific character moving image is derived from the big hit moving image of the layer 1, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the layer 3 is reduced and mini-displayed (see FIG. 49). ). For this reason, although it is better for the player to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern even if it overlaps with the specific character video, there is a concern that the display mode as it is will hinder the visual mode of the specific character video too much. Can be wiped off. In addition, the specific character moving image can be visually recognized in the original display mode.

In addition, in the first round of the jackpot state of "15RS", a character introduction image in which the same character as the character (hit character) that appeared in the scene 4 of the effect variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the jackpot state was taught appears. Is displayed in layer 4 (character introduction display is performed) (see FIG. 56). Furthermore, regarding the jackpot videos that are sequentially derived in layer 1 from the start to the end of the jackpot round (from the end of the opening effect to the start of the ending effect), the first after the display of the character introduction image (first round) is completed. As the jackpot movie that starts in, the hit character movie in which the hit character appears is selected.

Therefore, from the teaching of the occurrence of the jackpot state of "15RS" in the effect variation display to the beginning of the jackpot state of "15RS", it is possible to connect the effect displays (display of the winning character) related to each other, and the occurrence of the jackpot state. The feeling of exhilaration when is taught can be smoothly connected to the jackpot state. Therefore, in a situation in which the player is very pleased, such as winning the jackpot state and starting the jackpot state, a more impressive effect can be derived, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by visually recognizing the display related to the effect display (the hit character in the above example) of the effect variation display in which the jackpot was taught at the beginning of the jackpot state, a recollection of how the occurrence of the jackpot state was taught in the effect variation display. It is possible to synergistically enhance the effect of the effect variation display and the effect display during the jackpot state.

In addition, since the configuration makes the effect display in which the hit character appears (attention), the effect display in which the hit character appears is interrupted for some reason or the visibility is hindered in the jackpot state. If it is done, there is a concern that it will offend you. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the hit character moving image is configured so as not to overlap with the character introduction image and other unauthorized displays (see steps S6615 to S6627 in FIG. 55), so that such concern is dispelled. It is possible to enjoy the effect display in the jackpot state more comfortably.

Furthermore, since the effect display of the scene 4 (effect display at the time of winning) and the winning character moving image are derived while the memory of the character introduction image is new, as a result, the effect display of the scene 4 is performed. Can strengthen the significance of. Therefore, the effect display of the scene 4 can be made more interesting, and the playability can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific character moving image is derived once during the jackpot state. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot state, it is known in advance that the disapproval effect (character introduction image, V winning challenge effect, probabilistic promotion challenge effect) will be derived in response to a specific jackpot round, and the disapproval display will be displayed. On the other hand, it is set so that the specific character moving images are derived at a timing that does not overlap as much as possible. In other words, changing (resetting) the setting of the specific character video even if the disapproval display is derived after the derivation of the specific character video is set complicates the process and the specific character video. Since there is a concern that a predetermined defect (misalignment, etc.) may occur in the above mode, the setting is made so as to avoid duplication with the unauthorized display as much as possible when setting the specific character moving image. Such concerns can be suppressed. Furthermore, by setting the derivation timing of the specific character video according to the derivation timing of the disapproval display at the start of the jackpot state, for example, it was found that the derivation timing overlaps with the disapproval effect at the start of the specific character video. It is possible to suppress situations where there is no room for change.

Further, in the present embodiment, every time the number of game balls (total number of payouts) paid out based on the balls entered into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b increases by about 2500 in the jackpot state, the decorative symbol display device 42 specifies. The payout number display is derived. The specific payout number display is a disapproval display, and at the start of the jackpot state, determine in which jackpot round the specific payout number display is likely to be derived, avoid such jackpot rounds, and avoid the jackpot round as much as possible. Is designed to determine the order of multiple jackpot videos to be derived to the jackpot state so that is not duplicated with the specific payout number display. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly take measures such as reducing the possibility of duplication of the derivation timing of the specific character moving image according to the prediction of the timing at which the specific payout number display is derived. In particular, a situation in which either the specific character video and the specific payout number display overlap or the specific character video is interrupted occurs, such as the specific character video being suddenly interrupted and derived during the derivation of the specific character video. It can be avoided.

Further, the overlap determination between the specific character display (specific character moving image) and the unauthorized display (including the specific character display) is performed not only at the start of the jackpot state (step S4710) but also at the start of the specific character display (step S4718). ), And at the start of the disapproval display (steps S4720 to S4736). Therefore, even if the timing of the disapproval display or the specific character display suddenly changes after the start of the jackpot state (the jackpot video as the disapproval content effect or the specific display content effect), duplication is avoided. It will be possible to take various measures. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as avoiding duplication of the disapproval display and the specific character display are more reliably achieved.

Regarding the effect variation display, the overlap between the specific character display and the disallowed display is determined at the start of the effect variation display, and even after the start of the specific character display, it is not possible at the start of the error notification display or the background video. Duplicate with the permission display is determined, and the corresponding processing (stock display processing, etc.) is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the disapproval display that overlaps with the specific character display (specific character moving image) is the specific character display and the general effect display (button effect, hold challenge effect, etc.) other than the notification display, it is general. The derivation timing of the effect display has been changed, and the derivation timing of the specific character display has not been changed. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to derive the specific character display, and when the specific character display is derived, it is possible to avoid duplication with the general effect display and enjoy the specific character display. can. Furthermore, since the derivation timing of the specific character display is also maintained (when it originally overlaps with the general effect display), it is possible to suppress the situation where the specific character display is not derived at the timing when it should be derived. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the interest is lowered due to the occurrence of such a situation.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the jackpot state, the jackpot moving image is derived a plurality of times in the layer 1, one of which is regarded as a specific character moving image, and in the layer 2 displayed on the upper side (front side) of the layer 1. A moving image of a non-specific character is derived as an alternative effect display that overlaps with the specific character moving image (see S6507 and FIG. 56 in FIG. 53). Then, when the specific character video is derived, if the specific character video suddenly (unlike the prediction at the start of the jackpot state) and the notification display (specific payout number display, etc.) overlap. , The second layer is made visible (displayed), and the specific character moving image of the first layer is made invisible. On the other hand, when the specific character moving image does not overlap with the disallowed display, the second layer is hidden (non-display state), and the specific character moving image is visually displayed as scheduled.

That is, for example, if the derivation of the notification display that overlaps with the specific character video is determined after the setting of the specific character video is made, if the content of the specific character video is changed (redoed), the sub-control There is a concern that the control load of the device 262 may be significantly increased, or that the risk of occurrence of a predetermined defect (deviation, etc.) in the specific character moving image may increase. Further, for example, it may be difficult to delete the moving image data generated (generated) as a specific character moving image and replace it with another moving image data.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, when a specific character moving image is derived, it is set so that a non-specific character moving image can be derived in synchronization with the specific character moving image, and the specific character moving image and the notification display are suddenly displayed. In the case of duplication, when trying to change the derivation timing of the specific character video, basically the specific character video of layer 1 (processing related to) is left as it is, and the character video other than the specific character video of layer 2 is used. By simply switching to the display state, it is possible to avoid visually recognizing an aspect in which the specific character moving image and the notification display overlap.

Further, when the character moving image other than the specific layer 2 is displayed visually, it is made invisible because it overlaps with the jackpot moving image in the next order and overlaps with the character other than the specific layer 2. The same jackpot movie as the specific character movie is set to be derived in layer 2 (see <special case> in FIGS. 54 and 56). Then, when it is determined that the specific character moving image of the layer 2 does not overlap with the notification display, the layer 2 is displayed as a visible display. That is, by visibly deriving the same jackpot moving image as the specific character moving image that is refrained from being visually recognized in layer 2, the specific character moving image is changed to a later timing and derived.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific character moving image of the layer 2 overlaps with the notification display, the layer 2 is hidden again and overlaps with the next jackpot moving image so that the second layer is described. It is set so that the same jackpot movie as the specific character movie is derived.

As described above, in preparation for suddenly avoiding duplication between the specific character video and the notification display, a non-specific character video that overlaps with the specific character video is set (so that it is played at the same time as the specific character). ) Therefore, when the duplication is avoided, the mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 can be switched to a mode in which the specific character moving image is not visually recognized relatively smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the specific character display while suppressing an increase in the processing load related to the sudden timing change of the specific character moving image.

Further, the specific character moving image that overlaps with the notification display of the layer 1 can be completely invisible by duplicating the character moving image other than the specific layer 2. For this reason, for example, it is possible to derive a specific character moving image whose visibility has deteriorated because most of it overlaps the rear side of the notification display, and that the specific character moving image is being performed (visible). Although it can be confirmed (from some parts), it is possible to avoid a situation in which it cannot be seen well (it should have been seen but cannot be seen), which causes a decline in interest.

In addition, when the specific character video of layer 2 overlaps with the notification display, the specific character video is hidden, and the specific character video synchronized with the next jackpot video of layer 1 is derived in layer 2. Is set to. For this reason, if the timing of the derivation of the specific character display overlaps with the notification display even at the timing after the change, the effect display of the first layer (character moving image other than the specific character) should be utilized and the measures should be taken relatively smoothly. Can be done.

In addition, the time of the jackpot character moving image is uniform, and the start timing of the jackpot character moving image can be reliably grasped by the remaining time measurement timer. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily and accurately synchronize a character moving image other than the layer 2 specific character moving image or a specific character moving image with respect to a big hit moving image such as a layer 1 specific character moving image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display in which the specific character is displayed is comprehensively specified as the specific character display only by specifying the predetermined character as the specific character. Therefore, for a player who plays a game for the purpose of displaying a specific character, the setting for specifying the specific character display becomes simple, and the game can be started smoothly without stress. In addition, by simplifying the setting for specifying the specific character display, more players can enjoy the function of the specific character display. In addition, the function as a derivation period grasping means (combination storage area, etc.) for grasping the derivation schedule of the specific character enables the derivation period of the specific character display to be surely grasped. Can be reliably determined whether or not the above are duplicated.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific character display can be selected as the effect display pattern (it is regarded as one of the options), and when the non-specific character display is selected, the specific character display is selected in another layer. It is configured so that the specific character display is reproduced in synchronization with the non-character display (see "Layer 2" and "Layer 5" in FIGS. 48 and 56). That is, in the period in which the specific character display may be displayed (derivability period), if the non-specific character display is derived instead of the specific character display, only the generation of the image of the non-specific character display is sufficient. However, it is configured so that an image of a specific character display is also generated. Therefore, based on the determination after the start of the derivability period, the display mode visually recognized by the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched from the non-specific character display to the specific character display, or from the specific character display to the non-specific character display. Switching can be done relatively smoothly.

For example, when switching the contents of the display (video), in order to gain time to generate the video (at least the beginning part) of the switching destination, a still image (and one that is not very detailed and one that does not have very good image quality) is inserted. Therefore, the display can be smoothly switched without deteriorating the appearance without temporarily covering the decorative pattern display device 42 with a movable accessory. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the image generation of the effect display of a plurality of patterns proceeds at the same time, it is possible to appropriately change which of the effect displays of the plurality of patterns to be reproduced at the same time is visually recognized. Therefore, during the derivability period, the specific effect display can be displayed immediately at any time, the chances of the specific effect display being derived can be increased, and the switching between the specific effect display and the specific effect display can be made smooth. It is possible to increase the variation of the derivation of the specific effect display, and to flexibly switch between the specific effect display and the non-specific effect display depending on the success or failure of the predetermined condition after the start of the derivation possibility period. Furthermore, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the moving image are all determined at the start of the moving image, it is possible to derive a dramatic effect that changes in real time in connection with the display of a specific character. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 has a layer 1 as a main layer for reproducing a jackpot moving image and a main effect display of an effect variable display in a normal mode, and a back main layer for reproducing a moving image synchronized with the moving image of the layer 1. Layer 2 as a sublayer as a sublayer in which a moving image shorter than the moving image of layer 1 or a still image is played, and a back sublayer in which a moving image or still image synchronized with the moving image or still image of layer 4 is played. Layer 2 is arranged above layer 1 (player side), layer 4 is arranged above layer 2, and layer 5 is arranged above layer 4. .. Therefore, the amount of images generated in each layer can be reduced, and the burden of reproducing an image having a different pattern of the image reproduced in a predetermined layer in another layer can be reduced.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the specific character display overlaps with each other, or when the specific character display and the notification display overlap, the right to derive the specific character display can be stocked, and the player can use the player. It is configured so that the right to derive the stocked specific character display can be exercised in response to the input to the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the right to derive the specific character display can be stocked, and the enjoyment can be found in the new playability such as deriving the specific character display at one's own timing. Further, for example, when a specific character display is derived and an urgent display such as an error state notification is derived, the visual mode of the specific character display is inevitably hindered, but such a specific character display is inevitably hindered. By configuring the stock, the exercise of such stock can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the deterioration of the visibility of the specific character display due to the duplication of some display with respect to the specific character display, and to ensure the playability such as enjoying the specific character display. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player. In addition, since the stocked effect display is, of course, a specific character display, compared to a configuration in which, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked and various effects and the like attached to the stock are derived. By deriving (excessive) unnecessary production, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes uncomfortable.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the right to derive the specific character display is configured to be stockable, and the specific effect button 127 is operated in the state where the right to derive the specific character display is stocked. As a result, the right to derive a specific character display is exercised. That is, when there is stock and the character display other than the specific character is derived in layer 1 or layer 4, when the specific effect button 127 is operated, the specific character display is played back in layer 2 or layer 5 in a hidden manner. If so, it is possible to switch between the specific character display and the visible display.

As a result, the right to derive the specific character display can be stocked, and the enjoyment can be found in the new playability such as deriving the specific character display at one's own timing. Further, for example, when a specific character display is derived and an urgent display such as an error state notification is derived, the visual mode of the specific character display is inevitably hindered, but such a specific character display is inevitably hindered. By configuring the stock, the exercise of such stock can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the deterioration of the visibility of the specific character display due to the duplication of some display with respect to the specific character display, and to ensure the playability such as enjoying the specific character display. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player. In addition, since the stocked effect display is, of course, a specific character display, compared to a configuration in which, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked and various effects and the like attached to the stock are derived. By deriving (excessive) unnecessary production, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes uncomfortable.

In addition, even when the right to derive the specific character display in stock is exercised to derive the specific character display after the predetermined effect display in which the derivability period exists in the middle is started, the derivation is possible. Since the specific character display is originally scheduled to be reproduced together with the non-specific character display during the sex period, the stock right of the specific character display can be smoothly exercised. Furthermore, even after the derivability period has started, the specific character display corresponding to the derivability period can be immediately derived. For example, the specific character display can be derived even if the timing is slightly delayed. It is possible to avoid situations such as the moving image being interrupted or the image being distorted due to the inability to deal with the above or switching to the specific character display. Therefore, it is possible to fully exert the function of stocking the specific character display and exercising the stock right at the timing of the player.

In addition, since the specific character display corresponding to the non-specific character display derived when the specific effect button 127 is operated is derived, what kind of mode is exercised when the right to derive the specific character display is exercised at this timing. It is possible to add fun such as whether it is derived by. Therefore, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking a specific character display.

Further, in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 42, a stock point display 465 indicating that the right to derive the specific character display is stocked (holds the right) is displayed. Then, when 5 stock points are accumulated and the right to derive the specific character display is granted, the stock point display 465 for 5 points is changed to the display of the specific character (FIG. 42 (c)). reference). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the function such that the specific character display is stocked is not noticed, or the specific character display is not noticed that the specific character display is stocked. Furthermore, since the stock point display 465 itself is a display of a specific character (special stock display), it is possible to stock the specific character display and to have fun found in the mode of the special stock display, and as a result, It is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the stock points exceed 7 points, the stock right of the specific character display is forcibly exercised even if the player does not operate the specific effect button 127. There is. Therefore, for example, by automatically exercising the stock of the specific character display at an appropriate place (for example, in scenes 3 and 4 of the effect variation display) commensurate with the consumption of the stock, the specific character is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the right to derive the display is only stocked but the right is not exercised, and the stock function for enjoying the specific character display is not utilized well. Furthermore, when the stock is consumed, the special stock display (the display in which the stock point display 465 indicating the stock point is changed to the mode of a specific character) disappears, so it is expected that the stock will not be consumed due to the feeling that it is regrettable to consume it. If it is configured to be consumed automatically, the player can consume the stock without hesitation, and the special stock display will continue to be displayed to prevent the situation where the appreciation is lost. Can increase the value of special stock labeling.

In the present embodiment, the look-ahead hold icon 463 suggesting the content of the effect variation display may be derived as the hold icon 461. As a result, the look-ahead hold icon 463 is convenient for using stock, such as exercising the right to derive a specific character display in stock in a situation where a big hit state can be expected to occur. Etc. can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect handle 401 whose outer shape can be changed and which can be displaced is provided, and various information can be transmitted to the player by tactile sensation. Therefore, the range of production can be expanded. In particular, since information can be transmitted without changing the display mode and the voice mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect related to the specific character display (for example, a cross) without disturbing the specific character display and the voice associated therewith. It is possible to perform an effect of selecting the correct answer with a button (such as notifying the correct choice by the operation of the effect handle 401), or to convey information unrelated to the specific character display to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the effectability and the convenience of transmitting information to the player.

For example, in the above embodiment, the effect that the player selects one of the options with the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 may be derived, and further, in the effect, the correct answer option by the operation of the effect handle 401 may be derived. May be suggested. In this way, in a state where input by the input operation means is possible (a state in which the input is uncertain), the player is surprised, delighted, and input by being taught the guideline of the input. While expecting the results of the above to be taught, a feeling of exhilaration can be obtained during that time. As a result, it is possible to derive a production that can improve the interest.

Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, for example, the effect handle 401 vibrates when the start winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are hit during the derivation of the specific character display. When the guidance for the effect handle 401 to vibrate in response to the entry of the ball while the specific character is being displayed is derived, or the function of the vibration is stopped, it is specified. Various types of ball entry information can be transmitted to the player without disturbing the visual mode of the character display and the voice mode associated therewith. As a result, the specific character display can be further enjoyed.

Further, the effect handle 401 is provided at a substantially symmetrical position of the handle 18 for the firing operation. Therefore, the hand (left hand) opposite to the hand (right hand) that operates the handle 18 can be touched for a relatively long time without getting tired. Therefore, while the specific character display is derived, the effect handle 401 can be continuously touched relatively easily, and the function of the effect handle 401 can be fully utilized.

Further, in the present embodiment, the dedicated parts 411 can be attached to the parts attaching portion and the effect handle 401 as the mode changing means. The dedicated parts 411 are brought in by the player or rented at the game hall, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by attaching the dedicated parts 411 to the effect handle 401. Therefore, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 can be made to the player's preference in the environment in which the game is played, as if coordinating one's own room, and the player can play the game comfortably. Further, even when the dedicated parts 411 are installed in advance as a service in the game hall, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed individually. In addition, it is difficult to attach the pachinko machine 10 itself (it gets in the way during transportation, it is fragile, etc.), and it is possible to attach something that protrudes forward of the front frame 14 to the pachinko machine 10, improving the design and the like. Can be planned.

Further, the mode of the dedicated part 411 attached to the effect handle 401 can be changed. That is, the effect handle 401 of the present embodiment is made of a soft resin that covers the first slide member 402, the second slide member 403, and the first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 that project forward from the front frame 14. The first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 can be displaced back and forth, respectively, and can be tilted up and down and left and right as a whole. In this way, when the effect handle 401 is displaced or deformed (outer shape changes), the special part 411 attached so as to cover the effect handle 401 is also displaced or deformed (outer shape). Will change). Therefore, it is possible to operate the dedicated part 411 attached to the pachinko machine 10 (provide a movable accessory for directing that has never existed before), and the dedicated part 411 does not become a mere figurine but performs as a decoration. It can be used as a part of the production, etc., and the interest in the dedicated parts 411 and, by extension, the pachinko machine 10 can be further enhanced. Further, when the player touches the dedicated part 411, it is possible to perform an effect or suggestion using a change in the feel or the like, and it is possible to further improve the effect or the game.

As a result, by attaching the special parts 411 selected by the player to the pachinko machine 10 and adjusting the appearance to his own hobbies and tastes, the interest and attachment to the pachinko machine 10 can be increased more positively. It is possible to suppress getting bored relatively early and improve the repeat rate to the pachinko machine 10. The effect handle 401 can change the pressure applied from the effect handle 401 to the special part 411 by displace the first slide member 402, whereby the feel (hardness, tension) of the special part 411 can be changed. It is possible to provide a novel effect such that the feeling) changes (when the first slide member 402 is located in the front, the dedicated part 411 feels harder than when it is located in the rear).

Further, an attachment detecting means (not shown) that can distinguish between a state in which the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401 and a state in which the dedicated part 411 is not attached is provided. Therefore, for example, when the game hall side prepares the special part 411 and rents it to the player, the special part 411 is removed from the mounted state, so that the pachinko machine 10 can return the special part 411. Derivation of announcements to be requested, etc., and configuration so that the corresponding signal is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 so that those involved in the game hall can know that the dedicated part 411 has been removed. This makes it possible to suppress a situation in which the dedicated parts 411 are taken away by the player without permission.

Further, for example, when the player prepares the dedicated parts 411 and the player performs an operation to end the game (for example, when an operation to return the game value storage medium capable of storing the game value is performed). Or, when an operation is performed to pay out the digitized and memorized game value (game ball) as the actual game value, etc.), be careful not to forget the special part 411 (the special part 411 is. It is possible to derive the display and sound that teach that it is attached).

In addition, in the present embodiment, a mounting lamp 417 (see FIG. 1) is provided as a part reaction unit that emits light when the dedicated part 411 is mounted on the effect handle 401. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the dedicated part 411 is properly attached. It should be noted that a movable accessory, a light emitting means, or the like as a part reaction unit whose mode changes in conjunction with the attachment of the dedicated part 411 to the effect handle 401 may be provided. In this case, the interest in attaching the dedicated part 411 can be further increased.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(A; permission display, disapproval display, notification display) The permission display and disapproval display settings (regulations) are made for each model. Basically, the "permission display" is a specific character display. It is a display that does not cover (subject), almost does not cover, and even if it does, the specific character display can be seen through. The display may be such that the corresponding part (whole or part) of the specific character display cannot be seen.

In addition, among the disapproval displays, the "notification display" can also be set for each model. For example, the instruction that the right such as the jackpot state has been acquired, the instruction that the jackpot state is started, and the jackpot state can be set. Examples include teaching that the game has ended, teaching that the variable display has ended, and teaching the number of game values (game balls, etc.) paid out to the player. Further, it may be said that "there is a notification display which is a permission display". That is, for example, when there is a super-specific character display whose derivation timing cannot be changed as one type of specific character display, and it is determined that the super-specific character display and the notification display overlap, the notification display is permitted. It may be configured to be changed so as to be displayed. In addition, as a notification display, the instruction that the provision / transition of the predetermined game state was decided, and the conditions set as the delimiter (small goal) in advancing the game were achieved (in addition to the total number of payouts). There are teachings such as winning the jackpot state five times without going through the normal mode, deriving a premium effect, etc.), teaching that an error state has occurred, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that the specific character display and the disallowed display overlap, basically, one of the timings is changed, but the specific character display is configured. And both may be configured to change the derivation timing of the disapproval indication (to make both flexible). In the effect variation display, it is desirable not to move the disapproval display derived to the scene 1 to the scenes 2 to 4 (movement in the scene 1 or cancellation of the derivation). That is, in general, in scene 1, the effect display (for example, button effect) is such that a reach state may occur, but in the effect display (for example, button effect) in scenes 2 to 4, a jackpot state occurs. Since it is a production display that may be (or it may be a production display that has already been almost confirmed to be off and only the remaining time is exhausted), the production display of scene 1 will be changed to a later scene. If it is moved, there is a concern that the production display will look strange and not suitable for the scene. Therefore, it is desirable not to move from the previous scene to the later scene. Further, it is desirable that the display explaining the predetermined effect or the like is displayed as a permission display at that time so as not to interfere with other displays.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, when the specific character video and the disapproval display prioritized over the specific character video overlap after the start of the jackpot state (big hit round), the final round in particular. If there is no time left to change the derivation timing of the specific character video and derive it before the end of, the specific character video should be invisible (stopped) and the specific character video should be performed. During a certain period, another jackpot video (a jackpot video other than the specific character video) may be derived, and a specific effect may be performed to change the disallowed display to a mode treated as a specific character display (for example, the figure). The V-winning challenge effect in layer 3 of 56 is hidden, and the V-winning challenge effect by character C in layer 2 is displayed visually). In this case, even when there is no time to change the derivation timing of the specific character moving image, the specific character display (specific effect related to the specific character moving image) can be visually recognized. Therefore, by overlapping the specific character video and the disapproval display (first disapproval display) that has priority over the specific character video, the specific character video cannot be derived, and the specific character video (specific character display). It is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who was looking forward to the game is less interested in it.

(B; Interruption of specific character display due to interruption of notification display) Further, "In the state where the specific character display is derived, when the notification display which is the unauthorized display is derived, the specific character display is interrupted. The notification display is derived, and the specific character display is interrupted after the notification display ends, or is returned before the interruption (from a timing slightly before the interruption timing). Alternatively, it may be restarted (from the beginning of the specific character display). " In the above embodiment, when the V winning challenge effect and the probabilistic promotion challenge effect are derived during the playback of the specific character video, the jackpot video is not visible (the character video other than the specification of the second layer is visually recognized). Instead, a specific character moving image that cannot be visually recognized is set as the next jackpot moving image (see step S4734).

That is, when the derivation of the specific character display is determined but not yet derived, it is possible to change the derivation timing of the entire specific character display, but the notification display of the unauthorized display is displayed in the middle of the specific character display. Is derived and the notification display is prioritized, the specific character display is inevitably interrupted. Even in such a case, by suspending and resuming as described above, the specific character display can be enjoyed as much as possible. In addition, a guidance display for instructing the restart of the interrupted specific character display, a guidance display for displaying the time until the interrupted specific character display is restarted (countdown), and the like may be derived so as to be derivable. In this case, you can be relieved that the specific character display will be restarted (knowing in advance), or you can suppress the situation where you miss the beginning part without noticing that the specific character display has been restarted. Can be done.

(C; Specific character voice) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the specific character voice (specific effect voice) derived together with the specific character display may be configured to be treated in the same manner as the specific character display. .. That is, when it is determined that a voice that overlaps at least a part of the derivation period of the specific character voice is an "unauthorized voice", the specific character voice and the unauthorized voice are prevented from overlapping. , The derivation timing of at least one of the unauthorized voices may be changed. Further, the input to the pachinko machine 10 by the player for specifying the specific character voice is not particularly limited, but for example, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to derive the specific character display setting screen. , A specific character display can be set according to the operation of the effect button 125 provided to be operable by the player and the cross button 126, or between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via a mobile communication terminal. By entering the password issued by the server into the pachinko machine 10 when a mobile-linked game in which data is exchanged is performed in, the memory of the specific character display of the previous game will be reflected in this game. It may be configured.

(D; Stock Function) In the above embodiment, the right to derive the specific character display is stocked by overlapping the specific character displays, but the stock conditions and the like are particularly limited. is not it. For example, it is possible to derive a mini-game in which stock points are added when it succeeds, stock points are added every time a predetermined number of fluctuation displays and jackpot states are performed, and a predetermined lottery at the start of production fluctuation display. Stock points may be added based on (corresponding to a predetermined effect display to be derived). Further, for example, when the specific character display overlaps with the notification display, the stock may be implemented instead of shifting the derivation timing of the specific character display. Further, when the specific character display overlaps with each other, the stock may not be executed, but the derivation timing of the specific character display may be changed. In addition, when the specific character displays overlap, the specific character display that is difficult to see in the lower layer is displayed as it is, but the back channel display is configured to hide the display mode. You may. It is also possible to omit the stock function.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, after the start of the jackpot state (big hit round), the specific character video and the disapproval display prioritized over the specific character video overlap, and the specific character video is derived. If the timing is changed later and there is no time left to derive the specific character video before the end of the final round, the specific character display will be stocked and the specific character will be displayed. During the period when the moving image is supposed to be performed, another big hit moving image (a big hit moving image other than the specific character moving image) and the stock effect display as the specific effect may be derived.

(E; Effect display in probabilistic mode) In the above embodiment, when a specific character movie in which a specific character appears in the background video of layer 1 is derived, the effect display of layer 2 is hidden (e; However, when the effect display of layer 2 is a specific character display, the effect display is regarded as a visible display), and the sub effect display of layer 4 is configured to be canceled, but it is derived in duplicate. At the same time, stock points may be added.

Further, the effect display (main effect display) started in the visible display on the layer 2 is configured to be visually displayed until the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern even if the specific character moving image is derived in the middle. May be good. That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the main effect display, which is a moving image with a story, must be erased in the middle (the moving image with a story is not completed), which makes it necessary to derive a strange display.

Further, when a specific character moving image is derived from the background moving image of layer 1, the variation display of the decorative pattern of layer 3 is small and mini-displayed, but the decorative pattern is displayed thinly (semi-transparent). It may be displayed without changing the display mode, or the variable display of the decorative pattern may be made invisible. However, the information on the stop display of the decorative symbol is important for the player, and further, in order to allow the player to enjoy the specific character video, the decorative symbol should be variablely displayed so as not to interfere with the visual mode of the specific character display so much. Is desirable.

It should be noted that, in the variable display of the pattern in which the effect display of the layer 2 is not derived in the probability variation mode, the probability that the parts effect is performed due to the mode change of the effect handle 401 may be increased. In this case, the effect can be enhanced without changing the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42.

(F; character introduction, winning character moving image) In the above embodiment, the character introduction can be derived only in the first round of "15RS" in the jackpot state, but it may be derived in other rounds. It may be configured so that it may be derived even in other types of jackpot states. Further, the character introduction may be performed a plurality of times during one big hit state. However, it is desirable that the character introduction corresponding to the character (winning character) appearing in the variable display (super reach effect) in the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the occurrence of the jackpot state is taught is included, and further, such character introduction It is desirable that this is performed at a timing that is not far from the fluctuation display as much as possible. It is also possible to omit the character introduction in the jackpot state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot video of the winning character (winning character video) is specially treated so as to be derived as a jackpot video that does not partially overlap with the character introduction after the character introduction (first round) is completed. (It is processed so that it does not overlap with the disapproval display as well as the specific effect display), but even if it is configured to be set appropriately without distinguishing the winning character video from other jackpot videos good. However, as in the above embodiment, by connecting and deriving the variable display of the decorative pattern, the character introduction, and the winning character moving image, the impression from the teaching of the jackpot state to the start, in particular, appears in any of them. The impression of the character can be strengthened (improved), and as a result, the motivation for playing can be improved.

(G; Display of specific payout number) In the above embodiment, in the state from the occurrence of the jackpot state to the transition to the normal mode (continuous chan state), the game is paid out based on the entry into the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. The number of balls (total number of payouts) is counted, the number is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and every time the total number of payouts increases by about 2500, a specific payout that teaches that the total number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number is given. Although the numerical display is displayed in a large scale at the center of the decorative symbol display device 42, the number display is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, not only the number of game balls paid out based on the winning balls to the variable winning devices 32a and 32b during the jackpot state, but also to other winning devices (starting winning devices 33a, 33b, general winning device 31, etc.). The number of game balls paid out based on the number of balls entered may be counted, or the number of game balls paid out based on the number of balls paid out based on the number of balls entered into the winning device in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode may be counted. ..

Further, the specific payout number display may be derived in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode. In addition, the total payout count may be configured to decrease (subtract the number of fired game balls) as well as increase. Further, for example, in a winning / failing lottery performed based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b, a "small hit" may be won, and if the small hit is won, the first variable winning device 32a or the first variable winning device 32a or , Either of the second variable winning device 32b may be opened for a short time (so that the specific ball 145 of the second variable winning device 32b is not allowed to enter the ball). It is also possible to omit the derivation function of the specific payout number display.

In addition, although the prediction of the specific payout number display is configured to be limited to one jackpot round, it is predicted that the specific payout number display can be derived in a plurality of consecutive jackpot rounds, and the jackpot round is avoided. It may be configured so that a specific character moving image or the like is set. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the prediction of the specific payout number display is deviated and it becomes necessary to suddenly shift the derivation timing of the specific character moving image.

(H; Example of mode when the timing of the duplication discrimination process and the specific character display and the notification display overlap) In the above embodiment, at the start of the jackpot state and at the start of the jackpot moving image after the start of the jackpot state ( (Including the start of the specific character video) and the start of each disallowed display, the overlap between the specific character display (specific character video) and the disallowed display is determined, and the settings are set so that the duplication is avoided. Although it is configured to be performed, for example, the process for avoiding duplication may be performed only at the start of the jackpot state, or the process for avoiding duplication may be performed only at the start of the specific character display and the start of the unauthorized display. You may perform the processing for this.

Further, in the above embodiment, when it is determined that the notification display and the specific character display overlap at the start of the notification display or the specific character display, the timing of deriving the specific character display is changed (in a hurry). The notification display may be configured to be set in a mode corresponding to the specific character display (a specific character appears in the notification display, the voice corresponding to the notification display is that of the specific character, etc.). In this case, the notification display becomes a mode corresponding to the specific character display, the chance of visually recognizing the specific character display increases, and the specific character display, which is the notification display, is originally displayed, although it is different from the original specific character display mode. It can be enjoyed at the timing, and the image of the duplication can be improved.

Further, when the notification display or the specific character display is determined to overlap at the start of the notification display or the specific character display, and the timing of deriving the specific character display is changed (in a hurry), the notification display is specified. It may be configured so as to indicate that the derivation timing of the character display has been changed (the specific character display is displayed later). In this case, it is possible to reassure the player by notifying the player that the specific character display will be derived later, rather than losing the opportunity to derive the specific character display.

In the jackpot state of the above embodiment, the disapproval effect is performed at least once corresponding to the predetermined round (at least the V winning challenge effect or the probability change promotion challenge effect is performed) (non-performing). There may be a jackpot state in which a special game state with a permission display) is not performed.

(I; Target of specific character display, specific method) In the above embodiment, the specific character display in which the character selected by the player appears is specified as the specific effect display to be displayed with priority over other effect displays. Although it is configured, the target to be displayed as a specific effect is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, by selecting a predetermined character, the character display in which the character appears is comprehensively specified as a specific character display, but such a function may be omitted. However, it may be configured so that it can be set individually (for example, character A in the jackpot state, character B in the last scene, etc.).

Further, for example, when a predetermined effect display is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, a predetermined operation input (specific input operation) is performed by the specific effect button 127, so that the decorative symbol display device 42 is derived. The predetermined effect display may be configured to be identifiable as a specific effect display. For example, by operating the specific effect button 127 during the jackpot state, the jackpot video being played (information on the jackpot video stored in the corresponding storage area of the combination storage area) is specified as the specific effect display. It may be configured to be (applied from the next jackpot state). Further, when the specific effect button 127 is operated, the effect display being displayed is confirmed and the effect display is specified as the specific effect display. However, when a plurality of effect displays are duplicated, the specific effect is specified. When the button 127 is operated, a screen for selecting and inputting which of them is to be displayed as a specific effect display can be displayed later, and the guidance may be displayed. Good (if there is no selection input operation, everything is specified as a specific effect display for the time being).

By adopting the above configuration, it is possible to specify the effect display that the player likes as a specific effect display. Therefore, it is possible to respond to more detailed needs, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the game. For example, if a player likes a predetermined character other than a character that can be comprehensively specified as a specific character and wants to use the effect display from which the predetermined character is derived as the specific effect display, the player can display the specific effect by himself / herself. It can be specified one by one. In addition, it is possible to actually see the information (reach effect pattern in which each character appears, character details, etc.) that could not be understood only on the character selection screen, and immediately identify the specific character display (appearance). You don't have to memorize the characters, wait for the variable display to be interrupted, display the character selection screen, check which character on the character introduction screen matches the character that appeared earlier, and select and set it. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience and the like.

It should be noted that the specific effect information storage means is provided with the specific effect information storage means for storing the information of the predetermined effect display specified as the specific effect display by performing the predetermined operation by the specific effect button 127, and the operation is performed in the specific effect information storage means. The effect pattern was derived from the (all) effect patterns that were derived when the effect was performed (since we do not know which one is in a state where the effects are duplicated, we ask the player to select it later). Time from (In the case of pressing once, the specified time from the operation (If pressed again before the specified time elapses, it looks like it will be extended, and from there again the specified time; there is an upper limit of the extension) Is a specific effect display, and in the case of a long press, the specific effect display is displayed while the operation is being performed).

Furthermore, if the specific effect display is set shortly before the operation, it is easy to set the target effect display as the specific effect display from the beginning. In addition, by checking the effect pattern, which character is derived after ○ seconds from the start. If it is configured so that information such as a character can be acquired, it becomes possible to pinpoint the derivation start timing to the derivation end timing of the character that has appeared most recently. That is, in the effect variation display of the above embodiment, since the effect is set corresponding to the scene, the information of the effect display of the scene in which the specific effect button 127 is operated is stored. Further, for example, when a predetermined character and a predetermined effect display have a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the predetermined character from the beginning to the end of the display of the predetermined effect (for example, scene 4). Is basically continued to be derived, so that the entire predetermined effect display is specified as the specific effect display by performing a predetermined operation by the specific effect button during the predetermined effect. You may.

It should be noted that the currently displayed effect display can be grasped (for example, the character C flag and the character Z flag are set to be on when the character C and the character Z are displayed), and the specific effect button is set. The effect display related to the effect display displayed when the predetermined operation according to 127 is performed may be specified as the specific effect display. In addition, it is possible to grasp the display effect displayed in more detail (for example, the reach of a predetermined character from which the mini character is derived and the dialogue display C-21 of the dialogue effect display of the character C is derived. It may be possible to grasp that the pattern B is derived, the premium reach is derived, and the like). In addition, even if the effect variable display or the specific character display while the jackpot state is in progress can be individually set, the specific character display can be specified at the player's timing, or comprehensively. It is desirable to configure it so that it also has a configuration that can be specified. In this case, if you want to change a specific character, but you cannot do it at the player's timing, or you have to wait for the target effect to be derived (even if it is derived, if you forget the setting, you will have to wait again. ) Can be avoided.

In addition, for example, the information stored in the specific effect information storage means may be configured to be erased in order from the oldest one, or all the information is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. When erasing all the information stored in the specific effect information storage means, the power is turned on while operating the erasing operation means (RAM erase switch 323). It may be that. In addition, when a mobile-linked game is being played, information that can be output from the gaming machine is received by the mobile communication terminal at the end of the game, and such information is stored in the server, and at the start of the next game, up to the previous time. By inputting information including at least a part of the information (a password is issued to the server and the password) into the pachinko machine 10, the settings related to the specific effect display of the previous game may be inherited.

It should be noted that the effect display while the specific effect button 127 is being input may be configured to be specified as the specific effect display, or twice within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) of the specific effect button 127. By detecting the above operation, the specific effect display may be specified to be executed, or the setting for enabling the individual setting of the specific effect display based on the operation of the specific effect button 127 may be performed. What is being done may be a condition for the specific input operation. That is, in order to suppress that the effect display that was performed when the specific effect button 127 is operated unintentionally is placed as the specific effect, the specific effect button 127 can be operated once to perform the specific effect. It is desirable to configure it so that display identification is not performed.

In addition, in order to reduce the trouble of erasing the specific contents of the previous player, the previous player can be operated by the player, based on the operation of terminating the mobile interlocking game, or after a certain period of time. Information that has been specified and stored as a specific effect display may be configured to be erasable at once. Further, when there is stock of the specific effect display (for example, when the stock point is 5 points or more according to the above embodiment), the specific input operation may not be performed.

The target of the specific effect display is not limited to the character, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, a specific effect display may be set in association with a predetermined advance notice effect or a predetermined reach effect. Further, if there are a plurality of buttons (effect button 125, specific effect button 127) that can be operated by the player, it becomes difficult to know which one should be operated. It may be configured so that the visual mode of the button or its vicinity changes depending on the state and the operation invalid state in which the reaction operation does not occur even if the operation is performed. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means with a built-in button may be configured to change, or the button may be configured so as to be retractable and displaceable, and the amount of protrusion becomes large when the operation is enabled, or the mounted portion is mounted when the operation is disabled. It may be configured to be immersed in (the upper surface of the upper plate 19). Further, a cap means capable of changing the state between the open state in which the button can be operated and the closed state in which the button cannot be operated may be provided.

In addition, for example, when a plurality of story effects are set corresponding to each character and premium reach is selected, the story effects of the characters specified as specific characters are derived in order. May be good. In this case, if a predetermined story production is overlooked, the story production must be completed by the time it is visually recognized next time. For this reason, by providing a configuration in which the story production (specific character production) and the other production display (disapproval display) are avoided from overlapping, the visual mode of the story production is hindered by the other production display, etc. The action and effect that can suppress the situation will be more prominent.

(J; Character) In the decorative symbol display device 42 of the above embodiment, a character may appear in addition to the character targeted by the specific character as the specific image object. In addition, by operating the specific effect button 127, the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 can be saved, the image can be applied to the decorative symbol image, or the character introduction image can be derived during the character introduction period. It may be configured so that it can be selected instead of the image. Further, when the special character video is specified by operating the specific effect button 127 during the playback of the jackpot video, the decorative symbol that is not the target of the specific character is stopped and displayed, and the occurrence of the jackpot state is taught. In addition, a special character moving image may be derived as a winning character moving image. In this case, in a configuration in which a large number of characters appear, a player who wants to set a character other than the specific character as a specific character while suppressing an increase in capacity and complexity of processing, as compared with a case where all characters are designated as specific characters. The character can be treated as much as possible as a specific character by itself, and can be configured to obtain a certain degree of satisfaction.

When the player registers the effect display to be photographed in advance, when the corresponding effect display is actually derived, a predetermined guide (for example, a shutter chance or the like is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 42, or the effect is produced. The handle 401 may be vibrated).

(K; Ranking of specific character display) Further, in the above embodiment, the priority is ranked among the specific character displays, and the rank of the specific character display and the other types of general effect display are used. Depending on the combination, it may be configured to change whether the general effect display is determined to be a permission display in which duplication with the specific character display is permitted or a non-permission display. In this case, among the specific character displays, those with high derivation frequency and those displayed small are specified with lower priority than those with low derivation frequency and large display. In a configuration in which a specific character display is comprehensively specified by setting a character, it is possible to improve the effect balance and the like.

Further, when a mobile interlocking game in which data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and the server via a mobile communication terminal is performed, the general effect display is determined to be either a permitted display or a non-permitted display. The standard may be changed according to the amount of game played by the player, or may be configured so that the player can set the standard. For example, when the player's game amount is small, as a specific character display, a cut-in effect that is only temporarily derived, a display that is only derived in a small area of the decorative pattern display device 42, and a game explanation. Although it is displayed in duplicate with the display of, if the amount of the game is large, the game commentary may not be displayed. In addition, the specific character is only derived small at the same time as many other characters, or only the name is displayed, so that the specific character is almost inconspicuous, the relationship with the specific character is low, and so on. The display may not be specified as a specific effect display. In addition, it may be configured so that the player can (to some extent) rank the priority of a particular character.

In addition, "character trajectory information (object image information) that makes it possible to specify the display position of the specific character that is displaced with the progress of the effect variation display or the jackpot moving image is stored in advance in response to the character that can be set as the specific character. It may be said that the character orbit information storage area (object orbit information storage means) is provided. In this case, for example, it is possible to perform an effect display such as making a large copy of a specific character when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(L; Non-setting of specific character) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is not reset only when the power is turned off and on (the specific character at the time of power off is inherited as a specific character even after the power is turned on, and the RAM. It is reset by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while operating the erase switch 323, and in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined character (character C in the above example) is set as a specific character. However, the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the specific character may be reset only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on, or in the initialization process. The specific character set when setting the specific character is not particularly limited, and may be determined at random (lottery), for example.

Further, the player may be configured to not specify a specific character by operating the effect button 125, the cross button 126, or the like. Further, when the setting is made, it may be configured so as not to discriminate the duplication of the specific character display. When this configuration is adopted, it is possible to meet the demands of the player who wants to confuse the effect display related to the specific character display, or to see the effect display evenly (for any character). In addition, even if there is a desire to set a specific character display, it is possible to respond to a request such as first looking at various effect displays that can be specified as a specific character display and then setting a specific character display (mobile interlocking). When playing a game, the game may automatically proceed in such a flow). When adopting this configuration, the decorative symbols corresponding to the specific characters may not be provided individually, or the characters corresponding to the "7" symbol may be set randomly or fixedly. It may be configured as.

(M; Notice of derivation of specific effect display) In the above embodiment, a specific effect notice effect that teaches that the specific character display is derived when at least the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed can be derived. You may. In this case, even if the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed and the specific character display is derived at an irregular timing, the specific character display derived at the changed timing can be reliably visually recognized. can. Further, for example, the configuration in which the specific effect advance notice effect is performed only when the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed, or the mode is different depending on the case where the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed and the other cases. When adopting the configuration, it can be confirmed that the derivation timing is changed to the specific character display.

In addition, by using the function that can grasp in advance that the specific character display is derived, regardless of whether or not the derivation timing is changed (even if the derivation timing of the specific character display is not changed). , When the specific effect notice effect is derived in advance for all the specific character displays, even if the eyes are taken away from the effect character means, if the eyes are moved to the effect character means based on the specific effect notice effect, the specific effect display is displayed. You can definitely enjoy it from the beginning.

It should be noted that the player may be configured to be able to set whether or not to allow the derivation of the specific effect notice effect. Further, when there is no difference in the meaning of deriving the specific character display between the case where the derivation timing is changed and the case where the derivation timing is not changed, the specific effect advance notice effect is, for example, the derivation timing. By deriving only when it is changed, the player has a special expectation for the specific effect notice effect (with a specific character display) (for example, the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot state is special). In order to avoid a situation such as (it may be misunderstood that it is expensive), it may be configured so that it is derived even if it corresponds to a specific character display in which the derivation timing is not changed.

(N; Guidance that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed) The specific timing change display that teaches that the derivation timing of the specific character display has been changed may be configured to be derivable. In this case, it can be grasped that the derivation timing of the specific character display has been changed. Note that the specific timing change display is configured to be derived when the specific character display whose derivation timing is changed is derived when it is derived before the original derivation timing, and is derived after the original derivation timing. If so, it may be configured to be derived at the original derivation timing. In this case, it is possible to grasp that the specific character display is derived early and that the specific character display is reserved later.

(O; Measures when the specific character display is not derived for a certain period of time) In the above embodiment, the specific character display may be configured to be derived based on the fact that the specific character display is not derived for a specified period. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the user is looking forward to the display of a specific character but is not derived too much, resulting in a decrease in interest.

The specified period is defined as one variation (one game) from the start to the end of the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b that teach the result of the winning / losing lottery that determines whether or not to generate the jackpot state. There are cases where the specified number of times has been performed, and cases where the jackpot state (of a predetermined type) has been performed a specified number of times. That is, for example, a counter capable of counting the number of fluctuation displays (number of fluctuations) for which the specific character display has not been derived is provided, 1 is added according to the start of fluctuation, and the counter is reset based on the derivation of the specific character display. For example, if it is determined whether or not the number of times exceeds 100 times and an affirmative determination is made, the stock points are added by 5, or the effect pattern in which the specific character display is derived in the scenes 3 and 4 is The stock point may be added by 1 when the number of fluctuations selected or not derived from the specific character display is 20 consecutive times.

Further, in the above embodiment, the stock point may be subtracted by 1 when the specific character display is derived. Further, the specific character display that is derived because the specific character display has not been derived for a certain period of time may be a rare pattern or a specific character display of a dedicated pattern. In addition, the points may be returned to the initial values when the specific character display is derived (derivation is set), or the points may be reduced by the amount used. Of course, instead of increasing the stock points, the derivation of the specific character display may be set.

(P; Sub-specific effect display that is intentionally overlapped with the specific character display) In the above embodiment, the predetermined effect display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed in response to the input by the operation of the player's effect button 125 and the cross button 126. It may be configured to be identifiable as a sub-specific effect display (the function of specifying the sub-specific effect display of the sub control device 262 corresponds to the sub-specific effect display specifying means). The effect display specified as the sub-specific effect display (sub-specific character display) is configured to increase the possibility of being derived in duplicate with the specific effect display (specific character display) as compared with other effect displays. You may. For example, on the character selection screen, when a specific character, a rival character, and a good friend character are selected, "Kakekko production" in which the specific character appears is selected, and a long version of Super Reach is selected, 80. A pattern in which rival characters compete to the end is selected with a probability of% to 90% (for example, in the short version, it is about 15%, which is the same as the selection ratio of other characters), and "two-person tripod production" in which a specific character appears is selected. , When the long version of Super Reach is selected, there is an 80% to 90% chance that a pattern in which a good friend character becomes a partner is selected (for example, about 30% to 40% in the short version). May be good. In this case, by setting the display of the sub-specific character so that it is easy to overlap with the display of the specific character, the effect (fate, etc.) becomes deeper between the specific character and the sub-specific character. (Rival production, good friend production, etc.) can be set by the player, and the enjoyment can be further increased.

Further, as a sub-effect, the sub-specific character display may be easier to select than a non-specified character. For example, in the cut-in production of scene 4 with variable display, which is a big hit, the appearance of a specific character is 40%, the appearance of a rival character is 30%, the appearance of a good friend character is 20%, and the appearance of other characters is 10%. , In the cut-in production of scene 4 with variable display that is out of place, the appearance of a specific character is 20%, the appearance of a rival character is 20%, the appearance of a good friend character is 20%, the appearance of other characters is 40% (Others) It may be set to about 7% per character).

In addition, when the sub-specific character display overlaps with the specific character display (the cut-in display of the sub-specific character supporting the specific character (more likely to be selected than the cut-in effect of other characters) is derived). Etc.), the process of stocking the specific character display may be performed in the same manner as the specific character display. However, even if the sub-specific character is displayed independently (when the specific character display is not displayed), the control that the duplication with the unauthorized display is determined and the duplication is avoided as much as possible as in the specific character display. Is not done.

(Q; Recording during specific character production) In the above embodiment, the sub-control device 262 provides a progress information storage means capable of storing information related to the progress of the game performed at least in a state where the specific character display is derived. In addition, after the specific character is displayed, the information stored in the progress information storage means may be configured to be viewable by the decorative symbol display device 42. In this case, the event that occurred during the display of the specific character can be confirmed later. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the specific character display without worrying about it. In addition, for example, the specific character display is set from the beginning to the end of the jackpot state of a specific type, and the display that overlaps with the specific character display in the special character state is a permission display that allows duplication with the specific character display ( Even if it is a notification display, it is considered to be a mode that does not hinder visibility so much), or it is displayed as a specific character, automatically after the end of the jackpot state, or from the menu screen etc. after the end of the jackpot state, information during the jackpot state, For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, it may be configured so that a display that can obtain information such as whether the game ball has entered the upper limit in each round or the time required for digestion in each round can be derived.

(R; Layer of Decorative Design Display Device) In the above embodiment, the decorative design display device 42 is provided with five layers, but the number of layers particularly determines which display is to be derived in which layer. It is not limited and can be set for each model. For example, different cut-in effects are played back on three layers at the same time, and depending on the operation of the effect button 125 and the jackpot expectation, the layers to be made visible are replaced on the way, and finally which layer's cut-in effect is produced. It may be configured to perform an effect such as whether or not it has been confirmed.

Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, a part of the non-specific character display is reproduced in a layer lower than the layer in which the non-specific character display is reproduced in synchronization with the non-specific character display. Even if it is possible to perform clipping and masking that make the specific character display visible, and the effect of deriving display modes such as fade-in and fade-out that sandwich a state in which the specific character display overlaps with the non-specific character display and looks faint. good.

(S; Stock of specific character display, condition for exercising stock right) In the above embodiment, the right to derive the specific character display is stocked once when the stock point is 5 points. It is not limited, and for example, one point may be used as one stock. Further, the number that can be stocked is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. Further, the opportunity for accumulating stock points can be appropriately set for each model.

Further, even if the specific effect button 127 is operated with stock, if it is determined that the derived specific character display overlaps with the notification display, the stock right may not be exercised. .. In this case, the specific character display by exercising the stock right can be reliably visually recognized without overlapping with the notification display. Further, the notification means can be surely recognized by the player. It is possible to use the stock to produce the parts with the effect handle 401, but it is preferable not to use the stock to ensure that the notification information on the notification display is confirmed.

Further, in the above embodiment, a rare specific effect display may be provided which is derived only when the right of the stock of the specific character display is exercised, or which is more likely to be derived. In this case, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking a specific character display. In addition, the specific character display derived by exercising the stock has plus alpha information (suggestions related to the winning / failing lottery, etc., its reliability is enhanced, or its reliability is enhanced, as compared with other specific character displays. It may be configured so that the effectability is simply improved).

Further, in the above embodiment, a stock high accuracy state in which the specific character display is easily stocked is provided (for example, by operating the effect button 125, the specific character display is sequentially derived, and the specific character display is likely to be duplicated. There may be). That is, for example, if the right to derive a specific character display is configured to be stockable for a plurality of times and a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the stock is in a highly accurate state at the start of the effect variation display, and the winning is won. In that case, during the fluctuation display, a guidance display is performed to set the stock high accuracy state for the specified number of fluctuation displays, and the period from the next effect variation display to the specified number of fluctuation displays is set to the stock high accuracy state. It may be configured as follows. Further, during the time reduction mode at the time of the first hit (after the jackpot state of "8RN"), the stock high accuracy state may be set. In this case, it is possible to diversify the playability by utilizing the configuration of stocking the right to derive the specific character display. Also, for a player who prefers to display a specific character, he wants a big hit to occur, but it is desirable to be near the end of the time reduction mode as much as possible. Furthermore, for the first hit, "8RN" is better than "8RS". It is possible to provide interesting playability with changing values such as preference.

Further, the stocked specific character display may not be derived with a 100% probability, but may be derived in the case of winning in the stock exercise lottery. For example, when the input to exercise the right is input, a guide prompting the operation of the specific effect button 127 is derived, and the stock exercise lottery is performed based on the operation of the specific effect button 127 (the winning probability is not constant). Also, the winning probability may be determined at the time of stocking (according to the type of the specific character display stocked, the game situation at the time of stocking, etc.), or may be determined at the time of lottery. Further, an effect display (a display that makes it difficult to appear) for teaching the result of the stock exercise lottery may be derived so as to be able to be derived.

(T; Stock point display) In the above embodiment, the stock point display 465 indicating the stock points is displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 42, and when 5 stock points are accumulated, the stock points for 5 points are displayed. The display is configured to be a display of a specific character (special stock display), but the display is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the special stock display may be derived when the stock is stocked a predetermined number of times, or the special stock display may be configured to move the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 42.

In addition, the special stock display may be used to suggest the jackpot expectation level, etc. (The suggestion may be made on each stock point display before the special stock display is derived). In this case, by increasing the value of the stock point display 465 and visually recognizing the mode of the stock point display 465, if the stock of the specific character display is used at this timing, a rare specific character display can be derived or the display ends successfully. It is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that a specific character display will be derived.

In addition, the mode of the special stock display may be changed when the stock of the specific character display is performed in the state where the special stock display is derived. For example, a change such as a specific character performing a predetermined action as a special stock display or changing a costume can be mentioned. In this case, even after the stock of the specific character display reaches the upper limit, it is possible to secure the enjoyment of stocking the specific character display (for the opportunity to come).

Further, for example, if the specific effect button 127 is operated with 6 stock points accumulated, 5 points may be subtracted to derive the specific character display, or all the points may be consumed (). It may be configured so that the specific character display is derived (the more points are used, the more the rare pattern or the specific effect display of the dedicated pattern is derived) (with the stock point set to 0), or the player You may be able to choose either one.

(U; Linkage of hold icon and stock point display) The form of the hold icon 461 may change to a normal hold icon 461, a look-ahead hold icon 463 that suggests the content of the effect variation display, and a look-ahead hold icon 463. If you operate the specific effect button while the stock point display is displayed in a mode that indicates less than 5 points, there is a derivation preparation hold icon (derivation preparation teaching means), and the stock point is subtracted by 1 to prepare for derivation. The hold icon may be configured to change to the look-ahead hold icon 463. In this case, the utility value of the stock of the specific character display and the range of use can be expanded, and the function of stocking the specific character display can be more effectively utilized. The look-ahead hold icon 463 may be derived without going through the derivation preparation hold icon.

(V; Use of notification of effect handle) In the above embodiment, information obtained by visually recognizing a winning device other than the decorative symbol display device 42 in a state where at least a specific character display is derived can be obtained as an aspect of the effect handle 401. It may be configured so that it can be transmitted to the player by a change (a reaction mode that is transmitted by a sense other than vision). For example, when a ball entering the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is detected during the jackpot state, the effect handle 401 is displaced once slightly up and down, and the specific winning device 32b of the second variable winning device 32b is displaced. When the ball entering the portion 145 is detected, the effect handle 401 may be configured to be displaced (vibrated) a plurality of times up and down.

That is, in order to advance the game, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and in the jackpot state, the game is played against the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. It is advantageous for the player to let the ball enter efficiently. Therefore, although the specific character display that the player is looking forward to is derived, the behavior related to the (analog) part related to the progress of the game (for example, the game ball can be successfully entered into the start winning devices 32a and 32b). Since it is also anxious about whether or not the character is displayed, there is a concern that the person may shift his or her eyes to it, which may lead to a situation in which the specific character display or the like cannot be fully enjoyed.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, even if the specific character display derived from the decorative symbol display device 42 is continuously visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the ball entering or the like into a predetermined winning device depending on the reaction mode. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball can be successfully entered into the predetermined winning device without shifting the line of sight to the predetermined winning device, and the specific character display and the accompanying sound can be displayed. As a result, the specific character display can be more enjoyed without any hindrance.

On the contrary, the reaction mode (vibration of the effect handle 401 indicating that the game ball has entered the starting winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b) may occur. Is not generated at all, and you have to look toward the configuration related to the predetermined winning device (the aim of the game ball launched in the game area is not good, the game area or the game ball is launched. It is also possible to grasp that the ball is clogged in any of the configurations to be performed, there is no game ball on hand, etc.), and the player is unable to proceed by proceeding with the game without noticing these. It is possible to prevent situations such as suffering profits.

The reaction mode may be confirmed while keeping the line of sight on the specific character display of the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, the reaction mode may be in the player's field of view to visually recognize the sound effect and the specific character display. Examples thereof include light emission by a light emitting means capable of emitting light, a specific effect display, a display in the vicinity thereof, and a change in the tactile sensation of a portion touched by a player. However, by setting the reaction mode to the effect handle 401 (transmission by tactile change), it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific character display and the accompanying voice are disturbed by the light emission or voice for the reaction mode. The effects such as enjoying the character display are more reliably achieved. Further, it is also possible to set a reaction mode other than entering the ball into the starting winning devices 33a and 33b and the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, for example, a reaction mode corresponding to the passage of the through gate 34 (detection of the through gate switch 225). It is possible.

In addition, a pressure sensor is provided on the effect handle 401, and for example, on the character selection screen, the character selection cursor moves by detecting a pressure equal to or higher than a predetermined value from either the left side or the right side of the effect handle 401. The character indicated by the cursor may be selected and determined by performing an operation such as grasping the effect handle 401 and detecting a predetermined pressure or more from both the left side and the right side. Further, the pressure sensor may detect the force for gripping the effect handle 401, and the result of the effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 may be changed according to the magnitude of the force.

Further, the content transmitted by the operation of the effect handle 401 is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be able to teach the occurrence of various error states. For example, a lamp corresponding to various error states is provided above the effect handle 401, and when an error state occurs, the effect handle performs an operation corresponding to each error state and the corresponding lamp is lit. You may. In this case, the player who wants to know the meaning of the operation of the effect handle 401 and the content of the error can confirm by looking at the lamp until the operation of the effect handle 401 is grasped.

It should be noted that the operation of the effect handle 401 may be changed according to the character appearing in the decorative symbol display device 42 when the effect handle 401 is used. For example, before the character appearing in the decorative symbol display device 42 is announced, the effect handle 401 may be operated first so that the player can predict the character appearing. In addition, changes in the feel of the effect handle 401 (changes in hardness such as hard and soft, changes in shape such as thin, thick, large (open), and small (closed), and deformation / displacement movements. Etc.), it may be possible to derive a game in which the corresponding character is guessed.

(W; Guidance on the number of holds by the effect handle) Further, in a configuration in which the effect handle 401 vibrates when the ball enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b, four hold storages in which the first variation display is the upper limit in the normal mode are stored. In the case of, and in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode, when four hold storages in which the second variation display is the upper limit are stored, the mode change of the effect handle 401 is different from the case where the other hold storages are performed. May be done.

In this case, even if the game balls are inserted into the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the game balls are entered into the start winning devices 33a and 33b (over winning) without the fluctuation display being held. It can be made easier. In other words, for example, when a specific character display is derived in a situation where the variable display is not held, the line of sight remains the specific character display, and the game ball is continuously fired without fear of over-winning. Can be put on hold. Therefore, as much as possible, it is possible to maintain a state in which some fluctuation displays are held and to proceed with the game smoothly.

Further, when the production handle 401 operates the parts production, an announcement notifying that the parts production will be started may be executed at a portion other than the production handle 401 such as the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, the effect handle detecting means (infrared sensor, optical sensor, etc.) for detecting that the player's hand is in close proximity or contact with the effect handle 401 is provided, and when the effect handle detection means is not detected during the parts production, the effect handle detection means is provided. Even if the guidance for prompting the operation of the effect handle 401 or the operation derivation condition of the effect handle 401 in the parts effect is satisfied, the player approaches the effect handle 401 on the condition that the effect handle detection means is detected. Therefore, the effect handle 401 may be configured to operate.

(X; Deformation example of the effect handle, etc.) In the above embodiment, the reaction mode means whose mode can be changed so that the change can be felt by the sense of touch, and the effect handle 401 are provided as the tactile transmission means, but another configuration is adopted. You may. For example, in the above embodiment, the effect handle 401 is provided at a substantially symmetrical position of the handle 18 for firing operation, but it may be provided at a different position. However, by providing the effect handle 401 at the position of the above embodiment, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of continuing to touch the effect handle 401 as much as possible.

Further, the configuration, installation position, operation, and the like of the effect handle 401 are not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, the effect handle 401 may be configured to be rotatable and slide displaceable. Further, for example, the configuration for changing the outer shape of the effect handle 401 is not particularly limited, and for example, it is made of rubber from a plurality of slits formed in a hollow (almost hemispherical) iron base. It may be configured so that the moving parts can appear and disappear. In addition, there are a moving part having a flat tip at a portion protruding from the slit of the moving part and a moving part having a substantially sharp tip, and the moving part protruding from the slit is configured to be appropriately changed by an effect or the like. You may.

(Y; Dedicated Parts) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is embodied as a dedicated part 411 that the player can attach / detach to / from the pachinko machine 10 and is made of rubber so as to cover the effect handle 401. The configuration is not particularly limited, and the shape of the dedicated parts, the position of the parts mounting portion to which the dedicated parts can be mounted, the number of parts mounting portions, and the like can be appropriately set. Further, it is desirable that there are a plurality of variations of the dedicated parts that can be attached to the same dedicated parts. Further, a plurality of parts mounting portions having different dedicated parts that can be mounted may be provided. Even if the special part 411 is not attached, it is preferable not to affect the progress of the game. Further, the dedicated parts 411 may be those that are not supposed to be touched by the player as an effect (those that do not function as tactile transmission means).

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of animal characters appear in the production of the decorative pattern display device 42, a special part in the shape of (a part of) an animal is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the front frame 14. To move the dedicated parts, switch the lighting state, change the color development (the light emitting means may be either the dedicated parts or the parts mounting part), and the sound is output via the dedicated parts or its vicinity. It may be configured to be such as. Further, for example, by attaching a special part to the front portion of the upper plate 19, the special part may be configured to be slidable to the left and right. When the dedicated parts are used for decoration, etc., if the dedicated parts are not attached to the parts mounting portion, the processing for changing the mode of the dedicated parts and the driving operation may be wasted. .. In this regard, by checking the detection information of the mounting detection means that can grasp that the dedicated part 411 is mounted on the part mounting part, even though the dedicated part is not mounted on the part mounting part, the dedicated part It is possible to avoid a situation in which a process for changing the mode of the above and a driving operation are executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control, save power, and suppress deterioration due to use.

The mounting detecting means may be provided with a plurality of sensors or switches capable of detecting a predetermined portion of the dedicated part 411 at a position invisible to the player or a position not touched by the player. Further, the mounting detecting means may be provided with a parts reading means capable of reading RFID (Radio frequency identification) information such as an IC tag as a parts information means provided in the dedicated part 411. That is, instead of removing the dedicated part 411 from the part mounting portion, it is possible to suppress a situation in which something else is attached so that it cannot be understood.

The information stored in the dedicated part 411 is not particularly limited, and when the dedicated part 411 corresponds to a predetermined character, only the dedicated part 411 is attached and the corresponding character is a specific character. It may be configured to be set as. In addition, the total number of jackpots of the player for the same model as the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the dedicated part 411 and the total number of variable display times for the dedicated part 411 so as to replace the mobile interlocking game as described later. The game information and the like may be stored, and the game information and the like may be exchanged with the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the dedicated parts, a voice data storage means, a voice output means, and a voice control means electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 are provided (voice can be replaced with a display or can be used in combination), and the pachinko machine 10 can be used in combination. It is stored in the audio data storage means by clearing the predetermined conditions (number of rotations, number of hits, appearance of target effect, etc.) in the game with the dedicated parts attached to (or the arrival of the predetermined date and time). It may be configured so that the reproduction of a predetermined audio data is permitted. In this case, new effects can be added at any time in the dedicated parts. When a means for electrically operating the dedicated parts is provided, the dedicated parts are provided with a power storage means, and the special parts are attached to the pachinko machine 10 so that the power storage means can be charged. You may.

In addition, the mounting position and mounting direction of the dedicated parts 411 can be adjusted so that they can be adapted to the height of the player, etc. (Multiple parts mounting parts are provided at predetermined intervals, or the parts mounting parts can be displaced. It may be configured). For example, the dedicated parts have the function of a speaker, are configured to be mounted on the left and right sides of the front surface of the front frame 14, and are configured so that the height and orientation can be changed so as to match the position of the player's ears. May be. It should be noted that the above setting may be automatically performed only by storing the information in the dedicated part 411 and attaching the dedicated part 411.

In addition, by attaching the dedicated part 411 to the effect handle 401, the player's hand may be configured to be able to sense the operation of the effect handle 401 at a position away from the effect handle 401. In this case, for example, with the left arm placed on the armrest of the chair, the vibration of the effect handle can be sensed with the left hand through the special parts. In addition, special parts can be attached to the handle 18, and while the right arm is placed on the armrest of the chair, the handle 18 can be operated with the right hand (rotation operation of the rotation operating body 18a and firing stop operation of the stop lever 18b). Of these, at least the rotation operation) may be configured to be possible. The dedicated parts are a part body that is attached and fixed to the base of the handle 18 (a base that protrudes forward from the front frame 14 and supports the rotation operation body 18a) and a rotation operation body 18a that is rotatably supported by the parts body. It is provided with a rotation interlocking portion that is mounted and fixed to, an operation position that presses the stop lever 18b, and a switch portion that can be displaced between a non-operation position that is separated from the stop lever 18b, and the player rotates the rotation interlocking portion. As a result, the rotation operating body 18a may rotate, and the stop lever 18b may be operated by operating the switch unit.

The material of the dedicated part 411 is not particularly limited, and rubber, thermoplastic elastomer (olefin elastomer), sponge rubber, synthetic sponge, cloth, a combination of chain-shaped metal or resin, etc. are appropriately used. You can choose. As described above, the special part 411 is made of an elastically deformable material in a bag shape, and the first slide member 402 and the second slide member 403 of the effect handle 401 are appropriately displaced inside the bag. Thereby, the tension applied to the dedicated part 411 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel effect such as changing the feel (hardness, tension) of the dedicated part 411.

Further, among the dedicated parts 411, the attachment portion (holding frame 412) to the pachinko machine 10 and the contact portion (bag-shaped portion) that the player touches may be detachably configured. In this case, the cost on the player side can be reduced by standardizing the mounting parts, and the contacting parts can be washed (even if there are electronic parts in the mounting parts).

It should be noted that the dedicated parts may be attached to other parts touched by the player. For example, a portion of the handle 18 touched by a striker, an effect button 125, a cross button 126, a ball pulling button 123, a ball pulling lever 25, and the like can be mentioned. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 can be more attached to the pachinko machine 10, and the player who is particularly concerned about hygiene can be satisfied. Further, for example, it indicates that a jackpot state occurs (a signal that is output from the sub-control device 262 and is changed to the corresponding visual mode is input at some percentage of the time when the jackpot state occurs). The notification means (notification lamp, etc.) may be attached as a dedicated part. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the notification means, not only when a signal is sent in parallel to the external notification means as a dedicated part and the built-in notification means, but also when the built-in notification means and the built-in notification means are provided. It may be configured so that a signal different from that of the external notification means may be sent, or a signal may be sent only to the external notification means.

Further, it is desirable that the dedicated part 411 is configured to be foldable. For example, at the top, bottom, left, and right of the dedicated part 411, a bent portion (which may be composed of solid rubber or slightly foamed rubber) which is thinner than other parts is extended back and forth, and the front portion (tip portion in the protruding direction) is bent. It may be configured in the same manner as the unit so that it can be folded once in the horizontal direction and once in the vertical direction.

(Z; mounting detection means) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, the mounting detecting means and the sub control device 262 are configured so as to be able to grasp the type of the dedicated part 411 mounted on the effect handle 401, and the sub. When the control device 262 determines that the first dedicated part is attached to the effect handle 401, the control device 262 changes the mode of the first dedicated part to a mode corresponding to the first dedicated part, and attaches the first dedicated part to the effect handle 401. When it is determined that a second dedicated part different from the first dedicated part is attached, the mode of the second dedicated part is changed to a mode corresponding to the second dedicated part different from the mode change of the first dedicated part. It may be configured to be possible. In this case, different functions can be given to each type of the dedicated parts 411 (differentiation of each dedicated parts 411 by different operations of the effect handle 401), and by attaching the dedicated parts 411 to the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to further improve the interest of.

It should be noted that the determination of whether the first dedicated part or the second dedicated part is made is based on the difference in detection due to the difference in shape (for example, a plurality of detection sensors are provided in one part mounting portion, and the detection sensor that has been detected is detected. It may be discriminated (by difference or combination), or an RFID such as an IC tag is embedded in the dedicated part 411 to read information such as the IC tag (IC tag reader as a part reading means in or near the effect handle 401). Etc.) may be provided for determination. In this case, the type of the dedicated part 411 attached to the effect handle 401 can be determined and the mode of the dedicated part 411 or the like can be changed to the corresponding mode by simply attaching the dedicated part 411. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the interest in attaching the dedicated part 411 can be further increased.

For example, if the cover of the front frame 14 is made of a translucent white translucent resin, a three-color LED or the like is mounted behind the cover, and a special blue part is attached to the parts mounting portion, the three-color LED or the like is mounted. May change to a luminescent color mainly composed of blue, and when a special red part is attached to the parts mounting portion, the three-color LED may be configured to change to a luminescent color mainly composed of red. Further, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, the game area in which the game ball can be moved, and in the case of a slot machine, the entire front or almost the entire variable display area in which a rotating body such as a reel is installed is a transparent display. When it is configured to be covered by means (organic EL display, etc.) and the special parts are attached to the parts mounting part, the decorative display corresponding to the special parts in the transmissive display means (frame background of the corresponding motif (like a frame)). The display, the display of the corresponding character, etc.) may be derived.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which either the first dedicated part or the second dedicated part can be mounted on the same part mounting part (the structure of the mounting part is common), but the first part mounting part. May be configured so that only the first dedicated part can be mounted, and only the second dedicated part can be mounted on the second part mounting portion, so that the mounting target is limited. .. In this case, the first part mounting portion only needs to be able to perform an operation corresponding to the first dedicated part, and the second part mounting portion only needs to be able to perform an operation corresponding to the second dedicated part. In addition, when adopting this configuration, when a dedicated part other than the first dedicated part is attached to the first part mounting portion, and when a dedicated part other than the second dedicated part is attached to the second part mounting portion. In some cases, it may be configured so that the notification that the dedicated part to be attached is incorrect can be derived.

Further, the dedicated part 411 attached to the effect handle 401 corresponds to the specific character, and after the start of the jackpot state (big hit round), the specific character video and the disapproval prioritized over the specific character video. If the display overlaps and settings such as changing the derivation timing of the specific character video later are made, and there is no time left to derive the specific character video before the end of the final round, it is specified. During the period when the character moving image is supposed to be performed, another big hit moving image (a big hit moving image other than the specific character moving image) may be derived, and a parts effect as a specific effect may be performed.

(Aa; Cooperation between the dedicated part and the decorative symbol display device) Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, when the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401, based on the detection of the attachment detecting means, It may be configured so that the mounting reaction effect as a mounting reaction mode corresponding to the mounting is performed. That is, in the above embodiment, when the dedicated part 411 is attached to the effect handle 401, the attachment lamp 417 is configured to light up, but not only that, the sub control device 262 is based on the detection of the attachment detection means. The decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to derive a mounting reaction display or a mounting reaction voice corresponding to the mounting of the dedicated part 411.

In particular, by inputting the password for the mobile interlocking game first and then attaching the dedicated part 411 to the effect handle 401, the installation reaction display and the installation reaction voice corresponding to the character specified by the player included in the password can be displayed. It may be configured to be derived. Alternatively, it has information on which character the dedicated part 411 corresponds to, and is provided with a reading means capable of reading such information by the pachinko machine 10 (an IC tag and a reader may be used, or the dedicated part 411 is engaged. The shape of the part 413 is changed for each type of the dedicated part 411, and the difference in the shape is read on the pachinko machine 10 side (a plurality of sensors for detecting each part in charge of the engaging part 413 or the dedicated part 411 is attached. Further, once the dedicated part 411 is rotated, it may be read by a plurality of switches turned on by each part in charge of the engaging portion 413).

In this case, for example, a character corresponding to the dedicated part 411 appears in the decorative pattern display device 42 to display a greeting of a visitor or enthusiasm for the game, and bring about a corresponding change in the core of the production. Therefore, it is possible to excite the start of the game and further increase the interest in installing the special parts 411. As a result, it is possible to raise expectations for the production in which the decorative pattern display device 42 and the like and the dedicated parts 411 are linked.

When the dedicated part 411 is removed from the effect handle 401 (for example, when the dedicated part flag indicating the state in which the dedicated part 411 is mounted is switched from on to off), the mounting lamp 417 is turned off. In addition to this, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to derive a display corresponding to the removal of the dedicated part. In this case, for example, the character corresponding to the dedicated part 411 can say goodbye and finish the game comfortably.

Further, the specific character display mode may be different depending on whether the dedicated part is attached to the part attachment portion or not. In this case, by attaching the dedicated parts, it is possible to change the mode of displaying the specific character specified by the player. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest in the derivation of the specific character display and the dedicated parts.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the effect button 125 or the cross button 126 is operated to select a character on the character selection screen in order to specify a specific character, but a dedicated part is attached to the parts mounting portion. However, it may be configured to be an input operation to the pachinko machine 10 by the player for specifying the specific character display. In this case, it is possible to save the trouble of input operation for specifying the specific character display, and to raise the mood for playing the game machine that changes to the corresponding mode by attaching the dedicated part 411.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the specific character display and the notification display overlap, or when the specific character displays overlap each other, the right to derive the specific character display is stocked, for example. , In addition to or in place of the stock, a parts effect that changes the mode of the dedicated parts 411 may be performed. In this case, when the specific character display that the player was looking forward to seeing overlaps with some display, the aspect of the dedicated part 411 changes instead of reducing the visibility of the specific character display. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to obstruction of visual recognition of the specific character display. The parts effect derived when the specific character displays overlap is configured to behave in relation to the specific character display when the specific character displays overlap, and is related to the notification display when the specific character displays overlap. It may be configured to perform behavior (behavior of content suggestion in the case of production, behavior such as a handshake of a promise of resumption or a handshake of a resumption greeting in the case of error notification, etc.).

(Bb; Locking of Dedicated Parts) In the above embodiment, a locking means may be provided that makes it impossible to remove the dedicated parts 411 attached to the effect handle 401. For example, by providing a hole in the engaging portion 413 and engaging the engaging portion 413 with the engaged portion 414, the lock bar may be inserted into the hole in the engaging portion 413. good. Further, for example, after the dedicated part 411 is attached, before or after the lock is performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the unlock password input screen (configured so as to be locked by password input). The input screen is cleared when the input is completed. Further, by operating the release button 416, by performing the corresponding selection operation on the menu screen of the decorative symbol display device 42, or by performing an operation of ending the mobile interlocking game, the decorative symbol display device 42 A screen for entering the unlock password may be displayed in, and the lock may be set when the correct password is entered. It is desirable to provide a configuration that allows the password to be removed even if the password is forgotten, such as a predetermined operation on the back side of the inner frame 12. Further, the function of releasing the locked state of the dedicated part 411 constitutes the unlocking means.

As described above, by providing the lock function of the special part 411, the special part 411 is purposely removed to prevent theft of the special part 411 for a short time leaving the seat such as going to the bathroom or buying a drink. You can avoid the situation of carrying around. In addition, it is possible to attach what was prepared in the game hall as a countermeasure against theft, and it is possible to improve convenience and the like.

The configuration of the locking means and the unlocking means is not particularly limited, and the key can be removed by attaching the dedicated part 411, and a keyhole for unlocking the locked state by inserting the key and performing a predetermined operation is provided. May be good. In this case, although it is possible to suppress annoying acts such as taking away only the key, it is difficult to deal with the loss. Therefore, it is possible to switch the locked state by inputting a password or inputting the cross button 126. desirable. Further, as a locking means, normally, the release button 416 or the dedicated part 411 is housed so as to prohibit contact from the outside, and when a predetermined effect is performed, or when the dedicated part 411 is removed. It may be configured so that it is exposed so that it can be contacted from the outside when an operation / input is performed (for example, it has a substantially dome shape in the housed state).

When the effect handle 401 is not in use (parts are not produced), the effect handle 401 is in a state where it cannot be touched (covered with something like a cover, and the effect handle 401 is housed inside the front frame 14). Etc.), it is possible to suppress mischief on the effect handle 401, damage to the effect handle 401, and the like.

(Cc; Detection of operation on the effect handle) A pressure sensor capable of detecting that pressure is applied to the effect handle 401 of the above embodiment may be provided. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect handle 401 is destroyed by issuing a warning sound when a force is roughly applied to the effect handle 401. In addition, when a pressure gauge and a pressure storage means for storing the measured value of the pressure gauge are provided and a predetermined effect is performed based on the value stored in the pressure storage means, or when the effect handle 401 is damaged, etc. It can be used as a material to identify the cause (combined with a surveillance camera installed in the game hall).

In addition, the effect handle 401 may be configured to be able to displace a range in which a substantially hemisphere is drawn like a joystick and each posture can be detected, or a gyroscope may be mounted on the effect handle 401. good. In this case, a wider variety of effects can be derived. Further, for example, a plurality of contact detection points made of a conductive material are provided on the surface of the effect handle 401 so that the contact detection points touched by the player can be identified, or two layers in which the surface portions of the effect handle 401 are separated from each other. With a structure, it is possible to detect which part of the effect handle 401 has been operated by flexibly deforming the first layer on the surface side according to the operation and making it possible to identify the part in contact with the second layer. It may be configured as.

(Dd; Damage to the effect handle) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, only the engaged portion 414 of the effect handle 401, only the cover member 406, or the first slide member 402, the second The slide member 403 may be individually and detachably configured by being separated from other parts. That is, it is possible to improve the convenience of parts replacement by allowing the parts that are relatively easily damaged or deteriorated, such as the dedicated parts 411 to be attached / detached or worn during use, to be replaced independently. For example, if a malicious player stuffs a foreign object into the engaged portion 414 that engages with the engaging portion 413 of the dedicated part 411, the dedicated part 411 cannot be used, or the dedicated part 411 cannot be used. , It is possible to avoid a situation in which the work until reuse (for example, removal of padding) becomes difficult.

In addition, in order to suppress tampering with the effect handle 401, when something other than the dedicated parts 411 is attached to the effect handle 401 based on the information grasped by the attachment detection means, the corresponding information is provided to the pachinko machine. It may be configured to output to the outside of the 10 or to derive the corresponding mode in the pachinko machine 10.

(Ee; operation input by line of sight) It may be provided with a line of sight input means that enables input based on the movement of the player's eyes. In this case, even in a state where both hands of the player are buried (the right hand is operating the handle 18 and the left hand is operating the effect handle 401), it is possible to perform a predetermined input based on the player's will. Therefore, the range of things that can be done by the effect is expanded, and the effectability can be improved.

A light emitting unit capable of irradiating light (infrared rays) toward the player located in front, a light receiving unit that detects light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected by the player's eyeball, and the light receiving unit. It is also possible to provide the line-of-sight detection means including the analysis means for analyzing the position of the player's eyes and the line-of-sight angle based on the detection information of the above. That is, the pachinko machine 10 side determines where the player is looking, that is, what information the player is trying to obtain, or what kind of operation the player is trying to perform. Can be done. Therefore, for example, even if the player does not move his / her hand, the line of sight of the player can be detected and the corresponding process can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a relatively large amount of information to the player while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

In addition, by configuring it so that the menu operation of the game can be performed without moving the hand at all, for example, the special part 411 attached to the production handle 401, the beverage, the mobile communication terminal, etc. can be held in the hand. It is possible to make a sudden selection while you are there, or you can make a selection in a situation where you do not want to use your hand as much as possible, such as when you are injured. Therefore, even in a situation where the use of a hand is withheld, operability comparable to that of the hand can be realized, and convenience can be improved. Furthermore, even a player who feels embarrassed about a predetermined selection / decision action can make a selection / decision secretly and without much effort. Therefore, even a shy or troublesome player can fully enjoy the game.

father. When the specific character display is derived when the player is looking away or closing his eyes, the effect handle 401 may be configured to perform the target operation.

(Fl; Input from the effect handle) In the above embodiment, a predetermined input (displacement operation, etc.) to the effect handle 401 may be input to the sub control device 262. In this case, by performing a predetermined operation on the effect handle 401 (after setting the operating range of the effect handle 401 according to the effect, the effect handle 401 is displaced according to the player's operation, etc. The display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 and the like can be changed, and more various effects related to the dedicated parts 411 can be performed.

Further, the effect handle 401 may be provided with a thermometer so that the temperature of the player and the like can be measured and input to the sub control device 262. For example, it may be configured so that the character raises a topic related to physical condition, weather, etc. by combining it with real-time clock information capable of measuring the date and time.

(Gg; Display in front of the game area) In front of the game area (glass unit 137), a transmissive display device (transmissive liquid crystal display device, etc.) may be provided so as to cover almost the entire front of the game area. good. For example, in the range in front of the area in the game area (in the current situation) where the game ball is unlikely to pass, a predetermined effect display (parts effect) or a predetermined game state (probability change mode) is supported. Therefore, it may be configured so that the display of the transparent display device is performed. For example, in the parts effect, the display of a predetermined character of the transmissive display device and the dedicated part 411 (effect handle 401) can be used to derive an effect that confronts the predetermined character. Further, the transmissive display device may be hidden when the trajectory of the game ball is not fixed (the handle 18 is moving by a predetermined amount or more within a predetermined period).

(Hh; only the specific character display is displayed by the operation of the player) In the above embodiment, when the specific effect button 127 (can be changed to other operation input) is operated in the state where the specific character display is derived. May be configured to hide displays (other layers) other than the specific character display.

(Ii; change of effect by operating the handle) The first winning device and the second winning device (a through gate can be used instead of the winning device, and 2 A plurality of balls other than the one may be provided), and different effect displays may be selected depending on whether the ball is entered in the first winning device or the second winning device. In this case, it is possible to provide a new effect such that the effect display changes depending on the winning destination of the game ball, instead of directly operating the effect button 125 or the like. It is desirable that the first winning device and the second winning device can be separated by operating the handle 18 of the player. In this case, the player can arbitrarily select the effect display that changes depending on the winning destination, instead of randomly.

(Jj; effect means) The number, shape, and type of display means for effect are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 42, a movable display device may be provided. Further, a dot matrix display device, an EL display device, or the like may be mounted.

Further, in the above embodiment, between the functional position located in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 (in the display unit) as the effect display means and the retracted position displaced from the front (in the display unit) of the decorative symbol display device 42. A movable accessory (movable accessory) may be provided as a displaceable effect means, and the movable accessory may be configured to be displaceable to a functional position in response to a button effect or the like. Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the specific character display on the decorative symbol display device 42 overlaps with the disallowed display on the decorative symbol display device 42. The effect as the position may be set to "non-permitted display" so as not to overlap with the specific character display. In addition, it is not necessary to disallow all of the effects in which the movable accessory is the functional position, and for example, the movable accessory may be configured to be displaced to the functional position as a part of the specific character display. For example, a button effect period for prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is set during a part of the period of displaying the specific character, and during that period, when the moving image of the specific character display does not proceed and the effect button 125 is operated, the movable accessory. Can be displaced to the functional position, and after the movable accessory is displaced to the retracted position, or after the reaction effect display on the decorative symbol display device 42 when the movable accessory is not displaced to the functional position is completed (button). After the production period ends), the specific character moving image may be configured to proceed.

In addition, a light guide plate is provided in front of the game area, and a light source that allows light to enter the light guide plate is provided so that the light source emits light according to a predetermined opportunity so that a predetermined display mode is visually recognized on the light guide plate. It may be configured. Regarding the display of the light guide plate, a disapproval display or the like may be set for each model, and when the disapproval display is used, the display may be configured to avoid duplication with the specific character display.

(Kk) The mode and display position of the hold icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 and the effect using the hold icon 461 (the content of the change information is grasped at the stage where the change information is held and stored, and the hold icon is held. The corresponding effect (suggestion of jackpot expectation, etc.) in the mode of 461 can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, in the aspect of the hold icon 461, it is not taught which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b is the variable display based on the ball, but for example, , The hold icon 461 may have information on whether it corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display, or may be configured to have such an aspect. good.

(Ll) Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object with a plurality of places of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the proximity detecting means (for example,) connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262. , A proximity detection sensor or a touch panel having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like close to the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold icon 461 is based on the detection of the finger or the like. It may be configured to change or move. In this case, the interest in the hold icon 461 can be increased.

(Mm) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 determines the launch timing (launch interval) of the launch device 60, but the configuration is not particularly limited, and the launch control circuit 312 determines the launch timing (launch interval). It may be configured to measure the timing (launch interval). In this case, the control load of the main control device 261 can be suppressed.

(Nn) In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, the functions of augmented reality and virtual reality (mixed reality) may be provided. That is, when the player installs the AR application provided by the server of the game machine manufacturer on the mobile communication terminal and points the mobile communication terminal at the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated, the mobile communication terminal is photographed. A virtual image object (character moving image, etc.) added by the function of the AR application is synthesized with the image of the pachinko machine 10 taken by the means (camera), and the display means (display such as a liquid crystal display) of the mobile communication terminal. To be displayed with. In addition, a marker that causes the AR application to recognize the type and location of the image object to be derived can be displayed by, for example, the decorative symbol display device 42, and a marker can be displayed in the vicinity of the effect handle 401. Means may be provided. Then, when the mobile communication terminal is pointed at the pachinko machine 10 with the AR application activated so that the marker is included in the shooting range, for example, the character is displayed as if it pops out in front of the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when the mobile communication terminal is pointed at the effect handle 401, the character's hand may be displayed as if it appeared at the position of the effect handle 401.

Further, for example, by wearing a virtual reality goggles (VR headset) brought by the player and aligning the VR headset with the pachinko machine 10 by a method such as reading a marker, basically. , An image related to the motif of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an image under the sea) is displayed in an area other than the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (game area, upper plate 19, handle 18, lower plate 15, etc.), and the world of the motif is displayed. A simulated experience of moving is provided. An image related to the event (marine life such as fish) is displayed at the position of the effect handle 401, and the effect handle 401 performs the corresponding operation.

When the effect handle 401 is displaced relatively large, a marker is provided on the effect handle 401 so that the virtual image object does not deviate from the effect handle 401. In addition, if the VR headset is attached and the VR function is turned on, the player's sensitivity to reality decreases, so the mechanical error of the pachinko machine 10 and the detection of earthquakes using the vibration detection function, etc. Is desirable to be displayed (notified) on the image visually recognized by the player via the VR headset. In addition, the virtual reality is displayed in a range of about 180 degrees with the decorative symbol display device 42 as the center (vertex), and the marker is removed from the shooting range when looking back (or when shooting the marker is a display condition). ) Etc., it is desirable to configure it so that the real world can be seen.

(Oo; Mobile interlocking game) In the above embodiment, data is exchanged between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine manufacturer or the like via a communication mobile terminal or the like owned by the player (so-called mobile). It may be configured so that interlocking games) can be performed. Further, when the mobile interlocking game is terminated, the two-dimensional code including the current game information is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code on the mobile communication terminal and the mobile communication terminal. In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of fluctuation counters that count the number of fluctuations of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game may be configured to include information indicating the values of the various counters. Furthermore, the information on the total number of shots of the game ball, the type of the derived effect, the number of times, the number of times the player operates the effect button 125 during the button effect, and the like are also included in the two-dimensional code. May be good. In this case, the gaming machine maker can grasp the gaming situation.

The value of the counter is erased by being two-dimensionally coded, and other than that, it is accumulated (even if the power is turned off) (erased by turning on the power while operating the RAM erase switch 323). ) May be. Further, the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo-blade member 431 may be configured so that the player can select from several types (with respect to the player performing the mobile interlocking game).

(Pp) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types, and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot round in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is set to the eighth round, but the order and the number of jackpot rounds in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened are set. Is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the second round and the seventh round may be jackpot rounds in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state.

Further, a state in which a high probability state and a low ball entry state (“latent probability mode”) may be provided. Furthermore, the jackpot state in which the latent probability mode is given is not a jackpot that is expected to increase the number of game balls (so-called "big hit with a ball"), but the opening time of the first variable winning device 32a is short and the number of jackpot rounds is short. It may be a big hit (so-called "big hit without a ball") in which the number of balls is small and the number of game balls is hardly expected to increase. For example, the first variable winning device 32a may be opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which may be repeated twice before the jackpot state ends. Further, the first variable winning device 32a is provided with a small hit state (winning with a predetermined probability when the big hit state does not occur) in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened and closed in the same pattern as the big hit state in which the latent probability mode is given. May be. In this case, since it is difficult to understand the assignment of the latent mode, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting whether or not the latent mode is provided.

In addition, in the case of a big hit in the "latent mode", a specific combination (a combination of chance symbols, for example, an upper / middle / lower symbol display area, "3" is used on the effective line instead of getting doublet. , "4", "1" may be stopped and displayed). In addition, as an effect stage of the decorative symbol display device 42, a "precursor stage" that shifts after the end of the big hit state of the "latent mode" and after the end of the "small hit" state is provided, and in the "precursor stage", the background However, it may be configured so that the effect balance or the effect content changes (for example, it becomes easier to select an effect pattern that is normally difficult to select).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery fluctuates, but the winning probability does not fluctuate (is constant), and the period of the high-entry state given after the jackpot state ends ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of fluctuations) are prepared. Further, the winning probability in the ball winning support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when winning, and the like can be appropriately set for each model.

(Qq) In the above embodiment, the reserved order is set such that the second variable display held after the first variable display already held is digested before the first variable display. The second variation display is configured to be digested preferentially over the first variation display in a back-and-forth manner, but the first variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, And, regardless of which of the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b, the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. In order, the corresponding variation display may be suspended, and the variation display may be configured to be digested in order from the previously reserved variation display.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning device 33a and the case where the ball is entered into the second starting winning device 33b are performed. The distribution ratio of the jackpot types that can be given differs depending on whether the jackpot is won in the winning or losing lottery, but it may be configured to be the same. In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b are the same. May be configured to be greater than the other.

Further, it is also possible to configure so that at least one of the first variation display and the second variation display cannot be held and stored.

(Rr) In the above embodiment, the main control device 261 is configured to perform the normal processing (see FIG. 10) after the main processing (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a configuration. is not it. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value, which was performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment, is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec. The processing performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the process of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which the flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the process of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt process as in the above embodiment.

(Ss) Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is reconfirmed whether or not the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation processing (winning / failing flag). It may be configured so that whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a pattern of variable display, and the like are determined according to the state of the above.

(Tt) A real-time clock capable of grasping the date and time may be provided so that an effect mode corresponding to the information on the date and time of the real-time clock can be derived. Further, the effect that is easy to be selected may change depending on the time and date (the table for the effect that is easy to select changes). For example, a real-time clock is provided in the sub-control device 262, and a plurality of settlement time setting tables to be referred to when it is decided to lengthen the final effect are provided, and the time when it is decided to lengthen the final effect is in the morning. If there is, the first settlement time setting table is referred to, and if it is afternoon (until night), the second settlement time setting table, which is easier to set a longer time than the first settlement time setting table, is referred to. If the closing time of the game hall is approaching at night (for example, after 21:00), the first settlement time setting table or the third settlement time, which is shorter than the first settlement time setting table, is likely to be set. It may be configured so that the time setting table is referred to. In addition to providing a real-time clock in the main control device 261 and providing a plurality of fluctuation time determination tables referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b, it is relatively short at night (for example, after 21:00). The fluctuation time determination table, which is easy to set the fluctuation time, may be easily selected.

(Uu) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a movable means that can be changed into a specific area in which a game ball moving in a game area can enter, an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the ball from entering the specific area ( Detects variable ball-entry means including a wing member), specific ball-entry means and non-specific ball-entry means that allow a game ball that has entered a specific area to enter, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means. Detects specific ball entry detection means (condition satisfaction detection means), special starting means that is provided outside the specific area and allows game balls that move in the game area to enter, and game balls that have entered the special starting means. It is provided with a special start detection means for detecting the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means and the non-specific ball entry means. A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the balls is entered, and the main control means sets the variable ball entry means for the first time based on the detection of the special start detection means. A specified number of variable winning means that are opened only once or multiple times, or that the variable ball-entry means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or that the variable winning means is opened. One round is until the game ball enters, and a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which this is repeated a specified number of times. If a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, or if a specific ball entry detection means is detected, a big hit state is generated, and if a special ball entry detection means is detected in the small hit state, a big hit state is generated. It may be applied to a game machine such as generating.

In addition to pachinko machines, it is also implemented as an arrange ball machine, various similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as rotating cylinder type game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines. You may.

As a basic configuration of a slot machine (rotary gaming machine), "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and an operation means for starting (for example, operation). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), and the definite identification at the time of the stop is confirmed. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

When embodied in a slot machine provided with an effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the operation of the start operation means and the stop operation means is performed while the specific character display is derived by the effect display means. It is determined whether or not the effect display derived to the effect display means is permitted to overlap with the derived specific character display based on the above, and processing corresponding to the determination result is performed. And.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine (rotary game machine using a ball) that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is "variable to dynamically display an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirm and display the identification information. The display means is provided, and the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or for a predetermined time. With the passage of time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, and the special gaming state generating means for generating the special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information at the time of the stop is the specific identification information. In addition to using balls as a game medium (sharing game balls of pachinko machines), a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and many balls are required when a special game state occurs. It is a game machine that is configured to pay out the balls.

(Vv; transition condition of probability variation mode, etc.) In the above embodiment, two variable winning devices 32a and 32b are provided, but one may be provided. Further, the arrangement and number of the first start winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b and the like are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately arranged for each model.

Further, in the above embodiment, the right to be granted the probability variation mode after the end of the jackpot state can be obtained on condition that the game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b in the jackpot state. Although it is configured, when it is associated with a predetermined jackpot type (for example, "15RS" and "8RS") and the jackpot state of the predetermined jackpot type is won, the probability change mode is set after the jackpot state ends. It may be configured to obtain the rights granted. Further, in the above embodiment, the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set for the probability variation mode, but for example, the probability variation mode may be maintained until a jackpot state occurs.

(WW; Simultaneous fluctuation) In the above embodiment, when one of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is performing the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other is not performed (standby). ), But the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b may be configured to be executable at the same time. That is, if there is a hold for each of the first variable display and the second variable display, the corresponding variable display is executed (except during the hit state). In the state where the variation display that teaches the occurrence of the jackpot state is performed, the variation display that overlaps with the variation display may be configured so as not to be newly started. Further, when one fluctuation display is stopped and displayed in a manner that teaches the occurrence of a jackpot state, even if the other fluctuation display is changing, the other fluctuation display is interrupted (restarted after the jackpot state ends). ) Or may be erased.

Further, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the first variable display and the variable display by the decorative symbol corresponding to the second variable display (hereinafter, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display) are simultaneously displayed. It may be displayed, or one of them (the second variable display or the one that is stopped and displayed first) may be displayed preferentially, or both are visually recognized and only one is visually recognized. It may be configured to be appropriately switched to the state in which it is performed.

Further, the effect variation display on which the specific character display is derived may be preferentially displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. For example, at the start of one of the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display, it is determined whether or not the other effect is changing, and if the other effect is changing, the specific character display is displayed on one effect variation display. Check if it is derived, do not display the one in the negative judgment, check if the specific character display is derived in the other effect variation display in the affirmative judgment, and if it is derived, do not display one. If it is not derived, one may be displayed (the mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be switched from the other effect variation display to one effect variation display somewhere). In this case, it is possible to increase the chances of deriving the specific character display.

It should be noted that not only is it a condition for the visible display of one effect variation display whether or not a specific character display is derived from the other effect variation display, but also (in the case of a big hit, it goes through the front-back off reach). Whether or not the front-rear reach is derived may be a condition for the visible display of one of the effect variation displays.

Further, the specific character display is derived in one of the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display, and the instruction of the occurrence of the jackpot state in the other effect variation display that overlaps with the one effect variation display is taught. When this is performed, if the one effect variation display ends later than the other effect variation display, the one effect variation display is shortened to the end timing of the other effect variation display (forced termination). When the one effect variation display ends earlier than the other effect variation display, the one effect variation display is configured to be extended to the end timing of the other effect variation display. May be good. In this case, it is possible to suggest and teach that the jackpot state has been won by utilizing the specific character display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character display from being replaced by another effect display.

In addition, the specific character display includes an extension effect display used when extending the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display, and a shortening effect display used when shortening the second effect variation display. May be prepared. In this case, it is possible to suddenly extend or shorten the effect variation display from which the specific character display is derived (leading to a mode of suggesting / teaching the winning of the jackpot state) while suppressing the feeling of strangeness.

In addition, in the high entry state, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display may be set to be relatively short, or only the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display is relatively short. It may be configured to be set short. Further, the second fluctuation time may be set relatively long in the low ball entry state, and the first fluctuation time may be set relatively long in the high ball entry state. The remaining time may be displayed to suggest or teach the first fluctuation time and the remaining time of the second fluctuation time.

(Xx) In the above embodiment, the jackpot state is generated only when the jackpot is won in the winning / failing lottery performed when the game ball enters the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. It may be configured so that a jackpot state can be generated by the condition device of. For example, if a big hit is not won in the winning / losing lottery, a small winning lottery is performed, and if the small winning is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened and the second variable winning device 32b is entered. Even when the ball is entered into the specific entry section 145, a big hit state is generated in which the first variable winning device 32b is opened (when the game ball enters the specific entry section 145). , It is also possible to apply it to a game machine such as (the right to generate (continue) a jackpot state is granted instead of the probability change mode).

Further, for example, in the first winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the first starting winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is won in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened with the first probability, and the normal mode and the time are shortened. Of the modes, the ratio in which the time reduction mode is given is set as the first ratio, and in the time reduction mode in which it is easy to win the ball entry support lottery and it is easy to enter the second variable winning device 32b, the second start is performed. In the second winning / failing lottery based on the winning ball to the winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is won in the small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened with a second probability, and the second variable winning device 32b is opened. In a game machine in which a game ball that has entered the ball enters the specific ball entry portion 145 at a second rate and a jackpot state occurs (the first variable winning device 32a continues to the jackpot state in which the open state is set). It is also possible to apply. When adopting this configuration, the game ball is won in the small hit state in the time reduction mode and the game ball is placed in the specific entry section 145, as compared with the case where the big hit state is won in the first win / fail lottery or the second win / fail lottery. It is easier to generate a big hit state by letting the ball enter, and it is faster when the small hit state is won and the game ball is put into the specific entry section 145. It is also possible to make it easy to select the jackpot type to which the mode is given.

(Yy; How to create a moving image) In the above embodiment, a moving image is generated by reading moving image data in which the contents from the beginning to the end are defined in advance, but 3DCG (three-dimensional computer) that renders in real time. Like the animation of graphics), it may be configured to generate a moving image according to the situation in real time (for example, create keyframes at any time according to the situation and connect the images). In addition, it is not necessary to use multiple layers, and only the video to be displayed is played (the video is generated at any time, or the keyframe is recreated when there is a change). It may be (created by making a plurality of layers conceptual and combining image objects as appropriate).

Further, in the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol is covered with the second moving image reproduced in the layer above the first moving image reproduced in the predetermined layer as a visible display. The visual mode of the display device 42 is configured to switch from the first moving image of the predetermined layer to the second moving image of the upper layer, but the timing of switching the first moving image without using a plurality of layers. After playing up to, the playback (generation) of the first moving image may be stopped and the playback (generation) of the second moving image may be started. In addition, if it is not possible to secure sufficient time to prepare for switching from the first moving image to the second moving image (the trigger for switching occurs in a hurry), the timing of switching may be changed to a still image or movement. It may be configured to read out a small amount of information (which can be displayed immediately) such as a small moving image and derive it for the time being. Further, at the timing of the switching, the movable accessory that appears and disappears in front of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be in a protruding state. In addition, when the cut-in effect is derived or the movable accessory is popped out in the decorative pattern display device 42 as described above, the expectation of the special gaming state which is advantageous for the player is changed (game). Therefore, in order to switch the moving image without changing the degree of expectation for the special advantageous state, the cut-in is performed as in the above embodiment. It is desirable to shift from video to video without interposing production. Further, without using a plurality of layers, a plurality of videos may be generated at the same time and one of them may be configured to be visually displayed, or when a video that is not visually displayed is also visually displayed. It may be configured so that it can be grasped how far it has progressed so that it can be visually recognized when the video to be visually displayed is switched (at least, the pattern of the video and the video concerned). There should be information on when to generate the image).

(ZZ; Production setting during jackpot state) When setting the production of the jackpot state performed at the start of the jackpot state, "character introduction image", "winning character video", "V winning challenge production", and "probability change promotion challenge production" After determining the derivation timing of "specific payout number display" and predicting (estimating) the derivation timing of "specific character video", the derivation timing of "holding continuous challenge production" is determined. Although it has been decided, the order in which the derivation timing is decided is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, the derivation timing of the specific character moving image is set so as to avoid the derivation timing of the specific payout number display, but the specific payout is set after the derivation timing of the specific character moving image is set first. The derivation timing of the numerical display may be predicted, and when both overlap, the derivation timing of the specific character moving image may be changed.

However, when the derivation timings overlap in the effect display, it is desirable to first determine the derivation timing of the one that does not change the derivation timing (the one with the higher priority). It should be noted that the probabilistic promotion challenge effect may be derived only when the mini-game in the jackpot state is successful.

Further, in the above embodiment, regarding the setting of the derivation timing of the specific character moving image, the derivation is performed at a predetermined timing in the same manner as in the "character introduction image", "V winning challenge production", and "probability change promotion challenge". (For example, in the jackpot state of "15RS", it is set as the third jackpot movie, and in the jackpot state of "8RS" and "8RN", it is set as the first jackpot movie). Further, after setting the derivation timing of the specific character video, if the effect display set to have a higher priority than the specific character video is set to overlap with the specific character video, one specific character video is added later. The process of shifting the characters in the order of Performs a process of executing another character moving image during the period. Then, when it is determined that they are duplicated, if the effect display determined to be duplicated is an effect display having a higher priority than the specific character moving image, the specific character moving image is further shifted in the next order. A process of determining whether or not the display is duplicated with the disapproval display and a process of setting another character moving image (for example, selected by lottery) instead of the deviated specific character moving image are performed. The process of shifting the specific character moving image later is continued until the setting of the specific character moving image is performed or the confirmation of the final round of the jackpot round is completed.

However, in order to suppress the number of processes such as shifting the derivation timing as much as possible, it is desirable to set the specific character moving image at a timing that does not overlap with the above-mentioned unauthorized effect from the beginning as in the above-described embodiment.

In addition, if the effect display determined to overlap with the specific character video is a production display with a lower priority than the specific character video after the derivation timing of the specific character video is shifted, the priority is changed. A process of shifting the low effect display to a timing that does not overlap with the specific character moving image (or a process of canceling the effect having the low priority) and a setting process of deriving the specific character moving image at the shifted destination timing are performed.

In addition, for example, at the start of each jackpot round, it is determined whether or not there is a high possibility that a specific payout number display is derived in the jackpot round, and it is determined that the specific payout number display is high, and the specific character is duplicated in the jackpot round. When it is determined that the moving image is derived, the derivation timing of the specific character moving image may be changed (for example, it may be shifted to the next timing).

(Aaa; effect setting during normal game state) In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the total number of acquired balls may be displayed and the specific payout number display may be derived. The derivation time (length) of the specific payout number display may be changed depending on the situation. Further, the derivation timing of the specific payout number display may be shifted backward as long as it is within a predetermined predetermined time.

In addition, when the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the predetermined remaining number of times (for example, the remaining half, the remaining 10 times, 3 times, 2 times) is set at the beginning of the effect variation display. , Last, etc.) may be configured to derive the remaining number display. The remaining number of times display is a display in which derivation cannot be stopped, and when it overlaps with the specific character display, for example, both are displayed in a visually recognizable manner (the stock points may be accumulated so as to be accumulated). , Parts production may be added). The derivation time (length) of the remaining number of times display may be changed according to the situation.

Furthermore, with respect to the pending production fluctuation display (variation information), is there an element (specific payout number display, remaining number display, etc.) that may require some setting change due to duplication with the specific character display? It may be configured to determine whether or not. In this case, the process related to the derivation of the specific character display at the time of setting each effect variation display can be made relatively smooth.

(Bbb; Specific content display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing) In the above embodiment, as the specific content display in which the specific character display is derived at any timing, the effect variation display and the jackpot state are used. Although illustrated, the target of the specific content display is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the result display derived when the player's advantageous state (big hit state, high ball entry state, high probability state, etc.) ends (the number of big hits stacked without sandwiching the normal mode, the start of the big hit state, etc.) The number of game values acquired before shifting to the normal mode is displayed), the opening effect of the jackpot state, the specific ending effect of the jackpot state, the success screen derived when the predetermined effect is successful, the place A specific character display may be derived in at least a part of the derivation period on a fixed amount of game value or an acquisition screen when a predetermined privilege is acquired.

(Ccc; Introduction to jackpot state, hit character) In the above embodiment, the opening effect is configured so that a pattern corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpots is selected from a plurality of patterns. Regarding the production, the pattern corresponding to the winning character may be selected and reproduced, or a specific character appears at the opening production (always, by lottery, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied). Only) may be configured. Further, along with the display of the specific character or the hit character, the voice may correspond to the specific character or the hit character, or only the voice may correspond to the specific character or the hit character. In addition, in the case of the configuration in which the winning character (special teaching-related display) is derived in the opening effect, the configuration in which the winning character moving image or the character introduction image is used as the winning character may be omitted.

Further, in the above embodiment, the character introduction image in which the hit character appears and the hit character moving image are derived only in the jackpot state of "15RS", but are also derived in the jackpot state of "8RS" and "8RN". , Or it may be configured so that it may be derived (satisfying a predetermined condition or being determined by lottery). Further, when the introduction image of the character corresponding to the "hit character" is omitted, the "hit character moving image" may be set as the first big hit moving image. Further, the configuration (setting of the winning character moving image) in which the character introduction image and the pattern corresponding to the winning character are selected as the jackpot moving image that is visually displayed from the beginning after the character introducing image is completed may be omitted.

In addition, the effect display related to the hit character derived with the start of the jackpot state is not particularly limited, and for example, a predetermined hope is fulfilled by the effect variation display instead of the character introduction image. After the display is derived, the display that introduces the state of the subsequent hit character may be derived as the moving image corresponding to the first round or the first jackpot moving image. Further, the effect variation display in which the jackpot is taught and the effect display at the start of the jackpot state are associated with each other by the hit character, but the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration and can be linked with each other. All you need is.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the winning character moving image as the second special teaching related display and the disallowed display having priority over the specific character moving image overlap, the derivation timing of the winning character moving image is changed later. However, it may be configured to be derived in duplicate. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the specific character moving image can be derived is narrowed in the jackpot state due to the change in the derivation timing of the hit character moving image or the unauthorized display. Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, when the character introduction image as the first special teaching related display and the disapproval display (first disapproval display) having a higher priority than the specific character display overlap. Since neither of the derivation timings can be changed to, it is assumed that the derivation timing is duplicated (in the case of a low priority disallowed display, it may be duplicated, or the derivation timing of the disallowed display). May be changed).

(Ddd; specific character moving image) In the above embodiment, in the big hit moving image derived in the big hit state, the big hit moving image (specific character moving image) in which the specific character appears is limited to one time, and the specific character and the hit character are used. If they match, the winning character video is counted as a specific character video, and the setting of another specific character video is skipped, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. .. For example, the specific character moving image may be derived a plurality of times during the jackpot state (for example, the number of times is determined by lottery). That is, the number of times the specific character video is executed is determined, and the number of counters that store the number of times is basically specified until it becomes "0" (when there is no time to perform the specific character). It may be configured so that the character moving image is set. In addition, when it is found that the "winning character video", "V winning challenge production", "specific payout number display", and "probability change promotion challenge production" overlap with the "specific character video" after the start of the jackpot state. Therefore, when the movement destination (time room for derivation) of the "specific character moving image" cannot be secured, the specific character moving image may be omitted (a non-specific character moving image is applied instead).

In addition, as the number of times the specific character video is derived increases, the possibility that the probability variation mode will be given after the jackpot state ends increases (for example, the expectation level increases with two derivations and the derivation with three times increases. It may be confirmed). In this case, in a situation where the "probability change promotion challenge effect" can be performed (a situation in which the decorative symbol display device 42 does not give a definitive instruction as to whether or not the probability change mode is given after the jackpot state ends), the "specific character" You can add new fun to the derivation of "videos".

Further, there may be a pattern in which all the jackpot moving images are specific character moving images. Further, even if the "specific character" is derived from the "hit character video", the "hit character video" may be configured not to be discriminated as the "specific character video" (in this case, the jackpot in which the specific character appears). The video is derived twice). Further, it is also possible to provide a moving image that can be derived only when it is specified as a specific character. For example, a plurality of moving images spoken by the character may be prepared for each character, and the moving image spoken by the specific character may be derived during the jackpot state.

In addition, when a predetermined character becomes a winning character and appears continuously on the effect variation display, the opening effect, and the character introduction screen, the character is configured to be continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device. May be good. In other words, after the decorative symbol is stopped in the last scene of the effect variable display, it becomes a special mode in which only the display character jumps out of the last scene, the decorative symbol is erased, and the opening effect is started. Even if it becomes, the winning character will continue to be displayed at the same position or within the range of natural movement from that position, and even if the character introduction screen of the first round is displayed, it will continue to be displayed (for a while). You may.

(Eee; Rounding up of the effect display) In the above embodiment, if the specific character display and the disallowed display partially overlap at the start of the specific character display and the start of the disallowed display, whichever It is configured to take measures such as changing the derivation timing of one of them, omitting (stopping) the disallowed display, and stocking the specific character display, but the specific character display and the disallowed display overlap. Depending on the degree of, different measures (determine whether to simply stop the specific character display or to stop the specific character display and reset the same specific character display) are configured to be taken. You may.

Hereinafter, when it is determined by the duplication determination process of whether or not at least a part of the disapproval display and the specific character display (specific effect display) overlaps, the derivation timing is not changed. The derivation timing on the display side is changed) is called the "first disapproval display", and the disapproval display in which the derivation timing is changed (the derivation timing on the specific effect display side is not changed) is called the "second disapproval display". An example of the embodiment will be described with reference to.

(Eee-1) For example, if there is a timing that it is sufficient to have the user visually recognize the effect variation display or the specific character display derived in the jackpot state, the display after that timing is cut. It may be configured as possible.

More specifically, when the button effect requesting the operation of the effect button 125 is set to the specific character display, the specific character display prompts the operation of the effect button 125 and waits for the operation of the effect button 125. The effect button 125 is still in the standby state, the state in which the reaction effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 is performed, and the effect button 125 is valid even after the button validity period in which the operation of the effect button 125 is valid as a trigger for deriving the reaction effect has elapsed. It is composed of a state in which a non-operation effect is derived, which is derived when the operation is not performed. The sub-control device 262 is switched on / off at the start of the reaction effect and the non-operation effect (or the lapse of a specified time from the start) (for example, the sub control device 262 is turned on at the start of the specific character display, and the reaction effect, And, it is assumed that a progress determination flag (which is turned off at the start of the non-operation effect) is provided.

Then, at the start of the first disallowed display, when the specific character display is being derived and it is determined that the specific character display and the first disallowed display overlap, the progress determination flag is confirmed and specified. It is determined whether or not the character display has completed the reaction effect or the non-operation effect (these correspond to a specific program) (the determination function corresponds to the progress determination means). Therefore, when it is determined that the specific character display has completed the reaction effect or the non-operation effect, the setting for canceling the specific character display is made, and both the reaction effect and the non-operation effect are completed. If it is determined that the specific character is not displayed, the specific character display is stopped and the specific character display is derived again (for example, shift to the next order, search for a timing that does not overlap with the first disallowed display). To be set to) is performed.

With the above configuration, when the specific character display has not completed the specific program (for example, reaction effect or no operation effect), that is, the degree of duplication is large, and the main part of the specific character display is still present. If it is not finished, the specific character display is temporarily terminated, but the derivation timing of the same specific character display is set again so that the specific character display can be visually recognized again.

On the other hand, when the specific character display has completed the specific program, that is, when the degree of duplication is small and the main part of the specific character display has already ended, the specific character display is stopped there. The visual mode is switched to the first disapproval display. Therefore, even though most of the specific character display is finished, the last small part of the specific character display overlaps with the first disallowed display, so that the specific character display is derived again ( For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the same specific character display is derived with the first disapproval display in between). Therefore, basically, based on the concept of visually recognizing the specific character display and the first disallowed display from the beginning to the end, the last part of the specific character display is displayed within a range that does not affect the contents. By making it possible to cut, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific character display is reduced, and while simplifying the process, the flow of a series of effect displays including the specific character display and the first disallowed display is relatively smooth. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to repeated display of the same specific character.

It should be noted that, for example, in layer 1 of FIG. 56, the moving image of character A, which is the second big hit moving image derived after the start of the big hit round, is regarded as a “specific character moving image”, and the progress of the big hit round is the same. If the progress is faster than the progress of the figure, the 5000 shot achievement display as the first disapproval display may overlap with the moving image of the character A. Then, at the start of the 5000 shot achievement display, it is determined whether or not the moving image of character A (specific character display) is being derived, and if affirmative determination is made, whether or not the specific program of character A is completed. May be configured to discriminate. In addition, regarding the determination of whether or not the specific program has been completed, as in the case of the specific character movie, at the start of the specific character display, a specific program (a series of actions, etc., which one wants to see) or a predetermined For those that can grasp the completion timing of (such as teaching information) (those that do not change the completion timing of the specific program in the middle), a progress determination timer that can measure the time until the completion of the specific program is provided. At the start of the specific character moving image, the progress determination timer may be configured to set a value corresponding to the time until the specific program is completed. In this case, at the start of the first disapproval display, if the overlap between the first disapproval display and the specific character display is confirmed and the value of the progress determination timer is "0", the specific character display is stopped. Such processing is performed. In addition, considering that the last part (for example, 1 second, 2 seconds, etc.) may be cut in the jackpot movie or the like, it is desirable that the movie is not uncomfortable even if it is cut.

(Eee-2) Further, in the first disapproval display, the sub-control device 262 derives a specific display (a display that teaches success in the V winning challenge effect or the probabilistic promotion challenge effect) (or). A requirement determination flag that is switched on / off (for example, turned on at the start of the first disallowed display and turned off at the start of a specific display) is provided at the lapse of a specified time from the start of the display. May be.

In this case, at the start of the specific character display, the duplication discrimination process for discriminating the presence or absence of duplication between the specific character display and the first disallowed display is performed, and when it is determined that the specific character display is duplicated, the requirement discrimination flag is confirmed. , Determines whether or not the specific display (corresponding to the requirement program) is completed (the determination function corresponds to the requirement determination means), and determines that the specific display (teaching by) is not completed. If so, the derivation timing of the specific character display is changed so that it does not overlap with the first disallowed display, and when it is determined that the specific display has been completed, the first disallowed display is stopped. do.

With the above configuration, it is determined that the first disapproval display is started at a timing overlapping with the specific character display in the situation where the derivation of the specific character display after a predetermined time is determined in advance. In that case, the first disapproval display has not completed the requirement program (for example, a display indicating that the V winning challenge production was successful) (for example, it is not taught that the V winning challenge production was successful), that is, If the degree of duplication is large, change the derivation timing of the specific character display so that it does not overlap with the first disallowed display so that the entire first disallowed display and the specific character display can be visually recognized. It is supposed to be.

On the other hand, the first disapproval display has completed the requirement program, that is, the degree of duplication is small, and the display that should be visually recognized by the first disapproval display has already been displayed (the information to be conveyed is transmitted). If it is finished), the first disapproval display is stopped there, and the visual mode is switched to the specific character display. Therefore, even though the necessary part of the first disallowed display is completed, the last small part of the first disallowed display overlaps with the specific character display, so that the derivation timing of the specific character display is performed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is necessary to change (search for and set a period during which a specific character display can be derived, and in some cases, change the derivation timing of other effect displays). Therefore, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific character display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of a series of effect displays including the specific character display and the first disallowed display is made relatively smooth. The action effect is further achieved.

(Eee-3) Further, in the configuration of the above (eee-1), when the second disapproval display is started, it is determined that the second disapproval display and the specific character display overlap, and the progress determination flag is used. When it is determined that the specific character display has not progressed to the specific program, the derivation timing of the second unauthorized display is changed, and when it is determined that the specific character display has progressed to the specific program. , The specific character display may be stopped. In this case, the flow of a series of effect display including the specific character display and the second disapproval display is relatively smooth while reducing the process of changing the derivation timing of the second disapproval display and simplifying the process. Can be.

(Eee-4) In the above embodiment, the specific character moving image is derived by reading the effect display data of 15 seconds defined as the time from the start to the end of the jackpot moving image. The effect display data for the jackpot movie may be data capable of deriving a series of effect displays longer than the time defined as the time from the start to the end of the jackpot movie.

That is, in the configuration of the above (eee-1), when the first disapproval display is duplicated for the specific character video for which the specific program has not been completed yet, the specific character video is canceled (forced termination) and the first. After the disapproval display ends, the canceled specific character movie is derived. Here, when the canceled specific character moving image is derived from the beginning again, there is a concern that the beginning part of the specific character moving image will be repeated, which will lead to a decrease in interest.

In this respect, the specific character moving image as the regular specific effect display is used as a periodic specific effect display storage means as a series of effect displays (for example, 45 seconds) longer than a certain time length of the jackpot video as the regular effect display. It is derived based on a part of the periodic specific effect display data stored in the periodic specific effect display storage area. Further, a progress storage area as a progress storage means for storing the progress status of the specific character movie at the end of the specific character movie is provided. Then, based on the storage information of the progress storage area, the periodic specific effect display data stored in the periodic specific effect display storage area is read out, and the specific character moving image is started.

When adopting this configuration, each jackpot video (regular specific production display data) is not completed in one derivation time of the jackpot video, which makes it uncomfortable no matter where it is interrupted or restarted. It is a production display with few. Further, when the first disapproval display is duplicated for the specific character video for which the specific program has not been completed yet, the specific character video is canceled (forced termination), and after the first disapproval display is completed, the specific character is displayed. It is possible to derive the video from the continuation of the place where it was canceled or from the vicinity (for example, a little before). For this reason, by repeating the beginning part of the same periodic specific effect display, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest is lowered, and the specific character video in which the derivation timing is changed is displayed as the first disapproval display. Even if it is derived at the timing of the start of the first jackpot video after the end, it is possible to avoid a decline in interest.

(Fff; sample display) In the above embodiment, a sample of a specific character display may be derived so as to be derived. For example, by selecting the sample display of each character on the character introduction screen and performing an input operation, a part of the specific character display is derived in such a way that it overlaps with the display that would normally be disallowed. It may be configured as follows.

(Ggg; effect using specific character display) In the above embodiment, basically, the specific character moving image is always derived once in the jackpot state as the first effect display. When setting the character movie, it is determined whether or not the pending variable display includes a (specific) jackpot (whether or not it is a so-called "holding sequence"), and the pending sequence is determined. If it is determined that the character is determined to be so, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not a setting for not deriving the specific character moving image is performed. If the specific character moving image is not derived in response to the pending sequence, it is desirable that the pending sequence challenge effect is not derived, or even if it is derived, it does not succeed. Further, in addition to the configuration in which the specific character moving image is not derived in response to the holding connection, or instead, the specific character moving image of the pattern that is not selected in the case of not holding the holding connection may be derived. In addition, in the hold-ream jackpot state (hold-ream special game state), a specific character is set as the hit character, and the jackpot video becomes only the specific character video (it is possible to simply increase the number selected as the jackpot video). ), A specific character moving image of a pattern (for example, a different visual mode) that is not selected when the hold ream is not in the jackpot state may be derived.

It should be noted that the hold continuous challenge effect of the above embodiment is set at the start of the jackpot state, and suggests / teaches that the fluctuation information held at the start of the jackpot state includes the jackpot. Although it was a thing, the fluctuation information held at the time when the hold consecutive challenge effect is derived includes the hit information (that is, the fluctuation display held after the start of the jackpot state is also included in the judgment). It may be suggested / taught that the information is given.

In addition, in the jackpot state of "15RS", when "holding" is performed, the character introduction image may not correspond to the hit character, or it may be visually recognized from the beginning after the character introduction image (first round). As the jackpot moving image that can be derived as possible, there may be a case where the hit character moving image corresponding to the hit character is not selected. Furthermore, when the hit character is not introduced in the character introduction image, the hit character video is set more than usual as the jackpot video after the break, or is not usually set, or the ratio of being set is small. It may be configured so that a winning character moving image is set. In addition, after the character introduction image (first round), if a jackpot video of a character other than the hit character is derived as a jackpot video visibly derived from the beginning, it will be used as one of the subsequent jackpot videos. It may be configured so that the character moving image is derived (at the timing when it is not originally derived). Further, the hit character moving image derived at a timing different from usual may be configured so that the visual mode is different from usual.

In the example of the embodiment (ggg), the content taught by a different effect (uncomfortable effect) is defined as "holding ream", but another thing (for example, a probability change mode is given after the jackpot state). Etc.) may be configured to be taught. In addition, the discomfort effect is not intended for the round period of the jackpot state, but for the effect variation display in the normal mode and the time reduction mode and from the start to the end of the probability variation mode, and the subject of teaching is the occurrence of the jackpot state and the reach state. May occur. That is, for example, a specific effect period is provided such that the specific character display is derived at least once in the effect variation display, and despite the specific effect period, the effect variation display in which the jackpot is taught is specified. It may be configured so that a discomfort effect such that the character display is not derived may be derived.

Further, for example, in the jackpot state and the effect variation display, the appearance of a specific character can be associated with the provision of a probability variation mode, the occurrence of a hold ream, the occurrence of a jackpot state, or the like, which is advantageous for the player. The first mission effect display may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the specific character display is surely visually recognized, and as in the above-described embodiment, the effect of preventing the specific character display from overlapping with other effect displays is further achieved.

Further, for example, in the jackpot state or the effect variation display, the timing at which the specific character display is derived at least once and the timing at which the specific character display is derived, or the number of times the specific character display is derived, is advantageous for the player. The second mission effect display may be performed so as to be associated with the occurrence of such a state. For example, in a configuration in which the upper limit of the time reduction mode exists in a plurality of patterns, the upper limit of the time reduction mode may be set to increase as the derivation of the specific character moving image is delayed in the jackpot state. Further, for example, the jackpot expectation may be increased as the number of appearances of the specific character display increases in the effect variation display. Further, for example, in the effect variation display, the jackpot expectation is increased as the specific character display is derived at a later timing, and the effect button 125 is operated after the effect variation display is started. , The roulette effect suggesting the timing of deriving the specific character display may be performed. By the way, when the latter half of the super reach production (final production) is selected, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the first half of the super reach production is suggested, and it is suggested that the latter half of the super reach production (stopping fluctuation). In that case, it may be configured to teach that the effect that appears to have failed once succeeds in reversal, that is, that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed.

The timing at which the derivation of the specific character display is associated with the suggestion of a predetermined state is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a part of the round period of the jackpot state. ..

(Hhh; setting of jackpot video) In the above embodiment, a plurality of jackpot video patterns derived in order are determined at the start of the jackpot state, but the jackpot (like the background video in the probability variation mode) is determined. A jackpot movie that is longer than the length of time of the state may be prepared in advance, and at the start of the jackpot state, it may be configured to determine where to start from the jackpot movie. For example, character A's jackpot video, character B's jackpot video, character C's jackpot video, character D's jackpot video, character E's jackpot video, character F's jackpot video, character H's jackpot video, and character I's jackpot video. The moving images are displayed in order, and the character I's big hit moving image is followed by the character A's big hit moving image. At the start of the big hit, a lottery may be used to determine which big hit moving image to start with. Alternatively, the jackpot video that was last displayed in the previous jackpot may be stored, and in the current jackpot state, the jackpot video may be started from that jackpot video.

Further, as a setting of the jackpot video in such a configuration, for example, when the length of the round period of the jackpot state of 8 rounds is generally 3 to 5 of the jackpot video, it is determined at the start of the round period. When the jackpot movie is started, there is usually a case where the specific character movie is not derived during the jackpot state.

In this respect, the specific character moving image may be configured to be set as the first or second big hit moving image that is surely contained in the round period of the big hit state. That is, it is determined whether or not the specific character video is set as the first or second jackpot video (resetting unnecessary determination process), and the specific character video is originally the first or second jackpot. If it is set as a video, you can leave it as it is. On the other hand, when a non-specific character video character is set as the first or second jackpot video, the specific character video is set to either the first or second jackpot video by lottery. Decide whether to set it forcibly.

For example, in addition to the combination storage area, a compulsory video storage area for storing a pattern of a specific character video forcibly set is provided, and a compulsory video flag is set in each storage area of the combination storage area to set a specific character at the start of a big hit. The forced video flag of the storage area of the combination storage area that is supposed to be forcibly set to set the video is set to on, and the forced video flag of the storage area of the corresponding combination storage area is turned on at the start of each jackpot character video. If it is set, as the forced setting process, the specific character video stored in the forced video storage area is first derived (and the forced video flag is turned off), and then the forced video flag is turned off. The jackpot character moving image of the storage area may be derived.

In this case, the specific character moving image is almost always derived from the beginning to the end without interruption in the jackpot state. Therefore, it is possible to surely increase the chances of deriving the specific character moving image that the player is looking forward to. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a large number of production patterns are provided by diversifying the production, it is possible to more enjoy the specific character moving image. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

Further, if the specific character video is originally set to either the first or second jackpot video, the process of setting the specific character video to either the first or second jackpot video. It is configured not to perform (forced setting processing). Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Furthermore, it is possible to maintain the flow of the production display (big hit movie) during the original round period as much as possible.

In addition, the jackpot moving image replaced with the specific character moving image is shifted in the order following it. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the flow of the production display (big hit movie) during the original round period as much as possible. In addition, although the player could not set it as a specific character display, if the next favorite effect (character) is replaced with a specific character video and omitted, the interest will be reduced. Such a situation can be avoided.

It should be noted that the jackpot moving image replaced with the specific character moving image may be overwritten with the specific character moving image so that the derivation may be postponed. In addition, if the specific character moving images are set in an order other than the order in which they almost always fit in the round period, but are set in an order in which there is a high possibility of being derived, the specific character video may be left as it is, or the specific character display may be omitted ( You may skip). Further, for example, in a configuration in which a specific character cannot be selected, it is determined whether or not a specific character is set after the jackpot moving image is set (pattern determination process) (forced determination process is performed). , When it is determined that it is set, the setting (forced setting process, etc.) is performed so that the entire specific character video is always within the jackpot round period as described above, and a negative determination is made. In addition, such processing may be configured to be skipped.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the hit character video and the specific character video are set, and then the other jackpot videos are set. However, after the jackpot video is set, the specific character video is set. May be configured so that Further, in the case of adopting the configuration for the above-mentioned (hhh) hold sequence, the specific character moving image may be intentionally not derived in the jackpot state. That is, for example, when it is determined that there is a pending ream, and the specific character moving image is derived in the jackpot state, the specific character moving image is not derived and the next big hit moving image is derived, or , The jackpot moving image to be replaced with a specific character moving image may be set at random.

[Additional Notes]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments are described below.

A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, it is configured so that various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state, and there are many players who go to the game hall looking forward to seeing a specific effect.

By the way, in general, the types of productions are increased and the combination of productions is changed to diversify the productions. If the production that is the centerpiece of the gaming machine is hindered by other productions, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely allowing a player to visually recognize an effect to be visually recognized. ..

Means A-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub control means
An effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display, and
Based on a predetermined specific display prohibition condition that prohibits the derivation of the specific effect display, a prohibition period specifying means capable of specifying a specific display prohibition period that meets the specific display prohibition condition is provided.
Regarding the setting of the specific content display from which the specific effect display is derived at any timing, the specific display prohibition period in the specific content display is specified, and any of the periods that do not correspond to the specific display prohibition period in the specific content display. A gaming machine characterized in that a setting for deriving the specific effect display is made at such a timing.

According to the means A-1, it is possible to prevent the specific effect display from being derived during the specific display prohibition period. That is, for example, when the specific effect display is an effect display that the player wants to see, the specific effect display is another effect (overlapping of the effect display, protrusion of the movable accessory to the front of the effect display means, etc.). Avoid problems such as not being able to demonstrate the true value of the specific production display, or not being fully enjoyed (for example, different from what you saw in the promotion video, and different from what you expected). be able to. Further, for example, when the specific effect display is an effect display with a high visual motivation of the player, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific effect display is hindered by other displays and the player accumulates stress. As a result, it is possible to reliably visually recognize the specific effect display, which is preferable for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to develop a game in which the specific effect display is effectively utilized.

Further, at the start of the specific content display, a period that does not correspond to the specific display prohibition period (timing at which the derivation of the specific effect display is permitted) is specified, and the specific effect display is set to be performed in that period. Therefore, for example, at the stage when the specific effect display is started, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display in order to avoid duplication between the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period. Can be done. Therefore, the smooth progress of the specific content display can be achieved. Furthermore, it can be visually recognized (without interruption) through the specific effect display.

The "specific effect display" may be preset for each model of the gaming machine (for example, the effect display from which the image object used as the motif of the gaming machine is derived, a promotion video, or the like is also introduced. It may be possible to specify it by the player, or it may be configured to be specified by the player's game history (game information so far), or it may be randomly specified on the game machine side. Alternatively, it may be configured to be specified in association with the date and time.

Means A-2. The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein a predetermined effect display in the effect display means can be specified as the specific effect display in response to an input to the game machine by the player.

According to the means A-2, the effect display in the effect display means can be brought closer to the player's taste, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

Means A-3. The specific content display is configured by a composite effect composed by connecting a plurality of effect displays.
The gaming machine according to means A-1 or A-2, wherein the specific display prohibition period can be set in response to each effect display of the composite effect.

According to the means A-3, it is possible to easily specify the specific display prohibition period, and it is easy to set the derivation timing of the specific effect display while avoiding the specific display prohibition period.

Means A-4. As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3, wherein the specific display prohibition period is a derivation period of the disapproval display.

According to the means A-4, it is possible to prevent duplication of the specific effect display and the disallowed display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the visibility of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is lowered due to the overlap between the specific effect display and the disapproval display.

Means A-5. The disapproval display includes a first disapproval display and a second disapproval display.
In the duplication determination process, when the duplication between the specific effect display and the first disallowed display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed to avoid the duplication.
When the duplication of the specific effect display and the second disapproval display is confirmed in the duplication determination process, the derivation timing of the second disapproval display is changed to avoid the duplication. The gaming machine according to means A-4.

According to the means A-5, the display that does not shift the timing that is performed in synchronization with the behavior of other gaming machines (timing of the movement of the movable member, etc.) or the display that does not shift the timing is the first. By setting as 1 disapproval display, it is possible to avoid duplication with the specific effect display while avoiding a situation in which the derivation timing of the first disapproval display is changed. On the other hand, the display that can give some flexibility to the timing of derivation is set as the second disapproval display, so that the specific effect display is prioritized over the second disapproval display, and the specific effect display is derived. It is possible to secure a certain period of time.

It should be noted that "the first disapproval display is a notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time". In this case, by delaying the derivation timing of the notification display, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the information obtained from the notification display becomes old, its value is diminished, its meaning is lost, or it becomes inconsistent.

Means A-6. In the first disapproval display, when setting the specific content display, the timing of derivation is determined before the specific effect display, and the derivation period is set as the specific display prohibition period.
In the second disapproval display, the timing of derivation is determined after the specific effect display when setting the specific content display, and the timing of the derivation is the period during which the specific effect display is displayed in the specific content display. The gaming machine according to means A-5, wherein the timing is set to any of the periods not corresponding to the above.

According to the means A-6, the specific effect display is set at a timing avoiding the first disapproval display in which the timing of derivation is determined before the specific effect display (the first disapproval display is the specific effect). Priority is set higher than the display). On the other hand, regarding the second disapproval display, which can give some flexibility to the derivation timing, the derivation timing is determined so as not to overlap with the derivation timing of the specific effect display after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is determined. Is determined (the second disapproval display is set to have a lower priority than the specific effect display). Therefore, in the specific content display, by giving priority to the specific effect display over the second disapproval display (without changing the timing of derivation), it is possible to more reliably secure the period for which the specific effect display is derived. Furthermore, the timing at which the specific effect display is derived can be narrowed down to some extent, and the player who is looking forward to the specific effect display by grasping the derivation timing should be fully prepared for the specific effect display (do not miss it from the beginning). You can prepare for shooting, etc.).

Means A-7. A period payout total number counting means for counting the total number of game values paid to the player in a predetermined period is provided.
A specific payout number display that teaches that the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means has reached the specified number is configured to be derivable.
The derivation period of the specific display number display is configured as the specific display prohibition period.
Specific that calculates the timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means is likely to reach the specified number in the predetermined period in which the number of game values is counted by the period payout total number counting means. Equipped with a means for calculating the number of payouts
At the start of the specific content display, the specific content display timing calculation means predicts a timing at which the specific payout number display is likely to be derived in the specific content effect display, and any of the periods that does not overlap with the timing. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 No. A-6, wherein the setting for deriving the specific effect display is performed at the timing of.

According to the means A-7, the specific payout number display timing calculation means can calculate the timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means is likely to reach the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly take measures such as making the derivation timing of the specific effect display almost eliminated according to the prediction of the timing at which the specific payout number display is derived.

Means A-8. At the start of the specific effect display, a duplication determination process is performed to determine whether or not the specific effect display overlaps with at least a part of the specific display prohibition period.
When it is determined by the duplication determination process that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of the featured means A-1 to means A-7.

According to the means A-8, at least one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is scheduled after the specific content display is started, that is, after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. By changing, it is possible to grasp at the start of the specific effect display that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap. Therefore, when the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period are likely to overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period can be changed (immediately before the start of the specific effect display). , It is possible to more reliably prevent the overlap between the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period.

Means A-9. At the start of the specific display prohibition period, a duplication determination process is performed to determine whether or not the specific display prohibition period overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect display.
When it is determined by the duplication determination process that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of the featured means A-1 to means A-8.

According to the means A-9, at least one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period is scheduled after the specific content display is started, that is, after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. By changing, it is possible to grasp at the start of the specific display prohibition period that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap. Therefore, when the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period are likely to overlap, it is possible to change the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period (immediately before the start of the specific display prohibition period). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent duplication of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period.

Means A-10. Any of the means A-1 to A-9, which comprises a period specifying means capable of specifying the specific display prohibition period and the period other than the specific display prohibition period in the specific content display. The described gaming machine.

According to the means A-10, it is relatively easy to determine whether or not the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap, and further, it is determined that the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period overlap. If this is the case, it is possible to simplify the process of changing the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period so as to avoid the duplication.

Means A-11. Among the effect displays that can be derived in the specific content display, the specific effect display specifying means that makes it possible to specify the effect display that can be the specific effect display in the specific content display this time is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-10, which comprises referring to the specific effect display specific means when setting an effect display other than the specific effect display in the specific content display. ..

According to the means A-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the specific effect display is processed as an effect display other than the specific effect display and overlaps with the specific display prohibition period.

Means A-12. The specific effect display can be selected as one of the effect displays derived within the period, and the mission effect in which the derivation of the specific effect display and the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player are associated with each other. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-11, characterized in that a display is provided.

When the configuration of means A-12 is adopted, it is preferable that the specific effect display is surely visually recognized, and the above-mentioned effects such as preventing the specific effect display from overlapping with other effect displays are further achieved. Become.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, it is configured so that various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state, and there are many players who go to the game hall looking forward to seeing a specific effect.

By the way, in general, the types of productions are increased and the combination of productions is changed to diversify the productions. If the production that is the centerpiece of the gaming machine is hindered by other productions, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely allowing a player to visually recognize an effect to be visually recognized. ..

Means B-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display.
As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited.
Whether or not at least a part of the specific effect display and the disallowed display overlaps when the specific effect display is started in the specific content display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing. Duplicate discrimination processing is performed,
When it is determined by the duplication determination process that the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is changed. A game machine to play.

According to the means B-1, at the start of the specific effect display in the specific content display, it is determined whether or not the specific effect display overlaps with the disallowed display, so that the disallowed display is being derived. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the specific effect display is duplicated when it is newly started, or that it overlaps with the unauthorized effect that is started after a predetermined time from the start of the specific effect display. Become. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably grasp the overlap between the specific effect display and the disallowed display, and the disapproved display is changed to the permitted display, which changes the timing of derivation of at least one of the specific character and the disallowed display. By changing or canceling the disapproval display, it is possible to more reliably avoid duplication of the specific effect display and the disapproval display. As a result, it is possible to reliably visually recognize the specific effect display, which is preferable for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to develop a game in which the specific effect display is effectively utilized.

In particular, even if there is a discrepancy between the derivation timing of the specific effect display and the derivation timing of the disallowed display due to the progress of the specific effect display, the specific effect is displayed at the start timing of the specific effect display. It is possible to surely grasp whether or not the display overlaps with the unauthorized display, and if it is possible to grasp it, it is possible to sufficiently take measures such as avoiding the duplication as described above.

Means B-2. In the specific content display, when the disapproval display is started, a duplication determination process is performed to determine whether or not at least a part of the disapproval display and the specific effect display overlap. The gaming machine according to means B-1.

According to the means B-2, at the start of the disapproval display in the specific content display, it is determined whether or not the disapproval display overlaps with the specific effect display, so that the specific effect display is being derived. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the disapproval display will be duplicated due to the new start, or that it will be duplicated with the specific effect display that is started after a predetermined time from the start of the disapproval display. Become. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably grasp the overlap between the specific effect display and the disallowed display, and the disapproved display is changed to the permitted display, which changes the timing of derivation of at least one of the specific character and the disallowed display. By changing or canceling the disapproval display, it is possible to more reliably avoid duplication of the specific effect display and the disapproval display.

In particular, even if there is a discrepancy between the derivation timing of the specific effect display and the derivation timing of the disapproval display due to the progress of the specific content effect, the disapproval is performed at the start timing of the disapproval display. It is possible to surely grasp whether or not the display overlaps with the specific effect display, and if it is possible to grasp it, it is possible to sufficiently take measures such as avoiding the duplication as described above.

Means B-3. The disapproval display includes a first disapproval display and a second disapproval display.
In the duplication determination process, when the duplication between the specific effect display and the first disallowed display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed to avoid the duplication.
When the duplication of the specific effect display and the second disapproval display is confirmed in the duplication determination process, the derivation timing of the second disapproval display is changed to avoid the duplication. The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2.

According to the means B-3, the display that does not shift the timing that is performed in synchronization with the behavior of other gaming machines (timing of the movement of the movable member, etc.) or the display that does not shift the timing is the first. By setting as 1 disapproval display, it is possible to avoid duplication with the specific effect display while avoiding a situation in which the derivation timing of the first disapproval display is changed. On the other hand, the display that can give some flexibility to the timing of derivation is set as the second disapproval display, so that the specific effect display is prioritized over the second disapproval display, and the specific effect display is derived. It is possible to secure a certain period of time.

Even if the disapproval display and the specific effect display are derived at fixed timings, if the start and end triggers (update conditions) are different, the disapproval display derivation timing and the specific effect display are derived. There is a discrepancy with the derivation timing of. For example, when the specific effect display is an effect display that is updated after a certain period of time, while the disapproval display is an effect display that is updated when a certain time elapses or a predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the time until the predetermined condition is satisfied is not constant, the specific effect display and the disallowed display are initially set so as not to overlap, but the timings are shifted so as to overlap. Such a situation may occur.

Means B-4. When the duplication of the specific effect display and the first disapproval display is confirmed in the duplication determination process, the derivation timing of the specific effect display should be changed and the specific effect display should be derived. The gaming machine according to means B-3, wherein another effect display having the same time scale as the specific effect display is set during the period.

According to the means B-4, the display effect in which the specific effect display and the first disapproval display are supposed to be duplicated is simply omitted from the display effect, which makes the effect display feel uncomfortable. Can be avoided. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed, and the display mode in which the specific effect display does not overlap with the disallowed display can be enjoyed purely.

Means B-5. The specific content display is configured by a composite effect composed by connecting a plurality of effect displays.
The specific effect display can be set in response to each effect display of the composite effect.
In the duplication determination process, when it is determined that the specific effect display and the first disapproval display overlap, the specific effect display is changed to the timing of the effect display one after the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to any one of B-3 or B-4.

According to the means B-5, it is possible to easily specify the period of the disapproval display, and it is also possible to easily set the derivation timing of the specific effect display. Further, for example, when it is found that the specific effect display and the first disapproval display overlap at the start of the specific effect display or the start of the first disapproval display, the specific effect display is set to a subsequent timing. It is necessary to change it, but if the timing after the change is too late, it will be impossible to derive the specific effect display within the period of the specific content display when it becomes necessary to change it again. There is a concern that it will end up. In this regard, according to means B-5, when it becomes necessary to change the derivation timing of the specific effect display, the above concern is suppressed by setting the derivation timing of the specific effect display immediately after the initial derivation timing. can do.

Means B-6. In the duplication determination process, when it is determined that the specific effect display and the first disapproval display overlap, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed and derived within the period of the specific content effect. If the period cannot be secured, the specific effect display is canceled, and during the period in which the specific effect display was supposed to be derived, an effect display different from the specific effect display is derived and the specific effect display is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-5, wherein a specific effect related to the canceled specific effect display is derived.

According to the means B-6, even when there is no time to change the derivation timing of the specific effect display, the specific effect related to the specific effect display can be visually recognized. Therefore, the specific effect display and the first disapproval display overlap with each other, so that the specific effect display cannot be derived, which leads to a decrease in the interest of the player who was looking forward to the specific effect display. Such a situation can be suppressed.

Means B-7. As a specific effect related to the canceled specific effect display, the means B-6 is characterized in that the visual mode of the first disapproval display is changed to a visual mode related to the canceled specific effect display. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means B-7, even if the specific effect display overlaps with the first disapproval display and cannot be visually recognized, the first disapproval display is stopped in a visual mode related to the specific effect display (for example, it is canceled). Although it is not the specific effect display itself, it is a visual mode that can be treated as a specific effect display), so it is possible to suppress the situation where the player who was looking forward to the specific effect display is less interested. Can be done. In addition, the visual mode of the first disapproval display can be enjoyed as a rare effect display.

Means B-8. When the specific effect display and the permission display overlap, the visual recognition mode of the permission display during the period overlapping with the specific effect display is derived without overlapping with the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, characterized in that the mode is changed to a specific mode different from the mode.

According to the means B-8, it is possible to make the specific effect display easier to see, further enhance the effect of the specific effect display, such as emphasizing the specific effect display.

Means B-9. Regarding the setting of the specific content display, a setting is made in which the period during which the disapproval display is derived is specified in the specific content display, and the specific effect display is derived at any timing of the period during which the disapproval display is not derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8.

According to the means B-9, at the start of the specific content display, a period during which the disapproval display is not derived (timing at which the derivation of the specific effect display is permitted) is specified, and the specific effect display is derived during that period. Since it is set, for example, at the stage where the specific effect display is started or the stage where the disapproval display is started, the specific effect display is derived in order to avoid duplication between the specific effect display and the specific display prohibition period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as changing the timing and the like. Therefore, the smooth progress of the specific content display can be achieved.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480). In addition, various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state progress.

By the way, the effect derived with the fluctuation display and the progress of the special game state is one-shot, and when it is made flashy, the impression tends to be faint. In particular, in recent years, the production of gaming machines has become flashy across the board, and it is required to be able to leave an impression of the game individually.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of deriving a more impressive effect.

Means C-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state in which a special game advantageous to the player can be executed, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the above-mentioned The main control means that generates a special game state,
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
The effect display means which is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means is provided.
In the effect display means, in a gaming machine in which the effect variation display is performed in response to the variation display of the identification information of the special display means, and the effect display is performed during the special game state in response to the special game state.
The special teaching-related display related to the predetermined effect display derived from the effect variation display of the effect display means performed in response to the variation display of the special display means that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state is the special. A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the timing of notifying the start of the special gaming state and the timing of the start of the special gaming is derived from the effect display during the gaming state.

According to the means C-1, from the teaching of the occurrence of the special gaming state to the beginning of the special gaming state, it is possible to connect the effect displays related to each other, and the feeling of exhilaration when the occurrence of the special gaming state is taught is special. It can be smoothly connected to the game state. Therefore, in a situation in which the special gaming state is won and the special gaming state is started, which is very pleasing to the player, a more impressive effect can be derived, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by visually recognizing the special teaching-related display at the beginning of the special game state, it is possible to invite a recollection of how the occurrence of the special game state was taught in the effect variation display, and the effect variation display and the special game. The effect of the effect display during the state can be synergistically enhanced.

Further, the display mode related to the predetermined effect display of the effect variation display in which the generation of the special game state is taught is derived from the effect variation display to the beginning of the special game state. The state is switched from the normal game state in which the normal game is performed to the special game state. For example, in the same game state, the effect display becomes monotonous as compared with the configuration in which a long effect display is simply derived. While avoiding it, the impression of the production display can be strengthened.

In the pachinko machine, the "timing to announce the start of the special game state" corresponds to the "opening effect period", and the "timing to start the special game" is the "start of the round period (first round)". Corresponds to.

Means C-2. The special teaching-related display includes a first special teaching-related display performed at the start timing of the special game and a second special teaching-related display performed after the first special teaching-related display.
The first effect display performed from the start to the end of the period in which the special game is performed by connecting the regular effect display having a constant length from the start to the end to the effect display during the special game state, and the above-mentioned There is a second production display that is performed during the period when the special game is being performed and the length from the start to the end is variable.
The first special teaching related display is the second effect display.
The second special teaching related display is the regular effect display.
At the start of the second special teaching-related display, it was determined whether or not the second special teaching-related display and the first special teaching-related display overlap, and it was determined in the determination that they do not overlap. In this case, the second special teaching-related display is started, and when it is determined that the second special teaching-related display is duplicated, the start of the second special teaching-related display is postponed and instead of the second special teaching-related display. The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein another periodic effect display is started.

According to the means C-2, the second special teaching-related display is performed after the first special teaching-related display. Therefore, the special teaching-related display can be made even more impressive. In addition, duplication of the first special teaching-related display and the second special teaching-related display is avoided. That is, the second special teaching-related display is derived by overlapping with the first special teaching-related display. For example, even though the first half of the second special teaching-related display is invisible, the second special It is possible to avoid a situation in which the teaching-related display is treated as being derived. Therefore, the first special teaching-related display and the second special teaching-related display can be further enjoyed. Further, since the interval from the first special teaching-related display to the start of the second special teaching-related display does not exceed the length of one specific effect display, it is referred to as the first special teaching-related display. , It is possible to suppress a situation in which the distance between the display and the second special teaching related display is too wide and the relevance is weakened. In addition, the second special teaching-related display is the periodic effect display of the first effect display, and the period of the second special teaching-related display can be easily specified, and the overlap with the first special teaching-related display can be discriminated. It can be made easier.

Means C-3. The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player.
The gaming machine according to means C-1 or C-2, wherein the specific effect display and the special teaching-related display are set so as not to overlap in the effect display during the special game state.

According to the means C-3, it is possible to avoid duplication of the special teaching-related display and the specific effect display, and the special instruction-related display and the specific effect display interfere with each other in the visual mode. It is possible to avoid a situation in which one becomes invisible (cancelled) due to the other. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy each of the specific effect display selected by the player and the special teaching related display.

Further, as in the above means C-1, since the effect display that is the target of the special teaching-related display is derived from the effect variation display to the beginning of the special game state, the effect display that is the special instruction-related display is conscious. Attached (noticeable). Therefore, in the special gaming state, if the special teaching-related display is interrupted for some reason or the visibility is hindered, there is a concern that the person may be offended. In this respect, in this means, since the overlap between the special teaching-related display and the specific effect display is avoided, such concern can be suppressed, and the effect display during the special game state in the special game state can be enjoyed more comfortably. be able to.

Means C-4. When the specific effect display and the special teaching-related display overlap when setting the effect display during the special gaming state, the means C-3 characterized in that the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. The gaming machine described in.

According to the means C-4, the timing of starting the special teaching-related display can be held. Therefore, due to the change in the start timing of the special teaching-related display, the interval between the start timing of the special teaching-related display and the start timing of the special game state (special game) is greatly widened, which is special. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game state is less relevant to the predetermined effect display derived from the instruction variation display.

Means C-5. The configuration is such that the number of times of the specific effect display derived in the effect display during the special game state is defined.
When the special instruction-related display is set as the special instruction-related display, if an effect display that can be selected as the specific effect display in the special game state effect display this time is set, the special instruction-related display is set. The gaming machine according to means C-3 or C-4, wherein the display is included in the number of times of the specific effect display and the specific effect display is set.

According to the means C-5, the enjoyment of deriving the specific effect display in the special game state effect display is maintained at a predetermined level by limiting the number of times the specific effect display of the special effect display in the special game state is derived to some extent. be able to. For example, by making the specific effect display derived at least once during the special game state, the player who is looking forward to the specific effect display can be more excited about the occurrence of the special game state. It is possible to prevent the specific effect display from being bored due to a large variation in the number of times the specific effect display is derived or the specific effect display being derived too much each time. Further, it is possible to suggest the possibility that a state advantageous for the player is given depending on the number of times of deriving the specific effect display. Further, even when the specific effect display is derived in the frame of the specific instruction-related display, it is counted as if the specific effect display has been performed, so that the number of times the special effect display is derived can be reliably controlled.

Means C-6. As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited.
The means C- The gaming machine according to any one of 3 to C-5.

According to the means C-6, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the specific effect display can be derived in the effect display during the special game state is narrowed due to the change in the derivation timing of the special teaching-related display or the disapproval display. Can be done. When the second special teaching-related display of the means C-2 is a specific effect display as in the means C-5, the second special is avoided so as to avoid duplication with the disapproval display. The derivation timing of at least one of the teaching-related display and the disapproval display may be changed.

Means C-7. When the condition establishment detection means is detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the win / loss related information regarding the win / loss lottery, and the information acquisition means.
A hold storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the pass / fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a hold storage means.
It is provided with a hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the pass / fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means.
The predetermined pass / fail related information corresponds to the special gaming state at a stage before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined pass / fail related information stored in the hold storage means is executed. It is a configuration in which pre-reading processing is performed to determine whether or not there is.
In the special gaming state, when the predetermined hit / fail related information stored in the reserved storage means corresponds to the special gaming state, the setting for prohibiting the derivation of the special teaching related display is configured to be executable. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-6.

According to the means C-7, the feeling of joy can be given because the special teaching-related indication that was supposed to be derived was not derived. In other words, it is possible to create an interesting situation in which the special teaching-related display is happy whether or not it is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, "when the setting for prohibiting the derivation of the special teaching-related display is made, the special teaching-related display is displayed at a timing after the timing at which the special teaching-related display is originally set in the special game state. It may be configured to be derived (in a different manner). "

D. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in general, the types of productions are increased and the combination of productions is changed to diversify the productions. If the production that is the centerpiece of the gaming machine is hindered by other productions, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely allowing a player to visually recognize an effect to be visually recognized. ..

Means D-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display.
As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited.
When at least the disapproval display is started, a duplication determination process is performed to determine whether or not at least a part of the disapproval display and the specific effect display overlaps.
The disapproval display includes a first disapproval display and a second disapproval display.
In the duplication determination process, when the duplication between the first disapproval display and the specific effect display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed to avoid the duplication.
In the duplication determination process, when duplication between the second disapproval display and the specific effect display is confirmed, the derivation timing of the second disapproval display is changed to avoid the duplication.
At the start of the first disapproval display, when the specific effect display is being derived and it is determined by the duplication determination process that the disapproval display and the specific effect display overlap, the specific effect display is displayed. Equipped with a progress determination means for determining whether or not a specific program has been completed
When the progress determination means determines that the specific effect display has completed the specific program, a setting is made to cancel the specific effect display, and the specific effect display completes the specific program. A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the specific effect display is not present, the specific effect display is stopped and a setting is made to derive the specific effect display again.

According to the means D-1, when the disapproval display in which the duplication with the specific effect display is disallowed and the specific effect display is likely to be derived at the overlapping timing, the specific effect display and the disapproval display are displayed. By changing the derivation timing of at least one of them, duplication of the specific effect display and the disallowed display is avoided. Therefore, due to the overlap between the specific effect display and the disallowed display, one of the specific effect display and the disallowed display is omitted, or one or both of them are difficult to recognize. It is possible to avoid situations such as (specific effect display and disapproval display are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand).

Further, according to the means D-1, when it is determined that the specific effect display is being derived at the start of the first disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited and the derivation timing is not changed. Needs to avoid duplication by adjusting the derivation timing on the specific effect display side. Therefore, according to the present means D-1, when the specific effect display has not completed the specific program, that is, when the degree of duplication is large and the main part of the specific effect display has not been completed, the said case is concerned. Although the specific character display is temporarily terminated, the same specific effect display is set again so that the specific effect display can be visually recognized again.

On the other hand, when the specific effect display has completed the specific program, that is, when the degree of duplication is small and the main part of the specific effect display has already ended, the specific effect display is stopped there. The visual mode is switched to the first disapproval display. Therefore, even though most of the specific effect display is finished, the last small part of the specific effect display overlaps with the first disallowed display, so that the specific effect display is derived again ( For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the same specific effect display is derived with the first disapproval display in between). Therefore, basically, based on the concept of visually recognizing the specific effect display and the first disapproval display from the beginning to the end, the last part of the specific effect display is displayed within a range that does not affect the contents. By making it possible to cut, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display is reduced, and while simplifying the process, the flow of a series of effect displays including the specific effect display and the first disallowed display is relatively smooth. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the repetition of the same specific effect display.

Means D-2. At the start of the specific effect display, when it is determined that the first disapproval display and the specific effect display overlap, the completion of determining whether or not the first disapproval display has completed the requirement program. Equipped with a discrimination means
When it is determined by the completion determination means that the first disapproval display has not completed the requirement program, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, and the first disapproval display causes the requirement program. The gaming machine according to means D-1, characterized in that the first disapproval display is stopped when it is determined that the game has been completed.

According to the means D-2, it is determined that the first disapproval display is started at a timing overlapping with the specific effect display in the situation where the derivation of the specific effect display after a predetermined time is determined in advance. In some cases, if the first disapproval display has not completed the requirement program, that is, if the degree of duplication is large, the first disapproval display and the specific effect display as a whole should be visually recognized. , The derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed so as not to overlap with the first disallowed display.

On the other hand, when the first disapproval display has completed the requirement program, that is, the degree of duplication is small, the display that should be visually recognized in the first disapproval display has already been displayed (the information to be conveyed is If the notification has been completed), the first disapproval display is stopped there, and the visual mode is switched to the specific effect display. For this reason, even though the necessary part of the first disapproval display is completed, the last small part of the first disapproval display overlaps with the specific effect display, so that the derivation timing of the specific effect display is performed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is necessary to change (search for and set a period during which a specific effect display can be derived, and in some cases, change the derivation timing of other effect displays). Therefore, the process of changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display is reduced, the process is simplified, and the flow of the series of effect displays including the specific effect display and the first disapproval display is made relatively smooth. The action and effect are further achieved.

Means D-3. At the start of the second disapproval display, it is determined that the second disapproval display and the specific effect display overlap, and
When it is determined by the progress determining means that the specific effect display has not progressed to the specific program, the derivation timing of the second disapproval display is changed, and the specific effect display progresses to the specific program. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein the specific effect display is stopped when it is determined to be.

According to the means D-3, the flow of a series of effect displays including the specific effect display and the second disapproval display is reduced while reducing the process of changing the derivation timing of the second disapproval display and simplifying the process. Can be made relatively smooth.

Means D-4. The specific content display from which the specific effect display is derived at any timing is connected to the regular effect display having a constant length of time from the start to the end, from the start of the period in which the special game is performed. There is a first effect display that is performed toward the end and a second effect display that is performed at one time during the period when the special game is being performed and the length from the start to the end is variable.
The periodic specific effect display, which is the specific effect display configured as the periodic effect display, is stored in the periodic specific effect display storage means as a series of effect displays longer than the fixed time length of the periodic effect display. Derived based on a part of the specific effect display data,
A progress storage means for storing the progress status of the periodic specific effect display at the time when the periodic specific effect display is completed is provided.
Means D characterized in that the periodic specific effect display data stored in the periodic specific effect display storage means is read out based on the storage information of the progress storage means, and the periodic specific effect display is started. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to D-3.

According to the means D-4, each periodical specific effect display (periodic specific effect display data) is not completed in one derivation time of the periodic effect display, so that where is interrupted and where is restarted. However, it is a production display with little discomfort. Further, when the first disapproval display is duplicated for the periodic specific effect display for which the specific program has not been completed yet, the periodic specific effect display is canceled (forced termination), and after the first disapproval display is completed, It is possible to derive the periodic specific effect display from the continuation of the canceled place or from the vicinity thereof. For this reason, the beginning part of the same periodic specific effect display is repeated, as in the case where the periodic specific effect display is stopped, the first disapproval display ends, and then the periodic specific effect display is derived from the beginning again. , It is possible to avoid a situation that causes a decline in interest. In addition, since it is avoided that the beginning part of the same periodic specific effect display is repeated, when the first disapproval display is duplicated for the periodic specific effect display for which the specific program has not been completed yet, the periodic specification is specified. Even if the effect display is canceled (forced termination) and the first disapproval display ends, and then the periodic specific effect display is derived at the timing of the start of the first periodic effect display after the end of the first disapproval display, it is interesting. Can be avoided.

E. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, it is configured so that various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state, and there are many players who go to the game hall looking forward to seeing a specific effect.

By the way, in general, the types of productions are increased and the combination of productions is changed to diversify the productions. If the production that is the centerpiece of the gaming machine is hindered by other productions, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely allowing a player to visually recognize an effect to be visually recognized. ..

Means E-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display (in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player).
In the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disallowed display for which the overlap with the specific effect display is disallowed is duplicated. In this case, the derivation timing of at least one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is changed so that the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disapproval display do not overlap. A game machine featuring.

According to the means E-1, when the disapproval display for which duplication with the specific effect display is disallowed is likely to be derived at the timing of overlapping with the specific effect display, the specific effect display and the disapproval display By changing at least one of the derivation timings, it is possible to avoid duplication of the specific effect display and the disallowed display. Therefore, due to the overlap between the specific effect display and the disallowed display, one of the specific effect display and the disallowed display is omitted, or one or both of them are difficult to recognize. It is possible to avoid situations such as (specific effect display and disapproval display are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand).

Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the derivation of the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to is hindered by the derivation of the disapproval display and the player accumulates stress, and the disapproval display can also be visually recognized. can. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

The specific effect sound derived together with the specific effect display may be treated in the same manner as the specific effect display. That is, when it is determined that the sound that overlaps at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect sound is the "unauthorized sound", the specific effect sound and the specific effect sound are prevented from overlapping. , The derivation timing of at least one of the unauthorized voices may be changed. Further, the input to the gaming machine by the player for specifying the specific effect display is not particularly limited, but for example, the effect display means is configured so that the setting screen of the specific effect display can be derived so that the player can derive the specific effect display. A mobile-linked game in which a specific effect display can be set according to the operation of the effect operation means provided so that the game can be operated, or data is exchanged between the game machine and the server via a mobile communication terminal. When this is performed, the password issued by the server may be input to the gaming machine so that the memory of the specific effect display of the previous game is reflected in the current game.

Further, "in the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the permission display that is allowed to overlap with the specific effect display is derived in duplicate. In the case, at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the permission display may be derived in an overlapping manner. " Further, the "permission display" may be a display that does not cover (the subject) of the specific effect display, hardly covers the specific effect display, and even if the specific effect display is covered, the specific effect display can be seen through. The "non-permitted display" may be a display that covers the specific effect display (main body) and the whole, or a main part, and the corresponding part (whole or a part) of the specific effect display cannot be seen.

Means E-2. When the disapproval display, which is derived so as to overlap with at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display, is a notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time, the disapproval display. The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the derivation timing of the permission display is not changed.

According to the means E-2, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the information obtained from the notification display becomes old, its value is diminished, its meaning is lost, or it becomes inconsistent due to the delay in the derivation timing of the notification display. can do. For example, when the notification display that teaches the total number of game values paid out to the player within a predetermined period is postponed and the notification display is derived, the content of the notification display and the actually paid out game value are displayed. It is possible to avoid situations such as the numbers being far apart. Further, for example, when a notification display for guiding a specific operation capable of achieving a specific condition for the player is postponed and the notification display is derived, it means that the specific operation is performed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the user does not do so. Therefore, the information of the notification display can be surely obtained at the original timing, and the game can proceed with peace of mind based on the information of the notification display.

In addition, the notification display that determines the overlap with the specific effect display can be set for each model of the gaming machine. For example, the instruction that the right such as the special gaming state has been acquired and the special gaming state start. Examples include teaching to be played, teaching that the special gaming state has ended, teaching that the variable display of the identification information has ended, teaching about the number of game values paid out to the player, and the like. Further, it may be said that "there is a notification display which is a permission display". That is, for example, when there is a super-specific effect display whose derivation timing cannot be changed as one type of the specific effect display, and it is determined that the super-specific effect display and the notification display overlap, the notification display is permitted. It may be configured to be changed so as to be displayed.

In addition, as a notification display, a teaching that the assignment / transition of a predetermined game state has been decided, a teaching that the condition set as a break (small goal) in advancing the game has been achieved, and an error state are displayed. Teaching of what has occurred and the like can be mentioned. Further, "In the state where the specific effect display is derived, when the notification display which is the disapproval display is derived, the specific effect display is interrupted and the notification display is derived, and the above-mentioned notification display is derived. From the place where the specific effect display was interrupted after the end of the notification display, or from the place where the specific effect display was returned before the interrupted place (from the timing slightly before the interrupted timing, or the beginning of the specific effect display). (From) to be restarted. " That is, when the derivation of the specific effect display is determined but not yet derived, it is possible to change the derivation timing of the entire specific effect display, but the notification display of the disapproval display is displayed in the middle of the specific effect display. Is derived and the notification display is prioritized, the specific effect display is inevitably interrupted. Even in such a case, by suspending and resuming as described above, the specific effect display can be enjoyed as much as possible. In addition, a guidance display for instructing the restart of the interrupted specific effect display, a guidance display for displaying (countdown) the time until the interrupted specific effect display is resumed, and the like may be derived. In this case, it is possible to have the person feel relieved that the specific effect display is restarted, or to suppress a situation in which the beginning portion is overlooked without noticing that the specific effect display has been restarted.

Means E-3. Regarding the permission display that is permitted to overlap with the specific effect display, the display mode can be changed depending on whether the permission display overlaps with the specific effect display or does not overlap with the specific effect display. Means for the game machine according to E-1 or E-2.

According to the means E-3, although it is better for the player to visually recognize the specific effect display even if it overlaps with the specific effect display, the permission display (for example, the display mode as it is would hinder the visual mode of the specific effect display too much). , It is possible to dispel the concern in deriving the effect variation display, etc., which is derived from the start to the end of the variation display of the identification information of the special display means, and finally the result of the winning / failing lottery is suggested or taught. In addition, the specific effect display can be visually recognized in the original display mode.

Means E-4. In the effect display means, in a gaming machine in which the effect variation display is performed in response to the variation display of the identification information of the special display means, and the effect display is performed during the special game state in response to the special game state.
Priority effect display, which is an effect display in which a predetermined display object derived from the effect variation display of the effect display means performed in response to the variation display of the special display means that teaches the occurrence of the special gaming state is displayed. However, the gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-3, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be derivable with the start of the effect display during the special gaming state.

According to the means E-4, from the teaching of the occurrence of the special gaming state to the beginning of the special gaming state, it is possible to connect the effect displays related to each other, and the feeling of exhilaration when the occurrence of the special gaming state is taught is special. It can be smoothly connected to the game state. Therefore, in a situation in which the special gaming state is won and the special gaming state is started, which is very pleasing to the player, a more impressive effect can be derived, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Furthermore, by visually recognizing the priority effect display at the beginning of the special game state, it is possible to invite a recollection of how the occurrence of the special game state was taught in the effect variation display, and the effect variation display and the special game state. The effect of the medium effect display can be synergistically enhanced.

Means E-5. The priority effect display includes a first priority effect display and a second priority effect display performed after the first priority effect display.
In the special game state, an opening period in which an opening effect is performed to teach that a special game with an increased probability that a game value is given based on a predetermined operation of the player is started, and the special game are There is a round period in which the game is performed and an ending period in which the ending effect is performed to teach that the special game state ends.
The special game state effect display is connected to a regular effect display having a constant length from the start to the end, and a first effect display performed from the start to the end of the round period and a line at one time of the round period. There is a second production display in which the length from the start to the end is variable.
The priority effect display is derived at least once as the periodic effect display of the first effect display.
A combination storage means for storing a combination of the periodic effect displays derived as the first effect display, and a combination storage means.
A priority effect display storage means for storing the priority effect display derived as the first effect display is provided.
The first priority effect display is the second effect display, which is derived at the start of the round period.
The second priority effect display is the periodic effect display, and during the round period, the first priority effect display ends and the periodic effect display derived in duplicate with the first priority effect display is displayed. The gaming machine according to means E-4, wherein the second priority effect display is derived when the game is finished.

According to the means E-5, the second priority effect display is derived while the memory of the first priority effect display is new, and as a result, the special display means for teaching the occurrence of the special gaming state. It is possible to strengthen the significance of the effect display (effect display at the time of winning) displayed in the effect display means along with the stop display of the variable display of. Therefore, the effect display at the time of winning can be made more interesting, and the playability can be improved.

Further, the first priority effect display and the second priority effect display are configured to avoid duplication. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first priority effect display and the second priority effect display interfere with each other's visual recognition mode. In particular, the priority effect display is an effect display connected to the effect variation display, and since awareness is given (attention is paid), if the priority effect display is interrupted for some reason or the visibility is hindered, the mood is felt. There is concern that it will hurt. In this respect, in the present means E-5, since the overlap between the first priority effect display and the second priority effect display is avoided, such a concern can be dispelled, and the effect display during the special game state can be enjoyed more comfortably. You can have it done.

Means E-6. The round period is composed of a plurality of individual rounds.
The gaming machine according to means E-5, wherein the first priority effect display is set corresponding to the first individual round.

According to the means E-6, it is possible to easily grasp the derivation period of the first priority effect display, and it is possible to easily determine the overlap between the first priority effect display and the second priority effect display.

Means E-7. It is determined whether or not the priority effect display and the specific effect display overlap, and when it is determined that they overlap, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of 4 to E-6.

According to the means E-7, the specific effect display and the priority effect display can be enjoyed more reliably.

Means E-8. A specific display-containing effect is provided so that the specific effect display is derived at a specified timing.
Means E-1 to E, characterized in that, when the specific display-containing effect is started, a process of determining whether or not at least a part of the disapproval display and the specific effect display overlaps is performed. The gaming machine described in any of -7.

According to the means E-8, in the case of the specific display-containing effect, the specific effect display of the specific display-containing effect and the unauthorized display overlap before the specific effect display of the specific display-containing effect is derived. A determination can be made, and a process of changing the disapproval display or the derivation timing of the specific effect display can be performed before the specific effect display of the specific display-containing effect is derived. As a result, for example, if it is grasped that the specific effect display of the specific display-containing effect and the disapproval display overlap before the start of the specific effect display, the disapproval display and the specific effect display are displayed. Not only the method of shifting the derivation period to the later timing, but also the method of shifting to the earlier timing can be taken. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to shift the timing of the specific effect display that overlaps with the notification means so as not to overlap, there is no room for deriving the specific effect display so as not to overlap with the notification display in the specific display-containing effect. It is possible to suppress a situation where there is no way to shift (at least part of it is unavoidably omitted). In addition, it is possible to suppress the discomfort of the disapproval display and the display in which the derivation period of the specific effect display is changed. Further, when the configuration of the means E-2 is adopted, it is necessary to eliminate as much as possible the situation where the notification display as the disapproval display is derived while the specific effect display is being derived and the specific effect display is interrupted. Can be done.

Means E-9. A period payout total number counting means for counting the total number of game values paid to the player in a predetermined period is provided.
A specific payout number display that teaches that the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means has reached the specified number is configured to be derivable.
Specific that calculates the timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means is likely to reach the specified number in the predetermined period in which the number of game values is counted by the period payout total number counting means. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-8, which comprises means for calculating the payout number display timing.

According to the means E-9, the specific payout number display timing calculation means can calculate the timing at which the number of game values counted by the period payout total number counting means is likely to reach the specified number. Therefore, according to the prediction of the timing at which the specific payout number display (corresponding to the notification display of the above means E-2) is derived, the specific effect display is derived at the timing when the possibility of duplication with the specific payout number display is almost eliminated. Can be set to. For this reason, the overlap with the specific effect display is found only at the time of deriving the specific effect number display, and it is necessary to change the derivation timing of the specific effect display, or it becomes impossible to secure the change destination. It is possible to avoid situations such as storage.

Means E-10. When the disapproval display and the specific effect display are started, a process of determining whether or not at least a part of the disapproval display and the specific effect display overlaps is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-9.

According to the means E-10, the duplication is determined at the timing when the disapproval display or the specific effect display is actually started. Therefore, for example, the timing of deriving the disapproval display or the specific effect display is determined in advance. However, even if the timing of the disapproval display or the specific effect display suddenly changes after that, it is possible to take measures to avoid duplication. Therefore, the above-mentioned effects such as avoiding duplication of the disapproval display and the specific effect display are more reliably achieved.

Means E-11. By inputting to specify a predetermined image object (character) displayed in the effect display means as a specific image object (specific character), the effect display in which the specific image object is displayed is specified as the specific effect display. Being done
Among the effect displays determined to be derived by the effect display means, the effect display is provided with a derivation period grasping means capable of grasping the derivation period of the specific effect display to which the specific image object is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-10.

According to the means E-11, the effect display in which the specific image object is displayed is comprehensively specified as the specific effect display only by specifying the predetermined image object (character) as the specific image object (specific character). It becomes. Therefore, for a player who plays a game aiming at the effect display of a specific image object, the setting for specifying the specific effect display becomes easy, and the game can be started smoothly without stress. In addition, by simplifying the setting for specifying the specific effect display, more players can enjoy the function of the specific effect display. In addition, the derivation period grasping means can surely grasp the derivation period of the specific effect display from which the specific image object is derived, and can surely determine whether or not the specific effect display and the disallowed display overlap. can do.

It should be noted that "among the specific effect displays, the priority is ranked, and the general effect display is the specific effect display depending on the combination of the rank of the specific effect display and the type of the general effect display. It may be said that "whether the permission display in which duplication is permitted or the non-permission display is determined changes". In this case, among the specific effect displays from which the specific image object is derived, the one with a high derivation frequency or the one displayed with a small value is set to have a lower priority than the one with a low or large display. By setting a specific image object as such, it is possible to improve the effect balance and the like in a configuration in which the specific effect display is comprehensively specified.

Further, when a mobile interlocking game in which data is exchanged between the game machine and the server via a mobile communication terminal is performed, the general effect display is determined to be either the permission display or the non-permission display. The criteria for whether or not the game is played may change according to the amount of game played by the player, or may be configured so that the player can set it. For example, when the amount of game played by a player is small, as a specific effect display, a cut-in effect that is only temporarily derived, a display that is only derived in a small area of the effect display means, and a display of a game commentary are displayed. Is displayed in duplicate, but if the amount of the game is large, the game commentary may not be displayed. In addition, the specific image object (specific character) is only derived small at the same time as many other image objects (characters), only the name is displayed, and so on. An effect display such as low relevance may not be specified as a specific effect display. In addition, it may be configured so that the player can (to some extent) rank the priority of the specific image object.

Further, "object trajectory information that makes it possible to specify the display position of the specific image object in the effect display means that is displaced with the progress of the specific effect display corresponding to the image object that can be set as the specific image object is stored in advance. It may be said that the object orbit information storage means is provided. In this case, for example, it is possible to perform an effect display such as making a large copy of a specific character when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Means E-12. Equipped with a specific operation means that can be operated by the player
When a predetermined effect display is derived in the effect display means, a predetermined operation input of the specific operation means is performed, so that the predetermined effect display derived in the effect display means is displayed as the specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-11, which is configured to be identifiable as a display.

According to the means E-12, the effect display that the player likes can be specified as the specific effect display. Therefore, it is possible to respond to more detailed needs, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the game. For example, in a configuration such as the means E-8, when a predetermined character other than a character that can be comprehensively specified as a specific character is liked, and the effect display from which the predetermined character is derived is desired to be a specific effect display. The player can specify the specific effect display one by one by himself / herself.

It should be noted that the specific effect information storage means is provided with the specific effect information storage means for storing the information of the predetermined effect display specified as the specific effect display by performing the predetermined operation by the specific operation means, and the operation is performed on the specific effect information storage means. After the effect pattern was derived (all) the effect pattern that was derived at the time of the game (I don't know if the effect is duplicated, so I ask the player to select it later). Time (in the case of one press, the specified time from the operation (if pressed again before the specified time elapses, it looks like it will be extended, and from there there is also the specified time; there is an upper limit of the extension) It may be stored as a specific effect display, and in the case of a long press, the specific effect display is displayed while the operation is being performed).

Furthermore, if the specific effect display is set shortly before the operation, it is easy to set the target effect display as the specific effect display from the beginning. In addition, by checking the effect pattern, which character is derived after ○ seconds from the start. If it is configured so that information such as a character can be acquired, it becomes possible to pinpoint the derivation start timing to the derivation end timing of the character that has appeared most recently. Further, for example, when a predetermined character and a predetermined effect display have a one-to-one correspondence, that is, the predetermined character is basically derived from the beginning to the end of the display of the predetermined effect. In the case of continuing, the entire predetermined effect display may be specified as the specific effect display by performing a predetermined operation by the specific operation means during the predetermined effect.

In addition, for example, the information stored in the specific effect information storage means may be configured to be erased in order from the oldest one, or all may be erased when the power of the gaming machine is turned off. When erasing all the information stored in the specific effect information storage means, the power may be turned on while operating the erasing operation means. In addition, when a mobile-linked game is being played, information that can be output from the gaming machine is received by the mobile communication terminal at the end of the game, and such information is stored in the server, and at the start of the next game, up to the previous time. By inputting information including at least a part of the information (a password is issued to the server and the password) into the gaming machine, the setting related to the specific effect display of the game up to the previous time may be inherited.

Means E-13. The method according to any one of means E-1 to E-12, wherein the specific effect display is not specified (the process of determining duplication with the disallowed display is not performed). Gaming machine.

According to the means E-13, it is possible to meet the demand of the player who wants to confuse the effect display related to the specific effect display or to see the effect display evenly. Further, even if there is a desire to set the specific effect display, it is possible to respond to a request such as first looking at various effect displays that can be specified as the specific effect display and then setting the specific effect display.

Means E-14. Means E-1 to E, which are configured to be able to derive a specific effect advance notice effect that teaches that the specific effect display is derived at least when the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of -13.

According to the means E-14, even if the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed and the specific effect display is derived at an irregular timing, the specific effect display derived at the changed timing is surely performed. Can be visually recognized. Further, for example, the configuration in which the specific effect notice effect is performed only when the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, or the mode differs depending on whether the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed or other cases. When adopting the configuration, it can be confirmed that the derivation timing is changed to be the specific effect display. Further, when the specific effect advance notice effect is derived corresponding to all the specific effect display, even if the eyes are taken away from the effect display means, it can be specified by moving the eyes to the effect display means based on the specific effect advance notice effect. You can surely enjoy the production display from the beginning.

It should be noted that the player may be configured to be able to set whether or not to allow the derivation of the specific effect notice effect. Further, when there is no difference in the meaning of deriving the specific effect display between the case where the derivation timing is changed and the case where the derivation timing is not changed, the specific effect notice effect is, for example, the derivation timing. By deriving only when it is changed, the player has a special expectation for the specific effect notice effect (accompanied by the specific effect display) (for example, the degree of expectation of the occurrence of a special game state is high. In order to avoid a situation such as (it may be misunderstood that it is particularly expensive), it may be configured so that it is derived even if it corresponds to a specific effect display in which the derivation timing is not changed.

Means E-15. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-14, characterized in that the specific timing change display for teaching that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed can be derived.

According to the means E-15, it can be grasped that the derivation timing of the specific effect display has been changed. When the specific timing change display is derived before the original derivation timing, the specific timing change display is configured to be derived when the specific effect display whose derivation timing is changed is derived, and is derived after the original derivation timing. If so, it may be configured to be derived at the original derivation timing. In this case, it is possible to grasp that the specific effect display is derived early and that the specific effect display is reserved later.

Means E-16. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-15, wherein the specific effect display can be derived based on the fact that the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period.

According to the means E-16, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a person is looking forward to a specific effect display but is not derived too much, resulting in a decrease in interest.

The specified period is defined as one variation (one game) from the start to the end of the variation display that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery that determines whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The case where the game is played a number of times, the case where the (predetermined) special game state is played a specified number of times, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, a specific effect point storage means for adding or subtracting points when the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period is provided, and the points stored in the specific effect point storage means are equal to or more than the specified points or less than or equal to the specified points. In that case, the right to derive the specific effect display may be granted. Further, the specific effect display derived according to the points of the specific effect point storage means may be a rare pattern or a specific effect display of a dedicated pattern. In addition, the points may be returned to the initial value by deriving the specific effect display (the derivation is set), or the points may be reduced by the amount used.

Means E-17. The sub-control means includes a sub-effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a sub-specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player.
The effect display specified as the sub-specific effect display has a higher possibility of being derived in duplicate with the specific effect display as compared with other effect displays. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the means E-17, by setting the sub-specific effect display so that it is easy to overlap with the specific effect display, the relationship (fate, etc.) between the specific effect display and the sub-specific effect display can be established. The player can set a deepening effect, which can increase the enjoyment.

Means E-18. In the case where the disapproval display derived by overlapping with at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display is a general effect display other than the specific effect display, it is a general effect display.
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-17, wherein the derivation timing of the general effect display is changed, and the derivation timing of the specific effect display is not changed.

According to the means E-18, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the specific effect display to be derived, and when the specific effect display is derived, the overlap with the general effect display or the like is avoided and the specific effect display can be fully enjoyed. You can have it done. Furthermore, since the derivation timing of the specific effect display is also maintained (when it originally overlaps with the general effect display), it is possible to suppress the situation where the specific effect display is not derived at the timing when it should be derived. It is possible to reduce the situation in which the interest is lowered due to the occurrence of such a situation.

Means E-19. It is provided with a progress information storage means capable of storing at least information related to the progress of the game performed in the state where the specific effect display is derived.
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-18, wherein the information stored in the progress information storage means can be browsed after the specific effect display.

According to the means E-19, the event that occurred during the display of the specific effect can be confirmed later. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the specific effect display without worrying about it. In addition, for example, the specific effect display is set from the beginning to the end of the specific special game state, and the display that overlaps with the specific effect display in the special game state is a permission display that allows duplication with the specific effect display (notification). Even if it is displayed, it does not hinder visibility so much), and after the end of the special game state, information on the special game state, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, the upper limit of the game ball is in each round. It may be configured so that a display that can obtain information such as whether the ball has been hit or the time required for digestion in each round can be derived.

Means E-20. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
It is equipped with a ball entry means that allows a game ball that moves in the game area to enter.
At least in a state where the specific effect display is derived, a reaction mode means capable of deriving a reaction mode (which can be transmitted by a sense other than vision) corresponding to the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (the above). The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-19, which is provided (separate from the effect display means).

In order to advance the game, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and in the special game state, the game ball is efficiently used for the variable ball entry means. It is advantageous for the player to let the ball enter the ball. Therefore, although the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to is derived, is the behavior related to the (analog) part related to the progress of the game (for example, is the game ball successfully entered into the starting ball entry means? Etc.) are also anxious, so there is a concern that you may shift your eyes to that, and you may not be able to fully enjoy the specific production display.

In this regard, according to the means E-20, even if the specific effect display derived from the effect display means is continuously visually recognized, it is possible to grasp the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means depending on the reaction mode. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball can be successfully entered into the predetermined ball entry means without shifting the line of sight to the predetermined ball entry means, and as a result, the specific effect display is displayed. You can enjoy it more.

On the contrary, in a situation where the reaction mode may occur, the reaction mode does not occur at all, and the situation where it is necessary to pay attention to the configuration related to the predetermined ball entry means (launched in the game area). It is also possible to understand that the target of the game ball to be played is not good, the ball is clogged in either the game area or the configuration for launching the game ball, there is no game ball on hand, etc.). By advancing the game without noticing these, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

It should be noted that the reaction mode may be confirmed while keeping the line of sight in the specific effect display, for example, by a light emitting means capable of emitting light so as to enter the player's field of view to visually recognize the sound effect and the specific effect display. Examples include light emission, a specific effect display, or a display in the vicinity thereof, and a change in the tactile sensation of a portion touched by the player. Further, as the ball entry means, the start ball entry means in which the winning / failing lottery is performed by entering the ball, and the variable ball entering state in which the game ball moving in the game area when a special game state occurs can be entered. Examples include ball entry means.

Means E-21. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and
It is provided with a start ball entry detection means as the condition establishment detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start ball entry means.
The winning / failing lottery is performed when the starting ball detection means is detected.
When the start-in ball detection means is detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the win-win related information regarding the win-win lottery, and the information acquisition means.
A hold storage means having a predetermined number of storage areas capable of storing the pass / fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means (,
(With a hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the pass / fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means).
The reaction mode can be derived based on the detection of the starting ball detection means, and the reaction mode can be derived.
The reaction mode derived based on the detection of the starting ball detection means is in a state in which the hit / fail related information is stored in a predetermined number or more of the predetermined number of storage areas of the reserved storage means. The gaming machine according to means E-20, wherein the mode is different depending on whether the starting ball detection means is detected or not.

According to the means E-21, even if the game ball is put into the starting ball entering means, the hit / fail related information cannot be stored in the hold storage means (the upper limit of the hold of the variable display has been reached). It is possible to easily avoid waste such as a game ball entering the starting ball entry means (over winning). In other words, for example, when the specific effect display is derived in a situation where the variable display is not held, the line of sight remains the specific effect display and the game ball is continuously fired without fear of over-winning. Can be put on hold. Therefore, as much as possible, it is possible to maintain a state in which some fluctuation displays are held and to proceed with the game smoothly.

Means E-22. The gaming machine according to means E-20 or E-21, wherein the reaction responding means is a voice output means capable of outputting a sound effect as the reaction mode.

According to the means E-22, the corresponding event can be grasped without moving the line of sight at all, and the specific effect display is hindered as in the case of causing the effect display means to derive the display corresponding to the reaction mode. It is possible to avoid the situation where it ends up.

Means E-23. The reaction mode means is a tactile transmission means that is provided at a position where the player can touch and can change the mode that acts on the tactile sensation (the mode can be changed so that the change can be felt by the tactile sensation). The gaming machine according to any one of means E-20 to E-22, which is a change in the aspect of the tactile transmission means.

According to the means E-23, the corresponding event can be grasped without moving the line of sight at all. Further, it is possible to teach the player to enter the ball into the ball-entry means without disturbing the specific effect display and the accompanying sound.

Means E-24. It is provided at a position where the player can operate, and is provided with a launch operation means for launching a game ball by the launch means based on the player's operation.
The gaming machine according to means E-23, wherein the tactile transmission means is provided at a symmetrical position of the launching operating means or a position in the vicinity thereof in the gaming machine.

According to the means E-24, the hand (generally the right hand) opposite to the hand (generally the right hand) that operates the firing operation means can reach the position so that it will not get tired even if it is touched for a relatively long time (without moving it to the shoulder). Position). Therefore, while the specific effect display is derived, the tactile transmission means can be continuously touched relatively easily, and the function of the tactile transmission means can be fully utilized.

Means E-25. The right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked, and
Described in any of means E-1 to E-24, characterized in that the right to derive the specific effect display in stock can be exercised in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player. Gaming machine.

According to the means E-25, the right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked, and the enjoyment can be found in the new playability such as deriving the specific effect display at one's own timing. Further, for example, when a specific effect display is derived and an urgent display such as an error state notification is derived, the visual mode of the specific effect display is inevitably hindered. By configuring the stock, the exercise of such stock can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest caused by the deterioration of the visibility of the specific effect display due to the duplication of some display with respect to the specific effect display, and to ensure the playability of enjoying the specific effect display. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player. In addition, since the stocked effect display is, of course, a specific effect display, compared to a configuration in which, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked and various effects and the like attached to the stock are derived. By deriving (excessive) useless production, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes uncomfortable.

Means E-26. The game area where the game ball launched by the launcher is guided, and
The first starting ball entering means and the second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and the second starting ball entering means.
The first start ball entry detection means as the condition establishment detection means capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the first start ball entry means, and the first start ball entry detection means.
The second start ball entry detection means as the condition establishment detection means capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the second start ball entry means, and the second start ball entry detection means.
Variable entry means (first variable entry means and second variable entry means) configured so that the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter. Variable ball entry means) and
Whether or not to generate a special gaming state (first special gaming state) that opens the variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means) when the detection by the first start ball entry detection means is performed. The first special game generating means as the main control means for generating the special gaming state (first special gaming state) when the (first) winning or losing lottery is won and the (first) winning or losing lottery is won. When,
The first special display means as the special display means on which the first variable display is performed by the first special symbol that teaches the result of the (first) winning / failing lottery performed by the first special game generating means.
A special gaming state (second variable ball entry means) that opens the variable ball entry means (second variable ball entry means) when the detection by the second start ball entry detection means is performed. 2 Special gaming state; The (second) winning / failing lottery for whether or not to generate a so-called small hit) is performed, and when the (second) winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state (the second special gaming state) is performed. ) As the main control means, and the second special game generating means.
The second special display means as the special display means in which the second variable display is performed by the second special symbol that teaches the result of the (first win / fail lottery and the second) win / fail lottery performed by the second special game generating means. When(,
A specific ball entry section in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a specific ball entry section.
A specific ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry section, and a specific ball entry detection means.
(With the accessory special gaming state generating means) that generates the first special gaming state when the detection is performed by the specific ball entry detecting means.
The first variation display in the first special display means and the second variation display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel.
The sub-control means is configured to be capable of executing control based on signals from the first special game generating means and the second special game generating means.
The effect display means is configured to be able to derive an effect display related to the variable display of the first special display means and the second special display means.
In the effect display means, a first variation-corresponding effect display corresponding to the variation display of the first special display means and a second variation-corresponding effect display corresponding to the variation display of the second special display means can be derived. Being done
In the effect display means, of the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display, only the first variation-corresponding effect display is derived, and the second variation-corresponding effect. It is configured so that the state can be changed to the second display state from which only the display is derived.
In the first display state, when the second variation-corresponding effect display from which the specific effect display is derived is set, the second variation-corresponding effect display can be derived even while the first variation-corresponding effect display is derived. Configured (,
In the second display state, when the first variation-corresponding effect display from which the specific effect display is derived is set, the first variation-corresponding effect display can be derived even while the second variation-corresponding effect display is derived. The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-25, characterized in that it is configured).

According to the means E-26, in a configuration in which the first variation display and the second variation display are performed in parallel, the opportunity to derive the specific effect display can be increased.

Means E-27. The specific effect display is derived in one of the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display, and the other variation-corresponding effect display that overlaps with the one variation-corresponding effect display is described. When the occurrence of a special gaming state is taught,
When one of the fluctuation-corresponding effect displays ends later than the other variation-corresponding effect display, the one-sided variation-corresponding effect display is shortened (forced termination) to the end timing of the other variation-corresponding effect display. ,
When the one fluctuation-corresponding effect display ends earlier than the other variation-corresponding effect display, the one variation-corresponding effect display is extended to the end timing of the other variation-corresponding effect display. The gaming machine according to the means E-26.

According to the means E-27, it is possible to suggest and teach that the special game state has been won by utilizing the specific effect display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific effect display from being replaced by another effect display.

Means E-28. The specific effect display includes an extension effect display used when extending the first variation-compatible effect display and the second variation-compatible effect display, and a shortening effect display used when shortening the second variation-compatible effect display. The gaming machine according to means E-27, wherein

According to the means E-28, while suppressing the sense of incongruity, the variation-corresponding effect display from which the specific effect display is derived is suddenly extended or shortened (leading to a mode of suggesting / teaching the winning of the special gaming state). It becomes possible.

F. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in general, the types of productions are increased and the combination of productions is changed to diversify the productions. If the production that is the centerpiece of the gaming machine is hindered by other productions, there is a concern that the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of surely allowing a player to visually recognize an effect to be visually recognized. ..

Means F-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display (in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player).
When it is determined that the disapproval display, which is not permitted to overlap with the specific effect display, and the specific effect display overlap, the timing of deriving the specific effect display can be changed.
When the specific effect display is derived in the effect display means, an image of the specific effect display is generated and an image of the non-specific effect display which is an effect display other than the specific effect display is generated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to display an effect display other than the specific effect instead of the specific effect display.

According to the means F-1, when the specific effect display and the disallowed display overlap, the duplication can be avoided by changing the derivation timing of the specific effect display. Therefore, due to the overlap between the specific effect display and the disallowed display, it becomes difficult to recognize one or both of the specific effect display and the disallowed display (specific effect display and non-permitted display). It is possible to avoid situations such as (the permission displays are mixed and each display becomes difficult to understand). Therefore, the viewing of the specific production display that the player is looking forward to (or the player can see it to improve the interest) is hindered by the derivation of the disapproval display, and the player accumulates stress. Such a situation can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

In addition, when an image of the specific effect display is generated, an image of the alternative effect display as a non-specific effect display that can be switched from the specific effect display is also generated, so that the timing of deriving the specific effect display is changed. When it becomes necessary to do so, it is possible to smoothly switch from the specific effect display to the alternative effect display during the period when the specific effect display was supposed to be displayed. That is, for example, if the derivation of the disapproval display that overlaps with the specific effect display is determined after the specific effect display is set, if the content of the specific effect display is changed (redoed), the sub There is a concern that the control load of the control means will be significantly increased, and that the risk of occurrence of a predetermined defect (deviation, etc.) in the specific effect display will increase. Further, for example, the process of erasing (generated) video data generated as a specific effect display and replacing it with another video data (specification / selection / determination / generation of selection target) may be difficult. be.

In this regard, in the present means F-2, by preparing an alternative effect display in advance, the specific effect display and the disallowed display suddenly overlap, and when trying to change the derivation timing of the specific effect display. In addition, the alternative effect display can be visually displayed relatively smoothly instead of the specific effect display, and the non-display state can be immediately switched to the display state. After that, by deriving the specific effect display that is not visible so as not to overlap with the disallowed display, the specific effect display that overlaps with the disallowed display is derived at a later timing. Therefore, the processing when the display timing of the specific effect display is suddenly changed can be performed relatively smoothly, and even when the display timing of the specific effect display is changed, the display mode in the effect display means. Can proceed smoothly.

Means F-2. When the specific effect display is set, an alternative effect display having at least the same length as the length from the start to the end of the specific effect display can be displayed instead of the specific effect display as the non-specific effect display. Settings are made,
The state can be changed between a display state in which the specific effect display is visually displayed and the alternative effect display is invisible, and a non-display state in which the alternative effect display is visually displayed and the specific effect display is invisible. The gaming machine according to means F-1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being used.

According to the means F-2, by making the specific effect display in the non-display state, the alternative effect having a length longer than that of the specific effect display without making the specific effect display visible during the period in which the specific effect display was planned to be visually displayed. The display can be visually recognized, and the hole in the effect display due to the fact that the specific effect display is not performed can be completely filled. Further, by setting the non-display state, the specific effect display can be completely invisible. For this reason, for example, although it can be confirmed that most of the specific effect display overlaps with the disallowed display but only a part of it is visible, and that the specific effect display is performed, it is not a satisfactory mode. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a part is made visible, which causes a decrease in interest. In addition, since the end timing of the alternative effect display can be the same as the end timing of the specific effect display when the specific effect display has been performed, the specific effect display will indicate the progress of the subsequent effect display. You can connect smoothly as if it had been broken.

It should be noted that "the effect display that can be the specific effect display has a plurality of patterns having the same time but different modes, and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the effect display that can be the specific effect display is started. It may be "provided with a timing grasping means". In this case, the alternative effect display can be synchronized with the specific effect display relatively easily and accurately.

Means F-3. For the specific content display from which the specific effect display is derived at any timing, the effect display of the entire specific content display is set at the start of the specific content display.
At the start of the specific effect display and the disapproval display, a duplication determination process is performed to determine whether or not the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap.
When it is determined in the duplication determination process that the specific effect display and the disapproval display do not overlap, the display state is set, and it is determined that the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap. In this case, the gaming machine according to means F-2, wherein the non-display state is set and a process of setting a re-effect display which is the same specific effect display as the specific effect display which is invisible is performed. ..

According to the means F-3, the setting of the specific effect display when the non-display state is set is performed only when the non-display state is set. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with the case where the setting of the specific effect display is set again in advance.

Means F-4. When the re-effect display is derived, the image of the alternative effect display is generated and the image of the non-specific effect display is generated.
Instead of the re-effect display, it is configured to be able to display a non-specific effect display.
At the start of the re-effect display, when it is determined in the duplication determination process that the re-effect display and the disallowed display do not overlap, the re-effect display is visually displayed, and the re-effect display and the re-effect display are displayed. When it is determined that the disallowed display overlaps, the re-effect display is made invisible, the non-specific effect display is visually displayed, and the invisible re-effect display is set again. The gaming machine according to means F-3, characterized in that it is used.

According to the means F-4, even if the re-effect display overlaps with the disallowed display (even at the timing after the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed, it overlaps with the disallowed display), the re-effect display is visible. The display can be further postponed so that the player can visually recognize the original specific effect display of the re-effect display without overlapping with the disallowed display.

F-5. If the disapproval display determined to overlap with the specific effect display is a notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time, the derivation timing of the specific effect display is changed. ,
When the disapproval display determined to overlap with the specific effect display is other than the notification display, the means F-1 to F-4 are characterized in that the derivation timing of the disapproval display is changed. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the means F-5, since the notification display is not derived at the original timing (the notification display is delayed), the information by the notification display does not match the actual situation (for example, the information becomes outdated). It is possible to avoid problems such as. In addition, if the disallowed display that duplicates the specific effect display is a display that allows the derivation timing to be shifted, the derivation timing of the disallowed display is changed, so that the specific effect display is displayed at the original timing as much as possible. It can be derived, and it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player who has measured the timing of the derivation is overwhelmed.

Means F-6. The right to derive the specific effect display is configured to be stockable.
Means F-1 to be characterized in that the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked when it becomes impossible to visually display the specific effect display without overlapping with the disapproval display. The gaming machine according to any one of F-5.

According to the means F-6, instead of being unable to visually display the specific effect display without overlapping with the disallowed display, the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked, so that the specific effect display is satisfactory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest caused by not being derived. In addition, since the stocked effect display is, of course, a specific effect display, compared to a configuration in which, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked and various effects and the like attached to the stock are derived. By deriving (excessive) useless production, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes uncomfortable.

Means F-7. The gaming machine according to means F-6, wherein the right to derive the specific effect display in stock can be exercised in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player.

According to the means F-7, the right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked, and the enjoyment can be found in the new playability such as deriving the specific effect display at one's own timing.

G. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, it is configured so that various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state, and there are many players who go to the game hall looking forward to seeing a specific effect.

By the way, in general, the effects are diversified by deriving different effects in duplicate or changing the combination of the effects derived during a predetermined period (for example, one variable display). However, if the specific production that the player is looking forward to is hindered by another production or is not performed as usual, there is a concern that the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of developing a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player. ..

Means G-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a display related to a predetermined effect in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player.
In the effect display means, in the derivation possibility period, which is a period during which the specific effect display specified in response to the input of the player can be displayed, the specific effect display among the effect displays including the specific effect display. When a non-specific effect display other than the specific effect is selected and the non-specific effect display is derived, the image of the non-specific effect display is generated and the image of the specific effect display is generated. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the means G-1, in the derivation possibility period in which the specific effect display may be displayed, when the non-specific effect display is derived instead of the specific effect display, the image of the non-specific effect display is displayed. It is configured so that not only the generation but also the generation of the image of the specific effect display is performed. Therefore, based on the determination after the start of the derivation possibility period, the display mode visually recognized by the effect display means may be switched from the non-specific effect display to the specific effect display, or from the specific effect display to the non-specific effect display. You can do it relatively smoothly.

For example, when switching the content of a video, in order to gain time to generate the video (at least the beginning part) of the switching destination, a still image (and one that is not very detailed and one that does not have very good image quality) is inserted or directed. The display can be smoothly switched without degrading the appearance without temporarily covering the display means with a movable accessory. Further, by adopting a configuration in which the image generation of the effect display of a plurality of patterns proceeds at the same time, it is possible to appropriately change which of the effect displays of the plurality of patterns to be reproduced at the same time is visually recognized. Therefore, during the derivability period, the specific effect display can be displayed immediately at any time, the chances of the specific effect display being derived can be increased, and the switching between the specific effect display and the specific effect display can be made smooth. It is possible to increase the variation of the derivation of the specific effect display, and to flexibly switch between the specific effect display and the non-specific effect display depending on the success or failure of the predetermined condition after the start of the derivation possibility period. Further, compared to the configuration in which the contents of the moving image are all decided at the start of the moving image, it is possible to derive a dramatic effect that changes in real time in connection with the specific effect display. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

Means G-2. The effect display means includes a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image, and has a plurality of layers.
In the derivability period, when both the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display image are generated, the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display image are in different layers. The gaming machine according to the means G-1, wherein the reproduction is started at the same time.

According to the means G-2, the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display are simultaneously started to be reproduced using a plurality of layers (for example, the specific effect display is reproduced only when the specific effect display cannot be seen in the effect display means). Therefore, it is possible to switch between the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display relatively easily and smoothly with respect to the display of the effect display means. Further, even if the non-specific effect display and the specific effect display are suddenly switched, the degree of progress of the effect display can be adjusted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contradiction or a large sense of discomfort in the effect display. In addition, clipping, masking that makes the specific effect display visible in a part of the non-specific effect display, and display modes such as fade-in and fade-out that sandwich the state where the specific effect display overlaps with the non-specific effect display and looks faint. It can be derived.

Means G-3. The effect display means reproduces a main layer in which a moving image is played, a back main layer in which a moving image synchronized with the moving image of the main layer is played, a moving image shorter than the moving image of the main layer, or a still image. Sublayer and a back sublayer in which the moving image or still image synchronized with the moving image or still image of the sublayer is played.
The back main layer is arranged above the main layer (player side), the sub layer is arranged above the back main layer, and the back sub layer is arranged above the sub layer. The gaming machine according to the means G-2.

According to the means G-3, the amount of images generated in each layer can be reduced, and the burden of reproducing an image having a different pattern of images reproduced in a predetermined layer in another layer can be reduced. can.

Means G-4. Equipped with a production operation means that can be operated by the player
Means G-1 to G-3 characterized in that the specific effect display can be derived based on the operation of the effect operation means during the derivability period in which the non-specific effect display is derived. The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the means G-4, it is possible to fully exert the function of switching between the specific effect display and the non-specific effect display as the effect display.

Means G-5. The right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked, and
Described in any of means G-1 to G-4, characterized in that the right to derive the specific effect display in stock can be exercised in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player. Gaming machine.

According to the means G-5, the right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked, and the enjoyment can be found in the new playability such as deriving the specific effect display at one's own timing. Further, for example, when a specific effect display is derived and an urgent display such as an error state notification is derived, the visual mode of the specific effect display is inevitably hindered. By configuring the stock, the exercise of such stock can be enjoyed later. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest caused by the deterioration of the visibility of the specific effect display due to the duplication of some display with respect to the specific effect display, and to ensure the playability of enjoying the specific effect display. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player. In addition, since the stocked effect display is, of course, a specific effect display, compared to a configuration in which, for example, an effect display that is not of interest to the player is stocked and various effects and the like attached to the stock are derived. By deriving (excessive) useless production, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player becomes uncomfortable.

Further, when the right to derive the specific effect display in stock is exercised to derive the specific effect display after the predetermined effect display having the derivability possibility period in the middle is started, the above means G-1 can be used. As described above, since the specific effect display is originally scheduled to be reproduced (along with the non-specific effect display) during the derivability period, the stock right of the specific effect display can be smoothly exercised. Furthermore, even after the derivability period has started, the specific effect display corresponding to the derivability period can be immediately derived. For example, the specific effect display can be derived even if the timing is slightly delayed. It is possible to avoid situations such as the moving image being interrupted or the image being distorted due to the inability to deal with the above or switching to the specific effect display. Therefore, it is possible to fully exert the function of stocking the specific effect display and exercising the stock right at the timing of the player.

Means G-6. When the specific effect display and the specific effect display overlap (specified number of times; one or more times), the right to derive the specific effect display can be stocked. The gaming machine according to 5.

According to the means G-6, it is possible to have the feeling that the specific effect displays are duplicated and lost, but that the specific effect display is gained. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the game of enjoying the specific effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the specific effect display that is difficult to see due to the duplicate derivation of multiple specific effect displays is stocked (the right to derive the same specific effect display as the derived one is granted). It may be configured so that the right to simply derive the specific effect display is stocked, and when the stocked right is used, the specific effect display of the mode according to the situation at that time is derived. good.

Means G-7. In the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disallowed display for which the overlap with the specific effect display is disallowed is duplicated. In this case, the derivation timing of at least one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is changed so that the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disapproval display do not overlap. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to means G-5 or G-6, wherein the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked.

According to the means G-7, by changing one of the derivation timings so that the specific effect display and the disallowed display do not overlap, the specific effect display can be fully enjoyed, and it is assumed that they overlap. However, since the specific effect display is stocked, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the feeling that the specific effect display and the disapproval display are duplicated and lost. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the game of enjoying the specific effect display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Means G-8. When exercising the right to derive the specific effect display in stock, the means G-5 to G- characterized in that the specific effect display in an aspect corresponding to the game situation at that time is set and derived. The gaming machine according to any one of 7.

According to the means G-8, it is possible to add pleasure such as in what manner the specific effect display is derived by exercising the right to derive the specific effect display at this timing. Therefore, it is possible to add value to the act of stocking a specific effect display.

Means G-9. Derivation of the specific effect display to be derived when the right to derive the specific effect display in stock is exercised when the operation to exercise the right to derive the specific effect display in stock is performed. The right to derive the specific effect display in stock when it is determined that at least a part of the period and the derivation period of the notification display that has information on the progress of the game and needs to be taught in real time overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-8, characterized in that the player does not exercise.

According to the means G-9, the information of the notification display can be surely recognized by the player. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the notification display is duplicated with respect to the specific effect display derived by using the stock, and the mode of the specific effect display is hindered.

Means G-10. The specific effect display is characterized in that it is provided with a rare specific effect display that is derived only when the right to derive the specific effect display that is stocked is exercised, or that is more likely to be derived. The gaming machine according to any one of G-5 to G-9.

According to the means G-10, it is possible to add value to an act such as stocking a specific effect display. In addition, the specific effect display derived by exercising the stock has plus alpha information (suggestions related to the winning / failing lottery, etc., its reliability is enhanced, or its reliability is enhanced, as compared with other specific effect displays. It may be configured so that the effectability is simply improved).

Means G-11. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-10, characterized in that a stock high accuracy state is provided in which the specific effect display is easily stocked.

According to the means G-11, it is possible to diversify the playability by utilizing the configuration of stocking the right to derive the specific effect display.

It should be noted that the stocked specific effect display is not derived with a 100% probability, and may be configured to be derived when a predetermined lottery is won. For example, when the input to exercise the right is input, a guide prompting the operation of the specific effect button 127 is derived, and a lottery is performed based on the operation of the specific effect button 127 (the winning probability does not have to be constant). Further, the winning probability may be determined at the time of stocking (according to the type of the specific effect display stocked, the game situation at the time of stocking, etc.), or may be determined at the time of lottery.

Means G-12. Means G-5 to G-11, which are configured to be able to derive the specific effect stock display indicating that the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked (holds the right). The gaming machine described in any of.

According to the means G-12, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the function that the specific effect display is stocked is not noticed, or the situation that the specific effect display is not noticed is stocked.

It should be noted that "the specific effect stock display may be configured to be able to teach or suggest the result of the winning / losing lottery (the degree of expectation of winning in the special gaming state)". In this case, by increasing the value of the specific effect stock display and visually recognizing the mode of the specific effect stock display, if the stock of the specific effect display is used at this timing, a rare specific effect display can be derived or it ends successfully. It is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that a specific effect display will be derived.

Means G-13. When the right to derive the specific effect display for a specified number of times is stocked, the specific effect stock display itself indicating the state in which the right to derive the specific effect display for a specified number of times is stocked is said. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-12, which is derived as a special stock display corresponding to a specific effect display.

According to the means G-13, it is possible to stock the specific effect display and to have the enjoyment found in the mode of the special stock display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

Means G-14. In the state where the special stock display is derived, when the opportunity to stock the right to derive the specific effect display comes, the special stock display changes to the corresponding mode (for example, a character as a special stock display). The gaming machine according to the means G-13, wherein the gaming machine performs a predetermined action.

According to the means G-14, even after the special stock display is derived, it is possible to secure the enjoyment of stocking the specific effect display (for the opportunity to come).

Means G-15. When the right to derive the specific effect display for a specified number of times is stocked, the right to derive the stocked specific effect display can be exercised even if the player does not input to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-14.

According to the means G-15, for example, the stock of the specific effect display is automatically exercised at an appropriate place (corresponding to the variable display with a high expectation of occurrence of a special gaming state) corresponding to the consumption of the stock. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the right to derive a specific effect display is only stocked and the right is not exercised, and the stock function for enjoying the specific effect display is not utilized well. Can be done. In particular, regarding the above means G-13, since the special stock display disappears when the stock is consumed, it is expected that the stock will not be consumed due to the feeling that it is regrettable to consume it, so it is configured to be automatically consumed. By doing so, the player can consume the stock without hesitation, and by keeping the special stock display displayed all the time, it is possible to suppress the situation where the special stock display loses its gratitude and increase the value of the special stock display. Can be done.

Means G-16. The gaming machine according to any one of means G-5 to G-15, wherein the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked based on the fact that the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period.

According to the means G-16, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a person is looking forward to a specific effect display but is not derived too much, resulting in a decrease in interest.

The specified period is defined as one variation (one game) from the start to the end of the variation display that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery that determines whether or not to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The case where the game is played a number of times, the case where the (predetermined) special game state is played a specified number of times, and the like can be mentioned.

Further, a specific effect point storage means for adding or subtracting points when the specific effect display is not derived for a specified period is provided, and the points stored in the specific effect point storage means are equal to or more than the specified points or less than or equal to the specified points. In that case, the right to derive the specific effect display may be granted. In addition, the specific effect display is derived (derivation is set) so that the points return to the initial value (the larger the point usage amount, the more the specific effect display of the rare pattern or the dedicated pattern is derived. It may be configured so that the points are reduced by the amount used.

Means G-17. When the condition establishment detection means is detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the win / loss related information regarding the win / loss lottery, and the information acquisition means.
A hold storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the pass / fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a hold storage means.
It is provided with a hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the pass / fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means.
At a stage before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined pass / fail related information stored in the hold storage means is executed, the mode of the hold display corresponding to the predetermined pass / fail related information is Any of means G-5 to G-16 characterized in that a hold look-ahead effect, which is a specific mode suggesting the content of the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the hold display, can be derived. Described gaming machine.

According to the means G-17, the use of stock is such as exercising the right to derive the specific production display in stock in a situation where the occurrence of a special gaming state can be expected by the hold look-ahead effect. It is possible to improve the convenience and the like.

Means G-18. A derivation preparation teaching means (for example, a derivation preparation state in the hold display means) indicating that the pre-reading hold effect can be derived in a derivation preparation state corresponding to the predetermined hold display displayed by the hold display means. It has a function that can derive a derivation preparation display indicating that
In the derivation preparation state, when the right to derive the specific effect display is stocked, the reserved display can be changed to the specific effect display by exercising the right to derive the stocked specific effect display. The gaming machine according to means G-17, wherein the hold look-ahead effect, which can be regarded as the specific aspect, is derived.

For example, due to the existence of the hold look-ahead effect, the player does not want to exercise the right to derive the specific effect display in stock unless the situation is such that the occurrence of a special game state can be expected. On the contrary, there is a concern that the exercise of stock will be suppressed by the hold look-ahead effect. In this regard, according to the means G-18, by using the stock of the specific effect display, it is possible to derive the hold look-ahead effect in which the hold display is a specific mode, and at the same time, the specific effect display can be enjoyed. .. Therefore, the value in use and the range of use of the stock of the specific effect display can be expanded, and the function of stocking the specific effect display can be more effectively utilized. It should be noted that the hold look-ahead effect may be derived in some cases without going through the derivation preparation state.

H. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

By the way, in recent years, by performing mobile interlocking games in which information such as brightness and volume can be adjusted and information is exchanged between a game machine and a server via a mobile communication terminal, display on the display means of the game machine is performed. Increasingly, the mode and the like can be changed according to the player's preference. As a result, elements that make the player feel uncomfortable can be eliminated as much as possible, and the attachment to the gaming machine can be increased. As a result, the repeat rate to the gaming machine is improved.

However, there are still cases where you get bored relatively early. For this reason, it is required to further strengthen the elements that further increase the interest in the gaming machine so that the player will want to play the game again for as long as possible.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing early boredom.

Means H-1. With a parts mounting part where special parts can be attached and detached (depending on the player)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a mode changing means for changing the mode of the dedicated part mounted on the part mounting portion.

According to the means H-1, the appearance of the gaming machine can be changed by attaching the dedicated parts to the parts mounting portion. Therefore, for example, when the player himself brings in special parts or rents special parts in the game hall, the game machine in the environment where the game is played as if he / she coordinates his / her room. The appearance of the game can be made to the player's taste, and the player can play the game comfortably. Further, even when the dedicated parts are installed in advance in the game hall, the appearance of the game machine can be changed individually. Furthermore, since the mode of the special parts attached to the parts mounting part can be changed, the special parts do not become a mere figurine, but can be used as a decoration or as a part of production. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of attaching special parts to the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to attach to the gaming machine something that protrudes forward of the gaming machine, which is difficult to attach as the gaming machine itself, and it is possible to improve the design and the like.

As a result, by attaching special parts selected by the player to the game machine and adjusting the appearance to his or her own hobbies and tastes, the interest and attachment to the game machine can be increased more positively. It is possible to prevent getting bored at an early stage and improve the repeat rate for gaming machines.

As the mode change of the dedicated part by the mode changing means, the dedicated part may be configured to be displaced as the part mounting portion is displaced, or in the case of the dedicated part having translucency, the mode may be changed. The mode may change due to changes in light on / off, brightness, emission color, etc., and in the case of a deformable dedicated part, the outer shape may change. Further, the player may be configured to appropriately change the mounting position and mounting direction of the dedicated parts.

Means H-2. The game according to means H-1, characterized in that a mounting detecting means capable of distinguishing between a state in which the dedicated part is mounted and a state in which the dedicated part is not mounted is provided in the part mounting portion. Machine.

According to the means H-2, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a process for changing the mode of the dedicated part and a driving operation are executed even though the dedicated part is not attached to the part mounting portion. can. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control, save power, and suppress deterioration due to use.

In addition, for example, when the game hall prepares the special parts and rents them to the player, the special parts are removed from the mounted state, so that the game machine announces that the special parts should be returned. It can be derived or configured so that the corresponding signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine so that the game hall personnel can know that the dedicated parts have been removed, and the dedicated parts are the players. It is possible to suppress the situation where the player is taken away without permission.

Further, for example, when the player prepares the dedicated parts and the player performs an operation to end the game (for example, when an operation to return the game value storage medium capable of storing the game value is performed). When an operation is performed to pay out the digitized and memorized game value of the game machine as the actual game value, etc.), be careful not to forget the special parts (that the special parts are attached). It is possible to derive the display and sound to be taught).

The mounting detecting means may be provided with a plurality of sensors or switches capable of detecting a predetermined portion of the dedicated part at a position invisible to the player or a position not touched by the player. Further, the mounting detecting means may be provided with a parts reading means capable of reading RFID (Radio frequency identification) information such as an IC tag as a parts information means provided on the dedicated part. In other words, instead of removing the dedicated parts from the parts mounting part, it is possible to suppress a situation in which something else is attached so that it cannot be understood.

Means H-3. The gaming machine according to means H-2, wherein a mounting reaction mode corresponding to the mounting of the dedicated part on the part mounting portion is derived based on the detection of the mounting detecting means.
According to the means H-3, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the dedicated parts are accurately attached to the parts attachment portion, and for example, as an attachment reaction mode, a greeting of a visit to the store or an attachment reaction effect of enthusiasm for the game is produced. When the game is held, the start of the game can be enlivened and the interest in installing special parts can be further increased.

Means H-4. The mode changing means
When the first dedicated part is attached to the part mounting portion, the mode of the first dedicated part is changed to a mode corresponding to the first dedicated part.
When a second dedicated part different from the first dedicated part is attached to the part mounting portion, the mode of the second dedicated part is different from the mode change of the first dedicated part. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-3, which is configured to be changeable in a mode according to the above.

According to the means H-4, different functions can be imparted to each type of the dedicated parts, and the interest of attaching the dedicated parts to the gaming machine can be further improved. It should be noted that the first dedicated part and the second dedicated part can be mounted on the same part mounting part, and a means for distinguishing whether the part mounting part is the first dedicated part or the second dedicated part is provided. It may be configured to include a first part mounting portion to which only the first dedicated part can be mounted and a second part mounting portion to which only the second dedicated part can be mounted.

Means H-5. Means H-1 to a feature in which a part reaction portion whose mode changes based on the attachment of the dedicated part to the part attachment portion is provided at a position different from that of the part attachment portion. The gaming machine according to any one of H-4.

According to the means H-5, the mode of the part reaction part can be changed to the corresponding mode only by attaching the dedicated part. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest in attaching special parts. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether the dedicated parts are properly attached.

Means H-6. The parts mounting portion is provided with a parts reading means capable of reading information of the parts information means provided in the dedicated part, and is configured to be able to execute processing based on the information read by the parts reading means. The gaming machine according to means H-1 to H-5, characterized in that (for example, a process of changing the mode of a dedicated part attached to a part mounting portion is turned on).

According to the means H-6, the type and the like of the special parts attached to the parts mounting portion are determined only by attaching the special parts, and the attachment reaction mode of the special parts (furthermore, the above means H-3) is performed. It is possible to change the mode of the effect means and the like, and the mode of the parts reaction unit of the means H-5) to the corresponding mode. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the interest in attaching the dedicated parts can be further increased.

Means H-7. (Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. The main control means to let
A special display means that is controlled by the main control means and is subjected to variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / losing lottery.
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means and can derive an effect display related to the variable display of the special display means.
The sub-control means is characterized in that when the dedicated part is attached to the part mounting portion, the effect display means can derive a display corresponding to the attachment of the dedicated part. The gaming machine according to any one of the means H-1 to H-6.

According to the means H-7, for example, when a special part is attached, the character displayed in the effect display means changes to another mode, and the corresponding change is brought about at the core of the effect. Therefore, you can get more interest in installing special parts. As a result, it is possible to raise expectations for the production in which the production display means and the dedicated parts are linked. The effect display means of this means corresponds to the means for deriving the attachment reaction mode of the means H-3 and the parts reaction part of the means H-5.

Means H-8. The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player.
The means H-7 is characterized in that, in a state where the dedicated parts are attached to the parts attaching portion, the mode of the specific effect display is derived as a mode different from the state in which the dedicated parts are not attached. The described gaming machine.

According to the means H-8, the mode of the specific effect display specified by the player can be changed by attaching the dedicated parts. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the interest in the derivation of the specific effect display and the dedicated parts. It should be noted that attaching the dedicated parts to the parts mounting portion may be an input operation to the gaming machine by the player for specifying the specific effect display. In this case, it is possible to save the trouble of input operation for specifying the specific effect display, and to raise the mood for playing the game machine that changes to the corresponding mode by attaching the dedicated parts.

Means H-9. A locking means that locks the dedicated part attached to the part mounting portion so that it cannot be removed.
The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-8, which comprises an unlocking means capable of releasing a locked state by the locking means.

According to the means H-9, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special parts are purposely removed and carried around in order to prevent the theft of the special parts in order to leave the seat for a short time such as going to the bathroom or buying a drink. In addition, as a measure against theft, it is possible to attach what is prepared in the game hall, and it is possible to improve convenience and the like.

Means H-10. (Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. The main control means to let
A special display means that is controlled by the main control means and is subjected to variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / losing lottery.
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine provided with an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means and can derive an effect display related to the variable display of the special display means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display in response to an input to the gaming machine by the player.
At least in a state where the specific effect display is derived, it is possible to execute a mode change of the dedicated part based on the displacement of the part mounting portion as a substitute for a specific effect other than the specific effect display or a specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-9, characterized in that it is configured.

According to the means H-10, in the state where the specific effect display is derived, the specific effect display can be enjoyed, and the information other than the specific effect display can be obtained through the parts mounting portion and the dedicated parts. It can be configured to be obtained by the sense of touch. Therefore, while suppressing the situation where the specific effect display is obstructed by other effects or notifications, the information that should have been obtained by the other effects or notifications is also obtained while keeping the line of sight in the specific effect display. be able to. It should be noted that "at least in the state where the specific effect display is derived, the reaction mode corresponding to the entry into the predetermined ball entry means is derived in the form of the displacement of the part mounting portion". good.

Means H-11. In the effect display means, the overlap between the derivation period of the specific effect display and the specific effect display is not permitted (the visibility of at least a part of the visual mode of the specific effect display is reduced or visually recognized. When it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the disapproval display (which makes it impossible) is derived, the mode changing means is the mode of the dedicated part attached to the part mounting portion. The gaming machine according to the means H-10, which is characterized by performing an effect of changing the above.

According to the means H-11, when the specific effect display that the player was looking forward to seeing overlaps with the obstruction effect display, the visibility of the specific effect display is reduced, but the special parts are used. The aspect changes. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to obstruction of visual recognition of the specific effect display.

Means H-12. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-11, wherein at least a part of the parts mounting portion is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the gaming machine main body.

According to the means H-12, the dedicated parts attached to the parts attachment portion can be operated, and the effectability can be improved. In addition, if the configuration is such that the player can touch the dedicated parts attached to the parts mounting part, it is possible to produce and suggest using changes in the feel, etc., which further improves the performance and gameability. It can be further planned.

Means H-13. The parts mounting portion includes a first component portion and a second component portion that project forward from the front surface of the gaming machine.
The first component is configured to be displaceable relative to the second component.
The gaming machine according to means H-12, wherein the dedicated parts have an elastic bag shape and are provided so as to cover the first component and the second component.

According to the means H-13, the dedicated part attached to the part attachment portion is deformed (outer shape changes) according to the displacement of the deformed portion of the part attachment portion. Therefore, a movable accessory for directing that has never existed will be provided, and the interest in special parts and, by extension, the gaming machine can be further increased. In particular, when the parts mounting portion is provided at a position where the player can always contact and the deformed portion is displaced according to the effect, it is possible to perform an effect utilizing the tactile transmission, and such an action effect can be obtained. It will be played more prominently.

Regarding pachinko machines, it is not necessary to move the pachinko machine to the shoulder at all times with the hand (left hand) opposite to the hand (right hand) that operates the launch operation means (launch handle) that is operated when launching the game ball. ) A parts mounting part is provided as a tactile transmission means that can change the mode that acts on the tactile sensation (the mode can be changed so that the change can be felt by the tactile sensation) at the position where it can be touched (grasped) (the symmetrical position of the launch handle). It may be done. Examples of the material of the dedicated parts include rubber, thermoplastic elastomer (olefin elastomer), sponge rubber, and synthetic sponge.

Means H-14. The gaming machine according to means H-13, wherein the second component, together with the first component and the dedicated parts, is configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface of the gaming machine.

According to the means H-14, it is possible to widen the range of production by the parts mounting portion and the dedicated parts, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means H-15. The gaming machine according to means H-13 or H-14, wherein the part mounting portion is configured so that the tension applied to the dedicated part can be changed.

According to the means H-15, it is possible to provide a novel effect such as changing the feel (hardness, tension) of the dedicated parts.

Means H-16. A launching means for launching a game ball,
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guided by the game ball launched by the launching means, and a game area.
A ball entry means that allows a game ball that moves in the game area to enter,
It is provided at a position where the player can operate the ball, and is provided with a launching operation means for launching the game ball by the launching means based on the player's operation.
The gaming machine according to any one of means H-11 to H-15, wherein the parts mounting portion is provided at a symmetrical position of the launching operating means or a position in the vicinity thereof in the gaming machine. ..

According to the means H-16, the hand (generally the right hand) opposite to the hand (generally the right hand) that operates the firing operation means can reach the position so that it will not get tired even if it is touched for a relatively long time (without moving it to the shoulder). Position). Therefore, while the specific effect display is derived, it is possible to continue to touch the dedicated parts attached to the parts mounting portion relatively easily, and the functions of the dedicated parts can be fully utilized.

Means H-17. Equipped with an input operation means that allows the player to perform input operations
In the effect display means, in a configuration in which an effect is derived such that if the input by the input operation means is correct, the effect is successful, and if the input is incorrect, the effect is unsuccessful.
When it is determined that the effect is successful when the input is performed by the input operation means.
Means H-1 characterized in that, in a state where the input operating means can be operated, an effect of teaching the correct input of the input operating means by the operation of the parts mounting portion can be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of H-16.

According to the means H-17, the player is surprised and delighted by being taught the guideline of the input in the state where the input by the input operation means is possible (the state where he / she is wondering what kind of input should be made). And, while expecting the result of the input to be taught, a feeling of exhilaration can be obtained during that time. As a result, it is possible to derive a production that can improve the interest.

Means H-18. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-17, which comprises a pressure sensor capable of detecting that a pressure is applied to the part mounting portion.

According to the means H-18, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a warning sound is emitted when a force is roughly applied to the parts mounting portion and the parts mounting portion is destroyed. In addition, a pressure gauge and a pressure storage means for storing the measured values of the pressure gauge are provided, and when a predetermined effect is performed based on the values stored in the pressure storage means, or when the parts mounting portion is damaged, etc. It can be used as a material to identify the cause.

Means H-19. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-18, wherein the part mounting portion is configured such that a contact portion with the dedicated part is replaceable.

According to the means H-19, parts that are relatively easily damaged or deteriorated, such as wear during attachment / detachment or use of dedicated parts, can be replaced independently, thereby improving convenience when replacing parts. Can be planned. For example, the engaged part of the part mounting part that engages with the engaging part of the dedicated part is configured in the shape of a hole, and a malicious player performs mischief such as stuffing the engaging part with a foreign object to mount the part. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the part becomes unusable or the work until reuse (for example, removal of padding) becomes difficult.

In addition, in order to suppress tampering with the parts mounting portion, when something other than the dedicated parts is mounted on the parts mounting portion based on the information grasped by the mounting detecting means described in the above means H-2. , The corresponding information may be output to the outside of the gaming machine, or the corresponding mode may be derived in the gaming machine.

Means H-20. The means H-1 to H are characterized in that the parts mounting portion is configured so as to be able to change state between a housed state in which contact from the outside is prohibited and an exposed state in which contact from the outside is possible. The gaming machine according to any one of -19.

According to the means H-20, it is possible to suppress tampering with the parts mounting portion.

Means H-21. The gaming machine according to any one of means H-1 to H-20, which comprises a line-of-sight input means capable of inputting based on a player's eye movement.

According to the means H-21, even in a state where both hands of the player are buried, it is possible to perform a predetermined input based on the player's will. Therefore, the range of things that can be done by the effect is expanded, and the effectability can be improved.

A light emitting unit capable of irradiating light (infrared rays) toward the player located in front, a light receiving unit that detects light emitted from the light emitting unit and reflected by the player's eyeball, and the light receiving unit. It is also possible to provide the line-of-sight detection means including the analysis means for analyzing the position of the player's eyes and the line-of-sight angle based on the detection information of the above. In other words, it is possible for the gaming machine to determine where the player is looking, that is, what information the player is trying to obtain, or what kind of operation the player is trying to perform. can. Therefore, for example, even if the player does not move his / her hand, the line of sight of the player can be detected and the corresponding process can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide a relatively large amount of information to the player while suppressing the complexity of the operation.

In addition, by configuring it so that the menu operation of the game can be performed without moving the hand at all, for example, a special part attached to the parts attachment part, a drink, a mobile communication terminal, etc. are held in the hand. It is possible to make a sudden selection in a state, or to make a selection in a situation where you do not want to use your hand as much as possible, such as when you are injured. Therefore, even in a situation where the use of a hand is withheld, operability comparable to that of the hand can be realized, and convenience can be improved. Furthermore, even a player who feels embarrassed about a predetermined selection / decision action can make a selection / decision secretly and without much effort. Therefore, even a shy or troublesome player can fully enjoy the game.

I. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In pachinko machines, when a game ball launched by a launching means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. The variable display means is used to perform variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480).

In addition, it is configured so that various effects are derived as the variable display and the progress of the special game state, and there are many players who go to the game hall looking forward to seeing a specific effect.

By the way, in general, the effects are diversified by deriving different effects in duplicate or changing the combination of the effects derived during a predetermined period (for example, one variable display). However, among the various productions, there is a desire to enjoy more of the specific productions that we are looking forward to (for example, the productions that are the centerpiece of gaming machines, the productions in which specific characters appear, etc.). ..

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of developing a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player. ..

Means I-1. Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display.
A first effect display is provided in which the specific effect display can be selected as one of the effect displays derived within the period.
The first effect display is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a compulsory setting process for setting so that the entire predetermined specific effect display is included and derived within the period of the first effect display. Gaming machine.

According to the means I-1, it is possible to surely increase the chances of deriving the specific effect display that the player is looking forward to or that is the effect of the centerpiece of the gaming machine. Therefore, even in a configuration in which a large number of production patterns are provided by diversifying the production, it is possible to further enjoy the specific production display. As a result, it is possible to develop a game that more respects the hobbies and tastes of the player.

Means I-2. At the start of the first effect display, a pattern determination process for determining a pattern of the effect display derived within the period of the first effect display, and a pattern determination process.
Resetting to determine whether or not the specific effect display is set as the effect display derived at the timing when the entire effect display is settled within the period of the first effect display among the effect displays determined by the pattern determination process. The gaming machine according to means I-1, wherein the unnecessary determination process can be executed.

According to the means I-2, the processing can be simplified. In addition, the original flow of the first effect display can be maintained as much as possible.

Means I-3. The effect display, which is set in the pattern determination process and then replaced with the specific effect display in the forced setting process, is characterized in that the order is shifted so as to be derived after the specific effect display. The gaming machine according to I-2.

According to the means I-3, the original flow of the first effect display can be maintained as much as possible. In addition, although it was not possible to set it as a specific effect display, it is necessary to avoid a situation in which the next favorite effect is replaced with a specific effect display and is omitted, resulting in a decrease in interest. Can be done.

Means I-4. Equipped with a specific operation means that can be operated by the player
When a predetermined effect display is derived in the effect display means, a predetermined operation input of the specific operation means is performed, so that the predetermined effect display derived in the effect display means is displayed as the specific effect. Configured to be identifiable as a display,
In the forced setting process, it is determined whether or not the specific effect display has been set, the forced setting process is executed when a positive determination is made, and the forced setting process is skipped when a negative determination is made. The gaming machine according to means I-1 or I-2.

According to the means I-4, the effect display that the player likes can be specified as the specific effect display. Therefore, it is possible to respond to more detailed needs, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the game. Moreover, the forced setting process can be surely performed.

Means I-5. When the condition establishment detection means is detected, the information acquisition means for acquiring the win / loss related information regarding the win / loss lottery, and the information acquisition means.
A hold storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the pass / fail related information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a hold storage means.
It is provided with a hold display means capable of deriving a hold display indicating that the pass / fail related information is stored in the storage area of the hold storage means.
The predetermined pass / fail related information corresponds to the special gaming state at a stage before the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the predetermined pass / fail related information stored in the hold storage means is executed. It is a configuration in which pre-reading processing is performed to determine whether or not there is.
The special gaming state is configured as the first effect display.
In the special gaming state, when the predetermined hit / fail related information stored in the holding storage means corresponds to the special gaming state, the setting for prohibiting the derivation of the specific effect display is configured to be executable. The gaming machine according to any one of means I-1 to I-4.

According to the means I-5, since the specific effect display that was supposed to be derived was not derived, it is possible to give a feeling of happiness on the contrary. In other words, it is possible to create an interesting situation in which it is happy whether or not the specific effect display is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Means I-6. The specific effect display was not derived in the special game state because the predetermined hit / miss related information stored in the hold storage means corresponds to the special game state in the special game state. in case of,
When the hold-ream special game state, which is the special game state, corresponding to the hit / fail-related information stored in the hold-reservation means is executed in the special game state, the effect display derived in the hold-ream special game state is derived. As a means, the specific effect display is configured so that the selection ratio of the specific effect display is increased, or the specific effect display that is not derived or is difficult to be derived except in the reserved continuous special gaming state is derived. The gaming machine according to I-5.

According to the means I-6, since the specific effect display was not derived in the immediately preceding special game state, the specific effect display can be greatly enjoyed in the current special game state.

Means I-7. In the effect display means, it is determined that at least a part of the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disallowed display for which the overlap with the specific effect display is disallowed is duplicated. In the case, the derivation timing of at least one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display can be changed so that the derivation period of the specific effect display and the derivation period of the disapproval display do not overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of means I-1 to I-6.

According to the means I-7, the specific effect display can be enjoyed more reliably.

It is also possible to appropriately combine the technical items described in the above means A, means B, means C, means D, means E, means F, means G, means H, and means I (means I). It is also possible to combine a part of each means).

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching An example is a ball game machine provided with a game area in which the game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means shall be a rotating gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. An example is a "reel-type gaming machine" configured so that a game value is given on condition that the information is specific identification information.

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (particularly, a rotary gaming machine using a ball of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed example, "an identification information string (design string; specifically, a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) composed of a plurality of identification information (designs) is displayed in a variable manner (specifically, a reel). It is equipped with a variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information string after (rotation of, etc.), and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The fluctuation of the identification information (design) is started, the fluctuation of the identification information (design) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification aligned on the effective line at the time of the stop. The game value is given on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball saucer (upper plate, etc.) is provided to take in the game ball from the ball saucer, and the ball saucer is provided with the ball saucer. An example is a gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball, and configured so that a game start condition is satisfied when the game ball is taken in by the take-in means.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decorative design Display device, 43a ... 1st special display device, 43b ... 2nd special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub control device.

Claims (1)

Condition establishment detection means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
When the condition establishment detection means is detected, a winning / failing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the winning / failing lottery is won, the special gaming state is generated. Main control means and
A special display means for variable display of identification information that teaches the result of the winning / failing lottery, and
Sub-control means capable of executing control based on the information from the main control means, and
In a gaming machine including an effect display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means.
The sub-control means includes an effect display specifying means capable of specifying a predetermined effect display in the effect display means as a specific effect display.
As the display in the effect display means, there are a permission display in which duplication with the specific effect display is permitted and a disapproval display in which duplication with the specific effect display is prohibited.
Whether or not at least a part of the specific effect display and the disallowed display overlaps when the specific effect display is started in the specific content display in which the specific effect display is derived at any timing. Duplicate discrimination processing is performed,
When it is determined by the duplication determination process that the specific effect display and the disapproval display overlap, the derivation timing of one of the specific effect display and the disapproval display is changed. A game machine to play.

Images